Available courses

prince2.pngprince2.png

The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation course provides a complete introduction to the world’s leading project management methodology. Designed for aspiring project managers, team leaders, coordinators and anyone involved in project delivery, this course explains how PRINCE2 offers a structured, flexible and scalable approach suitable for any industry or organisation.

This training introduces the full PRINCE2 framework, including the seven Principles, seven Practices, and seven Processes that ensure clear governance, effective planning, controlled delivery and successful project outcomes. You will learn how PRINCE2 establishes strong business justification, defines roles and responsibilities, manages risk, controls quality and ensures consistent communication throughout the project lifecycle.

Through practical examples and scenario-based learning, the course helps you understand how PRINCE2 can be applied to real projects. You will explore how projects are started, planned, monitored, delivered and closed using te PRINCE2 model. You will also learn the importance of tailoring PRINCE2 to suit different project sizes, complexities and organisational environments.

This course prepares you for the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation exam, giving you the knowledge, confidence and terminology needed to work effectively in a PRINCE2-based project environment. Whether you are new to project management or seeking a recognised certification to enhance your career, PRINCE2 Foundation provides the essential grounding you need.

What’s Included

  • Duration of the course (e.g., 10–12 hours for eLearning)
  • Access period (e.g., 12 months)
  • Tutor support
  • Exam simulator / mock exams
  • PRINCE2 process map
  • Optional printed or digital PRINCE2 manual
  • Preparation for the PRINCE2 Foundation exam

Delivery Options

The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation course is available in multiple formats to suit your learning style and schedule. The content is identical across all delivery methods, covering the full PRINCE2 framework, Principles, Practices, Processes, and exam preparation.

Delivery Options & Pricing

  • eLearning / Online Self-Paced with  ILX and Drtutor support – From £731.50
    Fully online interactive course delivered by ILX and Drtutor support , approx. 10–12 hours of study, 12 months’ access to all course materials, full tutor support via email or chat, PRINCE2 process map for reference, mock exam / exam simulator included.

  • Live Virtual Classroom with ILX Tutors – From £1,143.75
    Real-time instructor-led training delivered by accredited ILX tutors, interactive scenario-based exercises and discussions, full tutor support, PRINCE2 process map and mock exam included, certificate of completion.

  • In-Person Classroom with ILX Tutors / On-Site – From £1,542.75
    Face-to-face training delivered by ILX-accredited instructors, hands-on activities, group exercises and scenario walkthroughs, full course materials and PRINCE2 process map, access to mock exam and guidance for Foundation exam, certificate of completion.

  • All options prepare you fully for the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation certification exam, giving you the knowledge, confidence, and skills to work effectively in a PRINCE2-managed project environment.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The key concepts and terminology of PRINCE2® 7


The seven PRINCE2® Principles and how they guide successful projects


The seven PRINCE2® Practices: Business Case, Organisation, Quality, Plans, Risk, Change, Progress


The seven PRINCE2® Processes from project start-up to project closure


How to define roles, responsibilities and project governance structures


How PRINCE2® manages risk, quality, change, and communication


How to apply a stage-by-stage management approach


How to tailor PRINCE2® to different environments and project types


The knowledge required to pass the PRINCE2® Foundation certification exam

Key facts:
Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Certification: PRINCE2 Project Management Foundation
  • Duration: eLearning approximately 12 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: No specific project management or PRINCE2 experience required, although basic project awareness is helpful
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning 12 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days


Who It’s For

This course is designed for professionals who are new to project management or who support project delivery and want to build a strong grounding in a globally recognised project methodology. It is suitable for aspiring project managers, junior project professionals, team members involved in project delivery, business analysts, coordinators, operational staff, and anyone who needs a structured and proven approach to managing change and delivering successful projects across different industries.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 60
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Delivery Method: Online remotely proctored exam


Pre-Course Requirements

There are no mandatory prerequisites for this course, and learners do not need previous PRINCE2 knowledge to participate. Learners selecting the classroom or live virtual classroom formats must complete the mandatory online pre-course study to ensure they are fully prepared before attending the instructor-led sessions. It is recommended that learners have a basic understanding of project work to help contextualise the methodology.


FAQ

1-What is the PRINCE2 Project Management Foundation certification?
This certification provides an introduction to the PRINCE2 methodology, covering the principles, practices, and processes used to manage projects effectively in any environment.

2-Does the PRINCE2 Foundation certification expire?
The PRINCE2 Foundation certification does not expire and remains valid for life once passed.

3-How long does it take to complete the PRINCE2 Foundation course?
Most learners complete the eLearning in around 12 hours, while live virtual classroom and classroom formats run over three days.

4-Is the PRINCE2 Foundation exam difficult?
The exam is considered manageable with structured study, and the ILX training materials are designed to fully prepare candidates.

5-Do I need prior project management experience?
No prior experience is required, although familiarity with projects and organisational structures can help with understanding the content.

6-What topics are covered in PRINCE2 Foundation?
The course covers key concepts of projects and PRINCE2, the methodology’s principles, the role of people in projects, the seven practices, and the seven processes.

7-Is the Foundation certification enough to start managing projects?
Yes, Foundation gives a structured framework for project delivery, although many professionals continue to Practitioner level to apply the method in more depth.

8-Is PRINCE2 Foundation recognised globally?
Yes, PRINCE2 is recognised worldwide and adopted across public and private sectors internationally.

9-What skills will I gain after completing PRINCE2 Foundation?
Learners gain the ability to understand project stages, governance, documentation, roles, controls, and structured approaches to delivery.

10-Is the exam included with the course?
Yes, all ILX delivery formats include the official Foundation exam.

11-How is the exam delivered?
The exam is delivered online through a remote proctoring system that verifies identity and ensures exam conditions.

12-Do I need to buy the official manual?
The eLearning package includes a digital manual, while classroom and live virtual formats may offer the manual as an optional hard copy.

13-Can I use the Foundation certification to progress to Practitioner level?
Yes, Foundation is a mandatory prerequisite for taking PRINCE2 Practitioner.

14-How should I prepare for the exam?
Learners should use the official manual, mock exams, process map, and ILX exam simulator for effective preparation.

15-Is PRINCE2 Foundation relevant for agile environments?
Yes, PRINCE2 provides a structured governance layer that complements Agile delivery approaches.

16-What industries use PRINCE2?
PRINCE2 is used in IT, engineering, finance, healthcare, government, construction, retail, and many other sectors.

17-Do employers value PRINCE2 Foundation?
Yes, employers recognise PRINCE2 as a benchmark for reliable project delivery capability.

18-Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes, candidates may purchase Take2 exam insurance as an optional extra for a free retake.

19-Does the course include tutor support?
Yes, ILX provides tutor assistance across all delivery methods.

20-What if English is not my first language?
Reasonable adjustments may be available through the exam provider upon application.

Requirements:

Prerequisites

You must hold a valid certification in a relevant and specified project management qualification. Refer to the FAQs on this page for the complete list. 


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
prince2.pngprince2.png

The PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner course builds on the Foundation level, providing advanced knowledge and practical skills to manage projects using the globally recognised PRINCE2 methodology. Designed for project managers, team leaders, coordinators, and anyone responsible for delivering projects, this course equips learners to apply PRINCE2 principles, practices, and processes in real-world scenarios to ensure successful project outcomes.

This training focuses on the application of the seven PRINCE2® Principles, seven Practices, and seven Processes, helping learners understand how to tailor the methodology to suit project complexity, organisational requirements, and stakeholder expectations. You will learn how to use PRINCE2 to manage project risks, control quality, monitor progress, and maintain business justification throughout the project lifecycle.

Through scenario-based exercises, case studies, and practical examples, learners gain hands-on experience applying PRINCE2 to different project environments. The course explores how to initiate, plan, monitor, control, and close projects effectively, while ensuring clear governance, defined roles and responsibilities, and consistent communication. Learners also develop the skills to adapt PRINCE2 for complex projects, manage exceptions, and make informed decisions at each stage.

This course prepares learners for the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner exam, giving them the knowledge, confidence, and terminology required to manage projects professionally. Whether you are a project manager seeking to advance your skills or a professional aiming for internationally recognised certification, PRINCE2 Practitioner provides the essential tools and expertise to lead projects successfully in any industry.


What’s Included

  • Duration of the course (approx. 12–15 hours for eLearning)
  • Access period (12 months for online learners)
  • Tutor support
  • Exam simulator / mock exams
  • PRINCE2 process map
  • Optional printed or digital PRINCE2 manual
  • Preparation for the PRINCE2 Practitioner exam

Delivery Options & Pricing

  • eLearning / Online Self-Paced with ILX and Drtutor support – From £850
    Fully online interactive course delivered by ILX and drtutor support approx. 12–15 hours of study, 12 months’ access to all course materials, full tutor support via email or chat, PRINCE2 process map for reference, mock exam / exam simulator included.

  • Live Virtual Classroom with ILX Tutors – From £1,320
    Real-time instructor-led training delivered by accredited ILX tutors, interactive scenario-based exercises and discussions, full tutor support, PRINCE2 process map and mock exam included, certificate of completion.

  • In-Person Classroom with ILX Tutors / On-Site – From £1,780
    Face-to-face training delivered by ILX-accredited instructors, hands-on activities, group exercises and scenario walkthroughs, full course materials and PRINCE2 process map, access to mock exam and guidance for Practitioner exam, certificate of completion.

All options prepare learners fully for the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner certification exam, equipping them with the skills to manage complex projects with confidence and professionalism.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Apply the PRINCE2® Principles to complex project scenarios

  • Use the seven PRINCE2® Practices to manage risk, quality, change, and progress

  • Implement the seven PRINCE2® Processes to control and deliver projects successfully

  • Tailor PRINCE2® to different project types, sizes, and organisational environments

  • Define roles, responsibilities, and governance structures for effective project management

  • Handle real-world project challenges using scenario-based techniques

  • Prepare to pass the PRINCE2® Practitioner certification exam with confidence


Key facts:

Facts 

  • Course Level: Practitioner
  • Certification: PRINCE2® Project Management Practitioner
  • Duration: 20 study hours for eLearning, 2 days for Live Virtual Classroom, 2 days for Classroom delivery
  • Exam Duration: 150 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: A valid PRINCE2 Foundation or other approved project management certification
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning (20 hours), Live Virtual Classroom (2 days), Classroom (2 days)


Who It’s For

This course is designed for practising project managers, aspiring project managers, project coordinators, business analysts, team managers, and professionals responsible for the planning, execution and control of projects who need to apply PRINCE2 in practical environments. It is also suitable for individuals who aim to enhance their capability in using structured methodologies to deliver predictable and well-controlled project outcomes.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 150 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 70 scenario-based multiple-choice questions
  • Question Type: Scenario multiple choice, open book (official manual allowed)
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Delivery Method: Online remote-proctored exam or in-class exam depending on training method


Pre-Course Requirements

Learners must hold a valid PRINCE2 Foundation certificate or an approved equivalent recognised by the exam board. Learners selecting Classroom or Live Virtual Classroom must also complete mandatory pre-course reading to ensure they are familiar with the key concepts before attending the instructor-led sessions.


Frequently Asked Questions- FAQs

1. What is the purpose of the PRINCE2 Practitioner qualification?
The PRINCE2 Practitioner qualification demonstrates your ability to apply and tailor the PRINCE2 methodology in real project environments.

2. Is the exam included with this course?
Yes, the Practitioner exam is included with all delivery formats.

3. Do I need PRINCE2 Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes, a valid PRINCE2 Foundation certificate or equivalent is required before sitting the Practitioner exam.

4. How long is the Practitioner exam?
The exam lasts 150 minutes and contains scenario-based questions.

5. Is the Practitioner exam open book?
Yes, you may use the official PRINCE2 manual during the exam.

6. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
Most learners complete the eLearning course in approximately 20 hours of study time.

7. How long is the Live Virtual Classroom option?
The Live Virtual Classroom is typically delivered over two consecutive instructor-led days.

8. Does the Classroom course also include workshops?
Yes, the Classroom format includes practical group exercises and scenario-based workshops.

9. What support is provided during eLearning?
You receive tutor assistance and access to online resources throughout your licence period.

10. How long is my eLearning licence valid?
Your licence remains active for 12 months from the date of activation.

11. What score do I need to pass the exam?
You must score at least 60 percent to pass and achieve Practitioner status.

12. How is the Practitioner exam delivered?
The exam is delivered online through remote proctoring or in person as part of a classroom course.

13. Do Practitioner certificates expire?
Yes, Practitioner status is valid for three years and can be renewed through re-certification or subscription to MyAxelos.

14. Is PRINCE2 Practitioner recognised internationally?
Yes, PRINCE2 is widely adopted across the UK, Europe, Middle East, Australia and many global organisations.

15. Are there any recommended study materials?
The official PRINCE2 manual is recommended and is provided with the course.

16. Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes, you may retake the exam, and some learners choose optional exam insurance for a discounted retake.

17. Is this course suitable for people without project management experience?
It is recommended that learners have some practical project exposure before attempting Practitioner.

18. Will I learn how to tailor PRINCE2?
Yes, tailoring PRINCE2 to different project scenarios is a major focus of the Practitioner course.

19. Is pre-course reading required?
Yes, especially for Classroom and Live Virtual Classroom learners, pre-course reading is essential.

20. Does the course include real project scenarios?
Yes, all training formats use practical scenarios to develop applied project management capability.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 16 Hrs
prince2.pngprince2.png

The PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner combined programme is the most comprehensive and efficient way to become a fully certified PRINCE2 project manager. This integrated course takes you from understanding the fundamentals of PRINCE2 to confidently applying the method in real project environments — giving you both theoretical knowledge and practical capability in one structured learning path.

Designed for aspiring project managers, team leaders, coordinators, PMO staff and anyone responsible for delivering projects, this programme offers a complete exploration of the seven Principles, seven Practices and seven Processes that define the PRINCE2 project management methodology. You will learn how projects are started, planned, controlled, delivered and closed using a globally recognised, scalable and flexible framework used by organisations in every industry.

Through real-world examples, scenario-based learning, practical application exercises and exam-focused preparation, you will understand not only what PRINCE2 is, but how to apply it effectively in different environments. You will explore how to tailor the method to different project sizes, levels of complexity, organisational structures and delivery approaches — including agile and hybrid contexts.

This programme fully prepares you for both the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation exam (testing your knowledge and concepts) and the PRINCE2® 7 Practitioner exam (testing your ability to apply PRINCE2 in realistic project scenarios). By the end, you will have the confidence, capability and certification needed to manage and support PRINCE2-based projects professionally.

Whether you are starting your project management career or seeking to advance into project leadership roles, this course provides the complete foundation and practitioner-level qualification you need.


What’s Included

  • Accredited PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner training
  • Foundation exam (official)
  • Practitioner exam (official)
  • Official PRINCE2® 7 manual (digital or printed depending on package)
  • PRINCE2® 7 process map
  • Mock exams and exam simulator
  • Tutor support
  • 12-month access (eLearning)
  • Course materials and downloadable resources
  • Certificate upon passing each exam.


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by  ILX and Drtutor support From £1,230.00

  • Full online, self-paced Foundation + Practitioner programme
  • Approx. 30–35 hours total learning
  • 12 months’ access to all modules
  • Tutor support via email and chat
  • PRINCE2 process map included
  • Mock exams and exam simulator
  • Recommended for independent learners or those needing flexibility

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors

Accredited instructor-led online course

  • Real-time training delivered by ILX-accredited PRINCE2 experts
  • Interactive workshops, case studies and group discussions
  • Structured timetable over consecutive days or split sessions
  • Exam preparation support and guidance
  • Ideal for learners who prefer live instruction and collaboration

In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited Trainers

Available in the UK and internationally

  • Face-to-face learning with certified ILX instructors
  • Practical group activities and scenario walkthroughs
  • Printed materials and PRINCE2 process map
  • Full preparation for both exams
  • On-site delivery available for corporate groups
  • Perfect for organisations seeking team-based training

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):
  • Understand key PRINCE2® concepts, roles and terminology

  • Apply the seven Principles to maintain a controlled and well-governed project

  • Use the seven Practices to manage Business Case, Quality, Risk, Change, Plans, Organisation and Progress

  • Navigate the seven PRINCE2 Processes from project start-up to closure

  • Define project roles, responsibilities and governance structures

  • Manage risk, quality, change requests, communication and planning

  • Apply PRINCE2’s stage-by-stage management approach

  • Tailor PRINCE2 for different industries, technologies and project sizes

  • Work confidently in PRINCE2-based environments

  • Successfully pass the PRINCE2® 7 Foundation and Practitioner exams

Key facts:

PRINCE2® 7 Foundation & Practitioner training. Learn the full PRINCE2 methodology and become a certified project manager. Includes exams, mock tests, tutor support and delivery options: eLearning, virtual classroom or in-person.


FAQ

It is a complete programme that teaches the full PRINCE2® 7 project management method and prepares you for both official exams.

Who should take this course?

Ideal for new or experienced project managers, PMO staff, coordinators, consultants and anyone responsible for project delivery.

Do I need the Foundation certificate before Practitioner?

Yes — Foundation must be passed first. This combined course prepares you for both in one structured programme.

How long does the course take?

eLearning usually takes 30–35 hours. Virtual and classroom options are typically delivered over 4–5 days.

Are the exams included?

Yes. Both the PRINCE2 Foundation and PRINCE2 Practitioner exams are included.

Is the course accredited?

Yes — this programme follows the official PRINCE2® 7 syllabus and is delivered by accredited ILX trainers or drtutor eLearning.

Can I study at my own pace?

Yes — the drtutor eLearning package gives you 12 months’ access so you can study anytime.

Is this course suitable for beginners?

Yes — no previous experience is required. Foundation covers the basics and Practitioner builds real application.


Delivery Comparison Table 

Delivery OptionProviderFormatKey FeaturesPrice From
eLearning / Self-PaceddrtutorOnline12 months’ access, interactive modules, mock exams, tutor support£1,230.00
Live Virtual ClassroomILX TutorsInstructor-led onlineReal-time lessons, discussions, group exercises, exam prep£1,981.00
In-Person Classroom / On-SiteILX TutorsFace-to-faceHands-on training, printed materials, team workshops£2,476.00

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 35Hrs
prince2-agile-drtutor.gifprince2-agile-drtutor.gif

The PRINCE2 Agile Foundation course combines the robust governance and structured project-management framework of PRINCE2 with the flexibility, responsiveness and team-centric practices of Agile. Designed for project managers, Scrum practitioners, product owners, business analysts or anyone delivering projects in dynamic environments, this course helps you manage projects with both control and agility.

You will learn how PRINCE2’s governance, roles, and control mechanisms integrate with Agile practices like iterative delivery, frequent feedback, and collaborative planning — enabling projects to stay adaptable while maintaining structure, accountability, and quality. Through real-world scenarios, practical examples, and method-tailoring guidance, you’ll discover not only what PRINCE2 Agile means, but how to apply it in your organisation to deliver value efficiently and reliably.

This training also fully prepares you for the official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification. On completion, you’ll have the knowledge, terminology, and confidence to work in or manage Agile-aligned PRINCE2 projects — a powerful advantage in today’s project environments.

What’s Included

  • Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Foundation training
  • Official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation exam voucher
  • Official PRINCE2 Agile manual (digital; optional printed copy)
  • PRINCE2 Agile process map / reference materials
  • Tutor support during the course
  • Mock exam / practice questions (if self-paced/eLearning)
  • Course completion certificate upon passing exam
Delivery Options & Pricing

  • eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX & Drtutor
    Self-paced online learning with full access to course content, manual, process maps and exam voucher. Price: £730 + VAT (to be confirmed).

  • Live Virtual Classroom – ILX Accredited Tutors
    Instructor-led virtual training covering all course modules, live interaction, exam preparation. Price: £1350+ VAT (subject to availability).

  • In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited
    Face-to-face training sessions led by ILX tutors, including workshops, group exercises and exam preparation — ideal for corporate teams. Price: £1610 + VAT (contact for quote).

Note: Exact prices may vary depending on location, schedule and VAT. Please request a quote when booking.

  • For classroom or live-virtual delivery, the course typically spans three days
  • For self-paced eLearning, most providers estimate about 12 hours of study time for the Foundation level.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Understand Agile mindset and core Agile principles

  • Describe how PRINCE2 and Agile integrate under the PRINCE2 Agile framework

  • Explain PRINCE2 Agile terminology, roles, governance and artefacts

  • Apply Agile practices (e.g. Scrum, Kanban, Lean-Startup techniques) within PRINCE2-managed projects

  • Tailor PRINCE2 governance and planning for Agile project delivery

  • Adapt project controls, risk management, and quality assurance to Agile contexts

  • Support teams in delivering incremental value through flexible project execution

  • Prepare effectively for the PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification exam


Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Foundation (official)

  • Accreditation: by PeopleCert / AXELOS via ILX Group

  • Prerequisites: None — prior PRINCE2 or Agile experience helpful but not required 

  • Exam Format: 60-minute multiple-choice, closed-book, 50 questions, pass mark 60% 

  • Languages: English (ILX offers versions in different languages) 

Who It’s For

Project managers, programme managers, Scrum Masters, Agile coaches, business analysts, product owners, change managers and professionals delivering or supporting projects who want to combine structure and flexibility. Perfect for organisations seeking to adopt Agile within a controlled PM governance structure.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Do I need prior PRINCE2 or Agile experience?
No. This is an entry-level foundation course. A basic understanding of projects helps, but prior certification isn’t required. 

Is the PRINCE2 Agile exam included?
Yes — the course package includes the official exam voucher.

Is the course available online?
Yes — both self-paced eLearning and live virtual classroom options are available alongside in-person training. 

Can I combine PRINCE2 Agile with existing PRINCE2 or Agile certifications?
Yes. PRINCE2 Agile builds on PRINCE2’s structure while integrating Agile practices — making it suitable whether you already use PRINCE2, Agile, or both. 

What will I gain on completion?
You’ll earn the official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification, understand how to plan, govern and deliver Agile-aligned projects under PRINCE2, and be able to support or lead hybrid Agile-Governed projects effectively.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 12 Hrs
prince2 agile-partitioner.pngprince2 agile-partitioner.png

The PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner course is designed for experienced project professionals who want to combine the control and governance of PRINCE2 with the flexibility and responsiveness of Agile. Building on the Foundation level, this course focuses on applying PRINCE2 Agile principles, practices, and processes in complex, real-world projects.

You will learn how to integrate Agile approaches, such as Scrum, Kanban, Lean Startup, and iterative delivery, into PRINCE2-managed projects. The course explores tailoring the methodology to fit project context, adapting governance structures, managing change-driven initiatives, and guiding Agile teams in fast-paced, dynamic environments.

Through practical, scenario-based exercises and real-world examples, you’ll understand not just the theory of PRINCE2 Agile but also how to apply it to improve project outcomes, ensure consistent delivery of value, and maintain control and quality in any organisation.

By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam, giving you the confidence, terminology, and strategic insight to lead Agile-aligned projects with both structure and adaptability.

What’s Included

  • Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner training
  • Official PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam voucher
  • Comprehensive digital course materials and manual
  • Scenario-based exercises and real-world case studies
  • Tutor support throughout the course
  • Mock exam / practice questions
  • Course completion certificate upon passing the exam
Delivery Options & Pricing

  • eLearning – Delivered by drtutor
    Self-paced online training with full access to digital course materials, scenario-based exercises, mock exams, and tutor support. Price: £730 + VAT

  • Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
    Real-time instructor-led training with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Price: £1,250 + VAT

  • In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
    Face-to-face training led by ILX-accredited instructors, including hands-on activities, workshops, and scenario walkthroughs. Price: £1,600 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Integrate Agile practices within the PRINCE2 framework to deliver projects efficiently

  • Tailor PRINCE2 processes, themes, and governance to fit Agile environments

  • Lead and manage Agile teams, ensuring clear roles, responsibilities, and collaboration

  • Use iterative planning, incremental delivery, and adaptive management to handle project complexity

  • Apply PRINCE2 Agile controls for risk, quality, and change management in dynamic environments

  • Evaluate and adjust project delivery strategies using real-world scenarios

  • Make informed decisions to ensure projects deliver value consistently

  • Confidently sit and pass the PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner exam


Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner
  • Prerequisites: Valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation (or approved certification)
  • Exam format: 150-minute multiple-choice scenario-based open-book exam, 60% pass mark
  • Duration: Classroom / Virtual Classroom – 2 days; approx. 20–21 hours guided learning
  • Language: English
Who It’s For

Project managers, programme managers, Agile coaches, Scrum Masters, business analysts, product owners, change managers, PMO leads, and other professionals responsible for delivering complex projects. Ideal for anyone looking to combine structured governance with Agile flexibility to improve project outcomes.

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Do I need the Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes. A valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certificate or other approved qualification is required to take the Practitioner exam.

Is there an online self-paced option?
No. The Practitioner course is only offered through live virtual classrooms or in-person training led by ILX-accredited instructors.

How will this course help me in real projects?
You will learn to tailor PRINCE2 processes and Agile practices to fit your project’s context, manage iterative delivery, guide teams in dynamic environments, and maintain control and quality, ensuring consistent delivery of value.

What is included in the exam?
The exam is scenario-based, multiple choice, open-book (using the official manual), and covers practical application of PRINCE2 Agile in complex projects.

How long does the course take?
The course is typically 2 days for live delivery, with an estimated 20–21 hours of guided learning.

Will I receive a certificate?
Yes. Upon passing the exam, you receive the official PRINCE2 Agile Practitioner certificate.

Can I combine this with other certifications?
Absolutely. This course complements PRINCE2 Foundation, PRINCE2 Agile Foundation, and other project management or Agile certifications, enabling hybrid governance and delivery skills.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
prince2 agile-fundation-partitioner.pngprince2 agile-fundation-partitioner.png

The PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner course combines the structured governance of PRINCE2 with the flexibility and responsiveness of Agile frameworks. This comprehensive programme first builds a solid foundation through the Foundation level, then advances to the Practitioner level, where you will apply PRINCE2 Agile principles, practices, and processes in real-world project scenarios.

You will explore how to manage projects in dynamic, fast-paced environments, integrating Agile techniques such as Scrum, Kanban, and Lean Startup while maintaining PRINCE2 governance. Scenario-based exercises, case studies, and practical workshops ensure you not only understand the theory but can apply it effectively in your projects.

By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared for both the PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner certification exams, equipped with the skills, confidence, and professional language to deliver projects successfully across industries and organisational environments.


What’s Included

  • Accredited PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner training materials
  • Official exam vouchers for both Foundation and Practitioner levels
  • Digital course content including scenario-based exercises and mock exams
  • Tutor support throughout the course
  • PRINCE2 Agile process and framework guides
  • Certificate of completion upon passing the exams

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX , drtutor exam support
Self-paced online training with full access to digital course materials, scenario-based exercises, mock exams, and tutor support. Price: £1,140 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors
Instructor-led virtual training with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Price: £2000 + VAT

In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face training with ILX-accredited instructors, including hands-on workshops, group exercises, and scenario walkthroughs. Price: £2600 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Understand the principles, practices, and processes of PRINCE2 Agile

  • Integrate Agile methods within the PRINCE2 governance framework

  • Tailor PRINCE2 Agile controls, processes, and management products for any project environment

  • Lead Agile teams effectively within structured projects

  • Apply iterative planning, incremental delivery, and continuous improvement in real projects

  • Manage risk, quality, change, and communication within Agile-PRINCE2 projects

  • Confidently sit and pass both PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner exams


Key facts:
Key Facts

  • Certification: PRINCE2 Agile Foundation & Practitioner
  • Prerequisites: Valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation or approved equivalent required for Practitioner
  • Exam Format: Foundation – 60 minutes, 50 multiple-choice questions, 50% pass mark; Practitioner – 150 minutes, scenario-based, open-book, 60% pass mark
  • Recommended Study Time: eLearning approx. 20–25 hours; Live Virtual Classroom / In-Person 3 days
  • Materials: Digital course pack, official manual, scenario exercises, exam vouchers, tutor support

Who It’s For

Project managers, Agile practitioners, Scrum Masters, product owners, PMO leads, business analysts, programme and change managers, and professionals responsible for delivering projects in Agile or hybrid governance environments.


Frequently Asked Questions (Expanded FAQ)

Do I need to complete the Foundation before the Practitioner?
Yes, a valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certificate or approved equivalent is required to enrol in the Practitioner course. This ensures you have the essential knowledge of PRINCE2 Agile principles and terminology before advancing.

Is there an online self-paced learning option?
Yes. The eLearning format allows you to study flexibly at your own pace. You get full access to all digital course materials, scenario exercises, mock exams, and tutor support for 12 months.

What is the format and duration of the exams?

  • Foundation Exam: 60 minutes, 50 multiple-choice questions, 50% pass mark.

  • Practitioner Exam: 150 minutes, open-book, scenario-based multiple-choice questions, 60% pass mark.

Will I receive a certificate after passing?
Yes. Upon successfully passing the exams, you will receive official PRINCE2 Agile Foundation and Practitioner certificates.

Can this course help me manage hybrid or Agile-governed projects?
Absolutely. You will learn how to integrate Agile practices into PRINCE2 governance, tailor processes, and lead teams in complex project environments. This equips you to manage both traditional and Agile projects effectively.

What support is available during the course?
All learners receive full tutor support, whether studying online or in a live classroom. You can ask questions, get guidance on exercises, and receive practical tips for the exams.

How long does it take to complete the course?

  • eLearning: approximately 20–25 hours, flexible study.

  • Live Virtual Classroom / In-Person: 3 full days of instructor-led training including exercises, scenarios, and exam preparation.

Are there any prerequisites for the course?
For the Foundation level, no prior Agile or PRINCE2 knowledge is required. For the Practitioner level, a valid PRINCE2 Agile Foundation certification or approved equivalent is mandatory.

Can I apply what I learn immediately in my projects?
Yes. The course is designed to provide practical skills and scenario-based learning, so you can apply Agile methods within PRINCE2 projects immediately, tailoring governance and delivery to your organisation’s needs.

Is this course suitable for experienced project managers?
Yes. Experienced project managers will gain advanced skills in integrating Agile and PRINCE2, enabling them to lead hybrid projects and improve delivery efficiency and team collaboration.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 26Hrs
Project Management Professional (PMP)®.pngProject Management Professional (PMP)®.png

The Project Management Professional (PMP)® certification is one of the most respected and globally recognised credentials for experienced project managers. Issued by the Project Management Institute (PMI), PMP validates that an individual has the practical experience, formal education, and professional competence required to lead and direct complex projects successfully across industries and sectors. This course is designed for professionals who already operate within project environments and are seeking to formalise, strengthen, and internationally validate their project management capability.

The PMP course provides advanced, structured training aligned with PMI standards and the PMBOK® framework, enabling learners to apply consistent, proven project management practices in real-world environments. It develops the ability to manage scope, schedule, cost, quality, resources, risk, and stakeholder expectations while balancing strategic objectives and operational constraints. The certification is widely recognised by employers as a benchmark of senior-level project management expertise and is often a requirement for leadership roles in project, programme, and portfolio management.

Completing the PMP course equips professionals with the knowledge and confidence to deliver projects more predictably, manage teams effectively, and make informed decisions under pressure. It supports long-term career progression, enhances professional credibility, and demonstrates commitment to continuous professional development at an international level.

What’s Included

  • Duration of the eLearning course: approximately 35–40 hours
  • 12-month online access licence
  • Project Management Professional (PMP)® aligned training content
  • Skills-based interactive eLearning modules
  • Tutor support throughout the learning period
  • Agile Practice Guide (optional add-on)
  • Process Groups: A Practice Guide (optional add-on)
  • Preparation aligned to the PMP® examination syllabus
  • Online pre-course material for classroom delegates

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, approximately 35–40 hours of study, 12-month licence, exam not included. Normal price: £1,150 + VAT, or £42.50 + VAT per month. Special offer: £510 + VAT 

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with collaborative workshops, practical project scenarios, and structured exam preparation. Exam not included. Price: From £3,275 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand how to lead and manage projects across predictive, Agile, and hybrid delivery environments using PMI best practice.

Apply structured project management processes aligned with the PMBOK® Guide to ensure consistent, repeatable project outcomes.

Manage project scope, schedule, cost, quality, and resources effectively while balancing competing organisational priorities.

Identify, assess, and mitigate project risks to minimise disruption and protect delivery objectives.

Demonstrate leadership behaviours required to manage teams, stakeholders, and sponsors within complex project environments.

Analyse project inputs, tools, and techniques to make informed, evidence‑based management decisions.

Contribute effectively within PMOs and enterprise project governance structures.


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced Professional Certification
  • Duration: Approximately 35–40 hours for eLearning; classroom duration varies by schedule
  • Exam Duration: 230 minutes
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI using psychometric scoring
  • Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Classroom


Who It’s For

This course is designed for experienced project managers, programme managers, project coordinators, PMO professionals, and business analysts who are responsible for leading projects and delivering measurable business outcomes. It is suitable for professionals seeking formal recognition of their project management experience and for those working in complex, enterprise, or regulated environments where a globally recognised certification is required.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 230 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 180 multiple-choice questions, including pre-test items
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Certification: Project Management Professional (PMP)®
  • Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
  • Exam Voucher: Not included


Pre-Course Requirements

To sit the PMP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to formal education, verified project management experience, and completion of required project management training hours. Candidates are strongly advised to review the official PMI eligibility criteria before committing to the examination. A mandatory online pre-course applies to learners selecting the classroom delivery option.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the PMP® certification?
The PMP® is a globally recognised professional certification issued by PMI that validates advanced project management knowledge, experience, and leadership capability.

Who should take the PMP course?
The course is intended for experienced project managers and professionals responsible for delivering projects, programmes, or portfolios within structured environments.

Is the PMP exam included in the course price?
No. The PMP examination is not included and must be booked and paid for directly through the Project Management Institute.

How long does it take to complete the eLearning course?
Most learners complete the eLearning in approximately 35–40 hours, with access available for 12 months.

Is the course aligned to the PMBOK® Guide?
Yes. The course is fully aligned to PMI standards and reflects current PMP examination content.

Do I need prior project management experience?
Yes. The PMP certification is designed for experienced professionals and requires documented project management experience.

Can I study without taking the exam?
Yes. You may complete the training for professional development purposes, but certification requires passing the PMI exam.

Does the course cover Agile and hybrid approaches?
Yes. The course addresses predictive, Agile, and hybrid delivery models in line with current PMP requirements.

Is tutor support available?
Yes. Tutor support is available throughout the learning period for both eLearning and instructor‑led formats.

Is this certification recognised internationally?
Yes. PMP® is recognised globally across industries and sectors.

What roles benefit most from PMP certification?
Project Managers, Programme Managers, PMO leads, Business Analysts, and senior delivery professionals benefit significantly.

Can the course support career progression?
Yes. PMP certification is widely regarded as a benchmark for senior project management roles.

Are study guides included?
Core learning materials are included. Additional PMI publications may be purchased as optional extras.

How is the classroom course structured?
Classroom delivery includes instructor‑led teaching, group exercises, and exam‑focused preparation.

Is there a mandatory pre‑course?
Yes. Classroom learners must complete a mandatory online pre‑course before attending.

How do I book my Project Management Professional (PMP) exam?
The PMP exam is not included with this course. Candidates must apply directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI) website and meet all eligibility criteria listed in the prerequisites before they can take the exam.

How do I access my PMP pre-course work?
For delegates selecting the classroom study option, mandatory online pre-course work must be completed prior to attending. The materials are designed to take approximately four to six hours. Full instructions and access links will be sent within 48 hours of booking. Completion of all pre-course work is required to receive the course completion certificate.

What are the prerequisites for the Project Management Professional (PMP) course?
Candidates must satisfy one of the following eligibility paths:

  • Secondary degree (high school diploma, associate’s degree, or global equivalent): Minimum five years of professional project management experience, including at least 7,500 hours leading or directing projects, and 35 hours of project management education or CAPM certification.

  • Four-year degree: Minimum three years of professional project management experience, including at least 4,500 hours leading or directing projects, and 35 hours of project management education or CAPM certification.

What are the benefits of obtaining the PMP certification?
The PMP certification is globally recognised and demonstrates advanced project management expertise. It validates your ability to deliver projects efficiently within scope, time, and budget, enhances career opportunities, and often leads to higher earning potential. PMP equips professionals with the tools, techniques, and credibility to manage projects effectively and gain recognition from employers worldwide.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 40Hrs
Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)®.pngCertified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)®.png

The Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)® certification is a globally recognised entry-level credential developed by the Project Management Institute (PMI) to validate foundational project management knowledge. It is designed for individuals seeking to start or progress a career in project management by gaining a structured understanding of project processes, terminology, and best practices.

Aligned with the PMI Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide), the CAPM course introduces learners to core project management concepts, methodologies, and tools used across industries worldwide. The training provides practical insight into how projects are initiated, planned, executed, monitored, and closed, enabling learners to contribute effectively as informed project team members.

By completing this course, delegates develop confidence in working within both traditional predictive environments and adaptive approaches such as Agile. The CAPM certification demonstrates commitment to professional development and provides a strong foundation for further progression to advanced PMI certifications.


What’s Included

  • Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)® eLearning course
  • Approximately 23–25 hours of online training
  • 12-month eLearning licence
  • Coverage of PMBOK® Guide aligned concepts and processes
  • Project management fundamentals and lifecycle knowledge
  • Introduction to traditional and Agile methodologies
  • Tutor support during the licence period
  • Optional add-ons available at checkout, including Agile Practice Guide and Process Groups: A Practice Guide


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 23–25 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £510.00 + VAT or £42.50 + VAT per month

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Instructor-led classroom training. Pricing from £2,755.00 + VAT. Mandatory online pre-course applies. Exam not included.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand project management fundamentals, core concepts, and project lifecycles across industries.


Recognise project roles, responsibilities, governance structures, and planning processes.


Apply tools and techniques for communication, risk management, and structured problem-solving.


Identify when to use predictive, plan-based project management methodologies.


Create and manage project schedules, controls, and documentation for predictive projects.


Recognise when adaptive and Agile frameworks are appropriate.


Plan iterations and execute adaptive task management activities.


Conduct effective stakeholder communication and gather clear, actionable requirements.


Understand business analysis roles, processes, and product roadmaps within projects.


Validate project requirements through structured and effective product delivery.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Entry-Level Professional Certification
  • Duration: Approximately 23–25 hours eLearning
  • Exam Duration: 3 hours
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Prerequisites: Secondary degree and 23 hours of project management education
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Classroom


Who It’s For

This course is designed for individuals looking to start or progress a career in project management, including aspiring project managers, project coordinators, junior PMO staff, business analysts, and professionals who work on projects and want a formal understanding of project management principles. It is suitable for those with little or no formal project management experience who want a globally recognised certification.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 3 hours
  • Number of Questions: 150 multiple-choice questions, including 15 pre-test questions
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Certification: Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM)®
  • Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
  • Exam Voucher: Not included


Pre-Course Requirements

To take the CAPM examination, candidates must hold a secondary degree such as a high school diploma, GED, or global equivalent and must have completed at least 23 hours of formal project management education. A mandatory online pre-course applies if the classroom delivery option is selected.


FAQs

What is the CAPM® certification?
The CAPM certification validates foundational knowledge of project management principles, terminology, and practices as defined by PMI and the PMBOK® Guide.

Who should take the CAPM course?
The course is ideal for individuals starting a career in project management or professionals who want to formalise their project management knowledge without prior experience.

Do I need project management experience to take the CAPM course?
No prior professional project management experience is required, but candidates must meet PMI’s education requirements.

How long does the CAPM course take to complete?
The eLearning course takes approximately 23–25 hours and is available with a 12-month licence.

Is the CAPM exam included in the course fee?
No. The CAPM examination must be purchased separately through PMI.

What is the format of the CAPM exam?
The exam consists of 150 multiple-choice questions, including pre-test items, and lasts three hours.

Does the CAPM certification expire?
Yes. CAPM certification requires renewal in line with PMI’s Continuing Certification Requirements.

Is a pre-course required?
A mandatory online pre-course applies only to the classroom delivery option.

Does this certification support career progression?
Yes. CAPM provides a strong foundation for entry-level project roles and progression to advanced PMI certifications such as PMP®.

Who awards the CAPM certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI).

How do I book my Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM) exam?
The CAPM exam is not included as part of this course. Candidates must apply directly to the Project Management Institute (PMI) before sitting the exam. PMI enforces a strict protocol to verify that all prerequisite criteria have been met prior to exam eligibility. It is recommended to review the official CAPM Handbook to fully understand the application process. PMI membership offers additional benefits, including reduced exam fees and a free PMBOK Guide download.

How do I access my CAPM pre-course work?
For delegates taking the classroom study option, mandatory pre-course work must be completed ahead of the training. This is expected to take four to six hours. Instructions and access links will be provided within 48 hours of booking. Completion of all pre-course work is required to receive the CAPM course completion certificate.

Does the Certified Associate in Project Management (CAPM) certification expire?
Yes, CAPM certification requires renewal every five years. Further details on renewal processes and requirements are available on the PMI website.

Do I need any prior experience to take the CAPM course?
No prior project management experience is required. Candidates must have a secondary degree, such as a high school diploma, GED, or global equivalent, and must have completed at least 23 contact hours of project management education before attempting the exam.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 26Hrs
PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)®.pngPMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)®.png

The PMI Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)® certification is a globally recognised credential from the Project Management Institute (PMI) that validates knowledge and skills in Agile practices, principles, tools, and techniques. This course is designed to help professionals effectively lead Agile projects, apply Agile frameworks, and enhance delivery within diverse project environments.

Through a combination of structured training, practical exercises, and case studies, the PMI-ACP course equips delegates with the ability to implement Agile methodologies such as Scrum, Kanban, Lean, XP, and TDD. Participants gain the knowledge to adapt Agile approaches to project requirements, deliver high-value outcomes, and contribute to continuous improvement initiatives across their organisations.

The PMI-ACP credential demonstrates competence in Agile project management and positions participants to play a strategic role in driving successful Agile implementations, enhancing team performance, and fostering adaptive planning across projects.


What’s Included

  • Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)® training
  • Two industry case studies demonstrating real business problems
  • Two hands-on projects to apply practical Agile skills
  • Five simulation test papers for self-assessment
  • Tutor support during the licence period


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX-Simplilearn with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 13 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £405.00 + VAT or £33.75 + VAT per month

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand Agile principles, values, and mindset across frameworks such as Scrum, Kanban, XP, and TDD.


Apply iterative and incremental approaches to project delivery for high-velocity outputs.


Develop the ability to deliver value-driven stories and epics with adaptive planning techniques.


Engage stakeholders effectively and enhance team performance within Agile environments.


Implement practical Agile tools and methods to identify, prevent, and resolve project issues.


Integrate lessons learned into continuous improvement and project lifecycle activities.


Understand how to manage and lead Agile initiatives to achieve organisational objectives.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced Professional Certification
  • Duration: Approximately 13 hours eLearning
  • Exam Duration: 3 hours
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning


Who It’s For

This course is designed for Project Managers, aspiring Project Managers, Agile team members, Software Developers, and team leaders or managers who are responsible for planning, executing, or delivering Agile projects. It is suitable for professionals looking to formalise their Agile knowledge and enhance their ability to lead Agile initiatives.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 3 hours
  • Number of Questions: 120 multiple-choice questions
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Certification: Agile Certified Practitioner (PMI-ACP)®
  • Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through PMI
  • Exam Voucher: Not included


Pre-Course Requirements

To sit the PMI-ACP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to project experience and formal Agile training hours. There is no mandatory pre-course for the eLearning option.


FAQs

Why should I do a PMI-ACP course?
The PMI-ACP certification validates advanced Agile knowledge, improves project success rates, and demonstrates professional expertise in Agile practices.

What study options are available for the Agile Certified Practitioner course?
The course is available via self-paced eLearning with a 12-month licence. Classroom or live virtual options are not included in this offering.

What are the prerequisites for the PMI-ACP course?
Candidates must meet PMI’s eligibility criteria, including a secondary degree or higher, at least 1,500 hours of experience working on Agile project teams in the last three years, a minimum of 2,000 hours of general project management experience in the last five years (or hold a valid PMP® or PgMP® certification), and 12 hours of formal Agile training. Full details are available on the PMI website.

How do I book my PMI-ACP exam?
The examination is booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI) and is not included with the course. Once you’ve applied and eligibility is confirmed, you pay the exam fee to PMI and schedule your exam.

Does this course support career progression?
Yes. PMI-ACP certification enhances career prospects for professionals leading Agile initiatives and demonstrates globally recognised Agile competency.

Who awards the PMI-ACP certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI).

Is prior Agile experience required?
No. While prior experience is helpful, the course provides foundational and practical knowledge required to pass the certification.

How long is the course?
The eLearning course requires approximately 13 hours to complete and is available with a 12-month licence.

Are there any hands-on exercises included?
Yes. Two industry case studies and two hands-on projects are included to reinforce practical Agile skills.

Does the course include exam preparation?
Yes. Five simulation test papers are provided for self-assessment and exam readiness.

Can I complete this course in stages?
Yes. The self-paced eLearning format allows participants to progress according to their own schedule.

Is tutor support available?
Yes. Tutor support is included throughout the 12-month licence period.

Does this course cover multiple Agile frameworks?
Yes. It covers Scrum, Kanban, Lean, XP, and TDD methodologies.

Will this course help me manage Agile teams?
Yes. The training equips learners with practical skills to enhance team performance, stakeholder engagement, and Agile project delivery.

Is the exam included in the course fee?
No. The exam is purchased separately through PMI.

What skills will I gain?
Delegates will gain practical Agile project management skills, value-driven delivery techniques, adaptive planning knowledge, and the ability to lead Agile initiatives.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)®.pngPMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)®.png

The PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® certification is a globally recognised credential designed for professionals who specialise in identifying, analysing, and managing project risks. This course strengthens your ability to anticipate uncertainty, apply structured risk management techniques, and protect projects from potential threats that can impact cost, schedule, scope, and business value.

Delivered through an engaging, skills-based eLearning programme, the PMI-RMP course develops a disciplined yet adaptable approach to risk management that can be applied across industries and project environments. Learners gain a deep understanding of risk planning, qualitative and quantitative analysis, response strategies, and stakeholder engagement, enabling them to manage complexity and uncertainty with confidence.

By completing this course, professionals enhance their credibility as risk specialists and position themselves as key contributors to successful project delivery. The training aligns with PMI best practices and prepares learners to apply risk management principles in real-world project scenarios while supporting progression toward the PMI-RMP certification.


What’s Included

  • PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® eLearning course
  • Approximately 7 hours of skills-based online training
  • 12-month eLearning licence
  • Training delivered via PMI-approved learning partner
  • Tutor and platform support during licence period

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced study, approximately 7 hours to complete, 12-month licence. Exam not included. Price: £405.00 + VAT or £33.75 + VAT per month

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand core risk management principles, concepts, processes, tools, and techniques used across professional project environments.


Identify, analyse, and monitor project risks throughout the project lifecycle.


Apply qualitative and quantitative risk analysis methods to support informed decision-making.


Adapt risk management practices to suit different project types, scales, and delivery models.


Implement effective risk response strategies to minimise threats and enhance opportunities.


Recognise common challenges in risk management and apply structured approaches to address them.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Professional Certification
  • Duration: Approximately 7 hours eLearning
  • Exam Duration: 3.5 hours
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Prerequisites: PMI eligibility criteria apply
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning


Who It’s For

This course is designed for programme managers, project managers, line managers, and risk management consultants who are responsible for identifying and managing risk within projects or programmes. It is suitable for professionals seeking to formalise their risk management expertise and for those working in environments where proactive risk control is critical to project success.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 3.5 hours
  • Number of Questions: 170 multiple-choice questions
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: Determined by PMI
  • Certification: PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)®
  • Delivery Method: Online exam booked directly through the Project Management Institute (PMI)
  • Exam Voucher: Not included


Pre-Course Requirements

To sit the PMI-RMP examination, candidates must meet PMI eligibility requirements relating to education, professional experience, and risk management experience. Full details of the eligibility criteria are defined by PMI and should be reviewed carefully before committing to the exam. There is no mandatory pre-course work for this training course.


FAQs

What is the PMI Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP)® certification?
The PMI-RMP certification recognises professionals who specialise in identifying, assessing, and managing project risks using structured and proven risk management practices.

Who should take the PMI-RMP course?
The course is suitable for project managers, programme managers, line managers, and risk management consultants involved in managing uncertainty and risk within projects.

How long does the PMI-RMP course take to complete?
The eLearning course takes approximately 7 hours to complete and is available with a 12-month licence.

Is the PMI-RMP exam included in the course fee?
No. The PMI-RMP examination is not included and must be purchased separately through PMI.

What is the format of the PMI-RMP exam?
The exam consists of 170 multiple-choice questions and has a duration of 3.5 hours.

Are there any prerequisites for the PMI-RMP certification?
Yes. PMI defines specific eligibility requirements related to education and professional experience, which must be met before sitting the exam.

Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course work for this training course.

What skills will I gain from this course?
You will gain advanced skills in risk planning, qualitative and quantitative risk analysis, implementing risk responses, and managing project uncertainty.

Does this certification support career progression?
Yes. The PMI-RMP certification enhances professional credibility and supports career progression into senior project, programme, and risk management roles.

Who awards the PMI-RMP certification?
The certification is awarded by the Project Management Institute (PMI), a globally recognised professional body.

How do I book my Risk Management Professional (PMI-RMP) exam?
The RMP exam is not included as part of this course.

If you wish to take the Risk Management Professional exam, you will need to apply directly via the Project Management Institute (PMI) who will ensure you meet all prerequisite requirements.

To ensure you understand the full PMI exam booking process we recommend you review the PMI-RMP Credential Handbook.

What are the prerequisites for the PMI-RMP course?
To sit the PMI-RMP exam, you must have:

A secondary degree (high school diploma, associate’s degree, or the global equivalent)
36 months of project risk management experience within the last five years
40 hours of project risk management education


OR

A four-year degree (bachelor’s degree or the global equivalent)
24 months of project risk management experience within the last five years
30 hours of project risk management education

Who is the Risk Management Professional course suitable for?
This course is ideal for Project and Programme Managers, risk specialists, or other professionals that handle project uncertainties, who are looking to enhance their skills and develop more effective risk management strategies.

How long does the PMI-RMP course take to complete?
Delivered by our partner, Simplilearn, this eLearning course is expected to take approximately seven hours to complete. You will have access to your eLearning licence for 12 months, so you can work through the course materials at your own pace.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 7 Hrs
project-management.jpgproject-management.jpg
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

Project management is a dynamic discipline essential for achieving success across a spectrum of projects, from small-scale endeavors to complex enterprise-wide initiatives. This comprehensive course, led by our ''Effective Instructors'' who bring a wealth of experience and expertise to the table, delves deep into the core principles and practical applications of project management. With a keen focus on delivering tangible results, our instructors share their extensive knowledge garnered from years of optimizing project processes and enhancing project outcomes.

Throughout this course, you will embark on a journey through the foundational elements of project management. Starting with the fundamental concept of defining clear project goals and objectives, our instructors guide you through the meticulous process of crafting robust project plans that serve as roadmaps for project execution. You will learn essential techniques for resource management, ensuring optimal allocation and utilization to drive project success.

Managing project schedules becomes second nature as you explore strategies for timeline management, meeting deadlines, and adapting to unforeseen challenges. Our instructors provide invaluable insights into effective communication strategies that foster collaboration, maintain stakeholder engagement, and navigate project complexities with confidence.

The course also offers a comprehensive overview of the latest updates in the Project Management Institute’s A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge Seventh Edition. Practical exercises integrated throughout the course, based on a healthcare/IT case study project, reinforce your learning by applying theoretical concepts to real-world scenarios.

Course Format

Structured into ten comprehensive sections, each module of the course provides in-depth exploration of key project management concepts. Through engaging video lectures, practical challenges, and real-world examples, you will gain hands-on experience and theoretical insights to confidently lead projects from inception to successful completion.

Skills Outcomes

Upon completion of this course, you will possess the expertise and proficiency to navigate the complexities of project management effectively. Armed with industry best practices and practical tools, such as Planner, you will be equipped to deliver successful projects that meet organizational goals within specified timelines, budgets, and resource constraints. Whether you are new to project management or seeking to enhance your skills, this course prepares you to excel in managing projects of varying scope and complexity.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand Project Management as a Transformation Process

Strategic Project Selection

Designing Projects for Products and Services

Resource Preparation

Financial Preparation

Quality and Performance Measurement

Create and Manage Projects with Planner

Coordinate Teams and Enhance Collaboration

Track Progress and Update Project Status

Adapt Plans to Address Project Challenges

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English-Arabicعربي-إنجليزي
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 24 Hrs
ITIL Foundation.pngITIL Foundation.png

The ITIL® 4 Foundation course provides a modern, practical and business-focused introduction to IT Service Management (ITSM). Built on global best practice and aligned with today’s fast-moving digital landscape, ITIL 4 helps organisations deliver reliable, efficient and customer-driven services in a world shaped by cloud, automation, DevOps and Agile ways of working.

This course takes you beyond theory. You will explore the complete ITIL 4 framework — including the Service Value System, the Four Dimensions of Service Management, and the 34 Management Practices — and understand how these components work together to create a resilient, high-value service culture. Through scenario examples, guided explanations and real-world applications, you will learn HOW to apply ITIL principles to improve stability, reduce downtime, streamline processes and enhance service quality.

Whether you work in IT operations, support, digital services, cybersecurity or service delivery, ITIL 4 Foundation gives you a powerful, structured model for managing modern IT environments. By the end of the course, you will be ready to sit the ITIL® 4 Foundation exam with confidence and understand how to bring immediate value back into your organisation through better incident handling, proactive problem management, efficient change processes and continual service improvement.

This certification is recognised worldwide and is often the first step for professionals seeking stronger roles in IT service management, digital transformation and operational leadership.


What’s Included

  • 12-month access to ITIL 4 Foundation eLearning
  • Fully accredited ITIL 4 training content
  • Exam simulator & practice tests
  • ITIL 4 digital study guides
  • Tutor support from drtutor
  • Official ITIL® 4 Foundation exam voucher
  • Certificate upon passing
  • Access to downloadable reference materials

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX and drtutor support 

Self-paced, flexible online learning designed for busy professionals.
Full 12-month access, exam included, tutor support, practice exams.
Price: £700 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors

Real-time instructor-led training with interactive discussions, case studies and exam preparation.
Price: £730+ VAT

In-Person Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors

Face-to-face teaching by accredited ILX instructors with group exercises, activities and exam readiness.
Price: £1,700 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Understand the purpose, value and benefits of ITIL 4

  • Apply ITIL concepts to improve service quality and stability

  • Use the Service Value System to design and manage effective IT services

  • Support faster, more reliable service delivery aligned with business goals

  • Improve incident, problem and change processes

  • Collaborate more effectively across IT and digital teams

  • Drive continual improvement initiatives

  • Prepare confidently for the ITIL 4 Foundation exam

Key facts:

Key Facts

Certification: ITIL® 4 Foundation
Study Method: eLearning / Virtual Classroom / Classroom
Access Duration: 12 months (eLearning)
Estimated Study Time: 10–12 hours
Exam: Included
Accredited: Fully accredited by ILX & PeopleCert


Who It’s For

This course is ideal for:

  • IT Support and Service Desk teams
  • IT Managers & Service Delivery Managers
  • Operations teams, Infrastructure teams, Network teams
  • Cybersecurity, Cloud and Digital professionals
  • Project Managers and Agile teams working with IT services
  • Professionals seeking ITSM career progression
  • Anyone entering IT service roles

Exam Information

  • Format: Multiple choice
  • Questions: 40
  • Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Delivery: Online, remote-proctored exam

Pre-Course Requirements

No formal prerequisites.
General knowledge of IT, support environments or service operations is helpful but not mandatory.


Extended FAQ (drtutor enhanced version)

1. What is ITIL 4 and why is it important?

ITIL 4 is the world’s leading service management framework, used globally to improve the quality, efficiency and reliability of IT services. It helps organisations reduce downtime, improve customer satisfaction, manage risk and align IT with business priorities.

2. How long does the ITIL 4 Foundation course take?

Most learners complete the course in 10–12 hours, depending on experience.

3. Can I take the ITIL 4 exam online?

Yes. The exam is taken online with a remote proctor, giving you full flexibility.

4. Does the eLearning include the exam?

Yes — all drtutor eLearning packages include the official ITIL 4 Foundation exam.

5. Do I need technical experience?

No technical background is required. ITIL is suitable for beginners and experienced professionals.

6. Is ITIL 4 Foundation recognised internationally?

Yes. ITIL certifications are accepted worldwide across IT, digital services and enterprise operations.

7. What career opportunities does ITIL 4 Foundation support?

Service Desk Analyst, Service Manager, IT Operations roles, Incident/Problem Manager, Process Lead, Digital Service roles, and ITSM leadership positions.

8. Are practice exams included?

Yes — the eLearning includes exam simulators and sample questions to support faster exam success.

9. Can my organisation train multiple staff?

Yes — group and corporate packages are available via drtutor and ILX.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 12 Hrs
ITIL 4 CDS.pngITIL 4 CDS.png

The ITIL® 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) course is the essential operational module within the ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) stream. Designed for IT teams and leaders who are responsible for building, running, and supporting digital products and services, this course dives deep into how modern IT organisations operate end-to-end — from design and development to release, support, and continual improvement.

In this programme, learners explore the full service delivery lifecycle, gaining the knowledge and capability to optimise workflows, improve team structures, enhance collaboration, and deliver high-quality customer experiences. CDS moves beyond theory and focuses on real-world execution — equipping you with the tools to manage work effectively, strengthen service performance, and integrate technical practices such as agile, DevOps, automation, and cloud-native operations.

Whether you work in IT operations, service management, support, engineering, DevOps, or digital product delivery, this course provides the practical blueprint for how modern teams should collaborate and operate. The training takes the ITIL 4 concepts and translates them into clear operational models that improve efficiency, resilience, and service reliability.

After completing the course, you’ll be well prepared for the ITIL 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) exam, enabling you to progress toward the full ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) qualification.


What’s Included

  • Official ITIL® 4 Specialist: CDS accredited training
  • Fully updated course materials aligned with the latest ITIL 4 guidance
  • Instructor-led sessions or eLearning modules (depending on option selected)
  • Exam voucher for ITIL® 4 CDS
  • Practice exam questions and mock tests
  • Course workbook and downloadable study resources
  • Access to an online learner portal
  • Expert tutor support
  • Certificate of completion
  • Up to 18 CPD hours (based on delivery format)

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors

Real-time online training with interactive discussion, practical exercises, and exam preparation delivered by accredited ITIL experts. Instructor-led real-time course, 2 days / 14–16 hours total. Price: £1,995 + VAT

Self-Paced eLearning

Flexible online learning with interactive modules, multimedia content, and full exam preparation included. Self-paced online training, 12 months’ access, approx. 12 hours study.Price: £795 + VAT

In-Person Classroom – ILX Accredited
Face-to-face, 2 days / 14–16 hours (or on-site schedule as agreed). Price: £2885+ VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Apply the principles of service design, development, and delivery within ITIL 4

  • Build high-performing, cross-functional IT teams

  • Integrate agile, DevOps, and lean practices into service operations

  • Understand end-to-end value streams and how services are created and supported

  • Use modern tools and automation to streamline workflows and reduce waste

  • Improve service reliability, efficiency, and user satisfaction

  • Manage work effectively across the entire service lifecycle

  • Align operational practices with business and digital strategy

  • Enhance collaboration between development, operations, and support teams

  • Prepare for and pass the ITIL® 4 CDS exam


Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Course Level: ITIL 4 Specialist (Managing Professional stream)
  • Exam Format: 40 questions, multiple choice
  • Exam Duration: 90 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 70%
  • Delivery: Virtual classroom, self-paced eLearning, In-Person Classroom – ILX 
  • Accredited: Fully accredited by PeopleCert

    Estimated Training Hours: Virtual Classroom: 18 hours

  • eLearning: 20–25 hours (self-paced)

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for:

  • IT service managers
  • IT operations managers
  • Service desk leads and support specialists
  • DevOps and digital product teams
  • IT project managers and delivery managers
  • Process owners and technical professionals
  • Anyone pursuing the ITIL 4 Managing Professional (MP) designation
  • Professionals responsible for designing, delivering, or supporting Digital & IT Services

Exam Information

  • Format: Closed-book, online
  • Type: Multiple-choice, scenario-basedQuestions: 40
  • Passing Score: 70%
  • Duration: 90 minutes
  • Prerequisite: ITIL 4 Foundation
  • An exam voucher is included with all training options.

Pre-Course Requirements

  • Mandatory: ITIL® 4 Foundation certificate
  • Recommended reading: ITIL 4 Create, Deliver & Support publication
  • For classroom learners: pre-reading materials will be provided
  • For eLearning: no specific technical prerequisites required

FAQ 

1. What is the ITIL® 4 Specialist: Create, Deliver & Support (CDS) module?
It is the key operational module in ITIL 4 that focuses on how to design, build, deliver, and support IT-enabled services across their full lifecycle.

2. Do I need the ITIL 4 Foundation certificate to enrol?
Yes. ITIL 4 Foundation is a strict prerequisite for sitting the CDS exam.

3. How long does the CDS course take to complete?
Virtual classroom takes around 18 hours of instructor-led learning. eLearning typically takes 20–25 hours depending on your study pace.

4. Is the CDS exam included in the course price?
Yes. All ILX training options include the official PeopleCert exam voucher.

5. What exam format should I expect?
The exam has 40 multiple-choice questions, lasts 90 minutes, and requires a 70% score to pass.

6. Is the exam taken online?
Yes. Exams are delivered online with remote proctoring, so you can take them from home or the office.

7. Are mock exams provided to help me prepare?
Yes. Practice questions and mock tests are included with both the eLearning and virtual classroom options.

8. Is there a self-paced online learning option?
Yes. The eLearning package is fully flexible, allowing you to study anytime, anywhere.

9. Does the course cover practical operational activities?
Absolutely. CDS is a highly practical module covering team structures, workflows, automation, DevOps, agile, and real-world operational models.

10. Does this module count toward ITIL Managing Professional (MP)?
Yes. CDS is one of the four modules required for earning the ITIL 4 Managing Professional designation.

11. What type of professionals typically take CDS?
IT service managers, DevOps engineers, service desk leads, IT operations teams, product owners, delivery managers, and digital service professionals.

12. Are the materials accredited by PeopleCert?
Yes. All ILX materials meet official PeopleCert accreditation requirements.

13. How long is the exam voucher valid for?
Normally 12 months from the date of issue.

14. Does the course include tutor support?
Yes. Virtual classroom includes live tutor interaction; eLearning includes support through the online learning portal.

15. Is there pre-reading before starting the course?
A pre-course study guide is provided; completing it is recommended but not mandatory.

16. Can I retake the exam if I fail?
Yes. You can add the PeopleCert “Take2” resit option at additional cost.

17. Can I combine CDS training with other ITIL 4 modules for a faster Managing Professional path?
Yes. Many learners choose to schedule multiple ITIL 4 Specialist modules (CDS, DPI, HDA, and HVIT) in sequence or combined formats to efficiently progress toward the ITIL 4 Managing Professional certification, balancing study pace with practical application.

18. Do I need technical experience to take CDS?

No, but general IT service management knowledge is helpful.

19. Does the eLearning option include video content?
Yes. It includes instructor-led videos, interactive modules, assessments, and downloadable resources.

20. Is this qualification recognised internationally?
Yes. ITIL qualifications, including CDS, are globally recognised and widely adopted across industries.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
ITIL 4 DPI.pngITIL 4 DPI.png

The ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve (DPI) course is designed for professionals who shape strategy, lead teams, and drive measurable improvement across IT and digital services. This certification goes beyond operational tasks — it empowers leaders to connect long-term strategic direction with day-to-day delivery, enabling organisations to stay agile, resilient, and continuously improving.

This programme equips you with the principles, tools, and governance frameworks needed to build high-performing teams, enhance value streams, embed continual improvement, and optimise decision-making. You will learn how to direct work at strategic and tactical levels, plan with clarity, integrate governance and compliance, and ensure improvements deliver real outcomes.

DPI strengthens your ability to manage change, influence organisational culture, and implement improvements that support innovation and operational excellence. Whether you lead service teams, manage transformation programmes, or oversee risk and governance, this course provides the strategic mindset and practical toolkit required to drive lasting value across your organisation.


What’s Included

  • Accredited ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve (DPI) training
  • ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve certification exam
  • Official ITIL® 4 DPI manual
  • Tutor support
  • 12-month access for eLearning learners
  • Mandatory online pre-course for Virtual Classroom / Classroom learners
  • Optional Take2 exam insurance available

Delivery Options & Pricing (with hours & duration)

eLearning – Delivered by ILX- DrTutor support

Self-paced, accredited online training

  • Price: £773.50 + VAT
  • Access Duration: 12-month licence
  • Study Time Required: Approx. 12–14 hours
  • Includes Exam: Yes
  • Monthly Instalment Option: £64.46 + VAT/month

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors

Real-time instructor-led learning with group activities, case studies, and exam preparation.

  • Price: £2,006.25 + VAT
  • Format: Live interactive training
  • Includes: Tutor-led sessions, exercises, pre-course, exam

Classroom – Delivered by ILX Accredited Instructors

In-person learning with collaborative workshops and intensive exam preparation.

  • Price: £2,885.00 + VAT
  • Format: Face-to-face training
  • Includes: Printed materials, expert instruction, pre-course, exam
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):
  • Direct and govern digital and IT operations effectively

  • Integrate governance, risk, and compliance into the service value system

  • Apply organisational change management to drive successful improvements

  • Use measurement and reporting to support strategic planning

  • Enhance value streams and optimise workflows

  • Lead high-performing teams focused on continuous improvement

  • Align IT strategy with business outcomes

  • Implement structured planning and improvement frameworks

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
  • Study Time: 12–14 hours (eLearning)
  • Delivery Modes: eLearning, Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • Level: Intermediate / Strategic
  • Exam Included: Yes
  • Accredited: Yes

Who It’s For

Ideal for professionals responsible for shaping strategy, leading teams, or managing improvements. Suitable roles include:

  • Change Manager
  • Service Designer
  • Service Portfolio Manager
  • IT Operations Manager
  • Risk Manager
  • Continuous Improvement Lead
  • Transformation Manager
  • Team Leaders or Senior Analysts moving into strategic roles

Prerequisites

You must hold one of the following:

  • ITIL® 4 Foundation
  • ITIL® v3 Foundation
  • ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Transition Certificate

Training must be taken via an accredited training organisation.


Exam Information

  • Format: Multiple choice
  • Duration: 90 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 70%
  • Closed Book: Yes
  • Delivery: Online exam with remote proctor

FAQ

1. Is ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve globally recognised?
Yes. It is an internationally respected qualification used by organisations worldwide to improve governance, planning, and continual improvement capability.

2. Does the DPI certification expire?
ITIL certificates typically remain valid, but AXELOS recommends renewing every 3 years to stay current with best practice.

3. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
Approximately 12–14 hours, depending on your study pace.

4. What does the Virtual Classroom option include?
Live tutor-led sessions, discussions, exercises, pre-course learning, and the exam.

5. Are the training materials accredited?
Yes — all DPI content delivered by DrTutor and ILX is fully accredited.

6. Do I need ITIL® 4 Foundation to take this course?
Yes. A valid ITIL® 4 or ITIL® v3 Foundation certificate is required.

7. Is the exam included in all delivery methods?
Yes — all study options include the DPI exam.

8. Can I study at my own pace?
Yes — the eLearning option gives 12 months of flexible access.

9. Is tutor support available in eLearning?
Yes. You receive access to tutor assistance when needed.

10. What topics are covered in DPI?
Governance, continual improvement, organisational change management, GRC, planning, measurement, reporting, and strategic direction.

11. Can I take the exam online from home?
Yes — exams are delivered via secure online proctoring.

12. Is pre-course work required?
Mandatory pre-course applies for Virtual Classroom and Classroom options.

13. Do I receive the official ITIL® DPI manual?
Yes — the manual is included.

14. Can I add Take2 exam insurance?
Yes — it can be selected as an optional extra.

15. Who should take DPI?
Anyone responsible for directing work, improving processes, managing change, or aligning strategy with operations.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
ITIL 4 HVIT.pngITIL 4 HVIT.png

The ITIL® 4 High-Velocity IT (HVIT) course delivers a focused, practical route to mastering how organisations deliver digital products and services at speed while maintaining resilience, governance and customer value. Designed for leaders and practitioners working in high-tempo environments, HVIT combines proven ITIL guidance with Lean, Agile, DevOps and product management thinking to create a coherent approach for modern delivery pipelines.

This programme goes beyond abstract theory: it explains how to design and operate value streams that move fast, reduce cycle time, and preserve stability through automation, continuous delivery practices, telemetry and robust controls. You will learn how organisations successfully sequence experiments, manage risk in rapid release cycles, and scale delivery across teams without sacrificing compliance or user experience. The course uses real-world scenarios, practical exercises and decision frameworks so you can apply learning immediately to your teams and platforms.

Completing HVIT gives you both the vocabulary and the applied techniques senior stakeholders expect: how to balance velocity with resilience, how to structure teams around outcomes not tasks, how to use metrics that actually inform decisions, and how to embed continuous improvement into every delivery loop. The certification prepares you for the official ITIL® HVIT exam and supports progression within the ITIL 4 Managing Professional stream.

What’s Included

  • Accredited ITIL® 4 HVIT training materials and learning modules
  • Official ITIL® 4 HVIT exam voucher
  • Interactive case studies and scenario exercises
  • Practice exam questions and mock tests
  • Digital study guide and downloadable reference materials
  • Tutor support and learner helpdesk access
  • 12-month access for eLearning students (where applicable)
  • Certificate issued upon successful completion
  • Optional exam insurance / Take2 available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence; approx. 12–14 hours study time; fully accredited, exam included. Price: £871.50 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Instructor-led (ILX tutors)
Real-time interactive delivery across scheduled sessions; practical workshops and exam preparation; typical format delivered over 2–3 days depending on timetable. Price: £2,675.00 + VAT

Classroom – In-person (ILX accredited)
Face-to-face instructor delivery with group activities, labs and scenario facilitation; typical programme length 2–3 days. Price: £2,452.25 + VAT

(eLearning is delivered by ILX with DrTutor learner support included.)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the characteristics of high-velocity organisations and how they operate


Map and optimise value streams to increase flow and reduce waste


Apply Agile, Lean and DevOps practices inside an ITIL service-value system


Design and operate automated delivery pipelines with appropriate controls


Use measurement, observability and telemetry to make faster, evidence-based decisions


Manage risk, resilience and compliance in rapid release cycles


Build and lead cross-functional teams focused on outcomes and product value


Embed continual improvement and safe experimentation into delivery lifecycles


Prepare to apply HVIT principles across cloud, platform and product teams

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: ITIL® 4 High-Velocity IT (HVIT)
  • Study formats: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • eLearning access: 12 months
  • Estimated eLearning study time: 12–14 hours
  • Typical live/classroom duration: 2–3 days (format dependent)
  • Exam included: Yes (voucher provided with training)
  • Accredited: Yes — PeopleCert / ITIL framework

Who It’s For

Digital transformation leads, DevOps engineers, release and platform teams, product owners, service delivery and operations managers, automation and SRE practitioners, architects and anyone responsible for delivering software, services or digital change at pace.

Exam Information

  • Format: Multiple-choice
  • Questions: 40
  • Duration: 90 minutes
  • Pass mark: 70%
  • Delivery: Online, remote-proctored (closed book)
  • Prerequisite: ITIL® 4 Foundation (or equivalent entry as defined by PeopleCert)

Pre-Course Requirements

A valid ITIL® 4 Foundation certificate (or ITIL v3 Foundation plus transition where applicable) is required.
Learners should have practical exposure to digital delivery, service operations or development practices to maximise benefit.
For Live or Classroom delivery, completion of mandatory short pre-course material is recommended.

FAQ

1. What makes HVIT different from other ITIL 4 modules?
HVIT focuses specifically on running and scaling high-velocity digital delivery — blending ITIL guidance with DevOps, Agile and lean practices to support rapid, resilient value streams.

2. Who should take this course first — HVIT or other ITIL modules?
Start with ITIL 4 Foundation to gain core concepts; after that, HVIT is suitable for those working in fast delivery environments or aiming for the Managing Professional stream.

3. How long will the eLearning take to finish?
Typical completion for eLearning is 12–14 hours, depending on prior experience and learning pace.

4. Can I take the exam online from home?
Yes. The exam is delivered via secure remote proctoring, allowing you to sit from home or the office.

5. Is tutor support available for eLearning students?
Yes. DrTutor provides learner support for the ILX-delivered eLearning package, including helpdesk access and guidance.

6. What practical exercises are included?
The course includes scenario workshops, value-stream mapping tasks, resilience exercises and mock decision scenarios that mirror real delivery challenges.

7. What happens if I fail the exam?
You can purchase an optional resit package (Take2) or rebook the exam independently; DrTutor can advise on resit options.

8. Does the course include any hands-on labs or tools?
While HVIT is primarily conceptual and strategic, practical sessions include templates, metrics dashboards and worked examples of CI/CD and automation patterns.

9. Is prior technical experience required?
Not strictly, but practical experience in delivery, operations or development will make the content more immediately applicable.

10. Will this qualification help me get a promotion or new role?
Yes — HVIT signals modern digital delivery competency and is recognised by organisations prioritising cloud, automation and product-centric teams.

11. Can organisations train multiple members at once?
Yes — DrTutor can arrange private group bookings for Virtual Classroom or Classroom delivery with tailored scheduling.

12. Are course materials downloadable?
Yes — learners receive downloadable reference materials, templates and the official syllabus content for study and reference.

13. How is the course assessed?
Assessment is via the official PeopleCert multiple-choice exam requiring 70% to pass.

14. Does HVIT cover compliance and governance at speed?
Yes — the course covers how to implement lightweight governance, risk and compliance strategies that do not impede velocity.

15. How does HVIT relate to SRE and platform engineering?
HVIT complements SRE and platform engineering by providing governance and management practices that enable safe fast flow while supporting reliability objectives.

16. Are continued professional development (CPD) credits available?
Yes — completing the course contributes CPD hours; exact allocation depends on organisational policy.

17. Can I combine HVIT with other ITIL modules for the Managing Professional qualification?
Yes — HVIT is one of the modules that contribute to ITIL 4 Managing Professional when taken with the other required modules.

18. How soon can I apply what I learn?
Immediately. The course emphasises practical application and provides tools and templates designed for rapid adoption within teams and delivery pipelines.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
ITIL 4 DITS.pngITIL 4 DITS.png

The ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy (DITS) course equips senior IT and business professionals with the strategic skills necessary to drive digital transformation, align IT capabilities with business objectives, and create sustainable value across the organisation. This course blends ITIL 4 best-practice guidance with practical, real-world applications for governance, risk management, compliance, and continual improvement. You will learn how to assess market disruptions, manage risk, optimise value streams, and lead organisational change to deliver measurable outcomes. Through scenario-based learning, case studies, and strategic exercises, you will gain not just theoretical knowledge but actionable expertise to apply immediately in your organisation. On completion, learners will hold the ITIL 4 DITS certification, providing recognised validation of their ability to shape digital and IT strategies that drive competitive advantage and operational excellence.

What’s Included

  • Accredited ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy training course
  • Official ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy exam
  • Digital manual and course workbook
  • Practice exam questions and mock tests
  • Tutor support throughout the programme
  • For eLearning: 12-month access to all course content
  • Certificate of completion upon passing the exam
  • Optional extras including exam-resit insurance

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support. 

Self-paced, 12-month licence, approximately 25–30 hours to complete, with exam included. Price: £871.50 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX. 

Immersive learning experience, three-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, with interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2,006.25 + VAT or £167.19 + VAT per month

Classroom – Delivered by ILX. 

In-person Face-to-face, 3 days, instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Price: £2,885.00 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

You will be able to understand and apply ITIL 4 guiding principles to digital-strategy decisions


Evaluate market disruptions, risks, and opportunities to define robust digital strategies


Align IT and digital strategy with business objectives to optimise organisational value


Implement governance, risk management, and compliance frameworks within digital environments


Lead and manage organisational change and transformation programmes effectively


Use measurement and reporting techniques to monitor strategic outcomes and ensure continual improvement


Drive innovation, service optimisation, and long-term growth through structured strategic planning


Direct, plan, and improve value streams to ensure operational efficiency

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy (DITS)
  • Prerequisites: Valid ITIL 4 Foundation (or v3 Foundation plus transition where applicable)
  • Study Time (eLearning): 25–30 hours
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • Exam: Online, remote-proctored, closed-book, 30 multiple-choice questions, 60 minutes, 70% pass mark

Who It’s For

This course is designed for IT and business leaders, digital strategists, CIOs, CTOs, service portfolio managers, project managers, compliance and risk officers, and senior managers responsible for IT strategy and organisational direction. It is ideal for professionals shaping digital strategy and leading transformation initiatives.

Exam Information

The ITIL 4 DITS exam consists of 30 multiple-choice questions, is closed-book, and is taken online under remote proctoring. Candidates have 60 minutes to complete the exam, with a 70% pass mark required to achieve certification.

Pre-Course Requirements

A valid ITIL 4 Foundation certificate (or approved equivalent) is required. Learners should have exposure to IT or digital services, business operations, or organisational change to gain maximum benefit. Mandatory pre-course material must be completed for classroom and virtual delivery.

FAQ

1. What is the scope of the ITIL 4 DITS course?
The course covers strategic planning, digital transformation, governance, risk management, compliance, organisational viability, change management, and alignment of IT and digital services with business objectives.

2. Do I need ITIL 4 Foundation before enrolling?
Yes, a valid ITIL 4 Foundation or equivalent certification is required before taking this course.

3. How long does the eLearning course take to complete?
The eLearning course is approximately 25–30 hours depending on your pace and prior experience.

4. Can the exam be taken online?
Yes, the exam is delivered online under remote proctoring.

5. How many questions are on the exam and how much time is allocated?
The exam has 30 multiple-choice questions and candidates have 60 minutes to complete it.

6. What is the passing score for the exam?
The pass mark is 70%, meaning 21 correct answers out of 30.

7. Are practice exams provided?
Yes, mock tests and practice questions are included to support exam preparation.

8. Is there any pre-course material for classroom or live virtual delivery?
Yes, completion of mandatory short pre-course material is recommended for these formats.

9. Does the course cover governance and compliance?
Yes, governance, risk management, and compliance are core components of the course content.

10. Who benefits most from this course?
IT leaders, digital transformation managers, strategists, project managers, risk officers, service portfolio managers, and senior executives overseeing IT and digital operations.

11. Is the course globally recognised?
Yes, ITIL 4 DITS certification is internationally recognised and valued across industries.

12. Can I combine DITS with other ITIL modules?
Yes, DITS is part of the ITIL Strategic Leader stream and can be combined with other modules for higher-level certification.

13. Are learning materials provided digitally?
Yes, digital manuals, workbooks, and online resources are included.

14. Is tutor support available for eLearning learners?
Yes, DrTutor support is provided for eLearning participants.

15. Can I take this course while working full-time?
Yes, the self-paced eLearning format allows learners to study while continuing professional responsibilities.

16. Will I receive a certificate upon passing?
Yes, successful candidates receive the official ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy certification.

17. Does the course teach continual improvement principles?
Yes, continual improvement is embedded throughout the course to ensure sustainable organisational success.

18. Can the course help me manage digital transformation initiatives?
Absolutely, the course provides practical frameworks and strategic guidance for leading digital and IT transformations.

19. Is exam-resit insurance available?
Optional exam-resit insurance can be added at checkout for additional security.

20. What support is provided during the course?
Learners receive tutor guidance, access to digital resources, and assistance with exam preparation throughout their learning journey.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30Hrs
ITIL 4 DSV.pngITIL 4 DSV.png

The ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value (DSV) course is designed for professionals who want to transform how their organisation builds, manages, and strengthens stakeholder relationships. In an environment where customer expectations continue to rise and digital services evolve rapidly, this qualification equips you with the capabilities to shape end-to-end value experiences that deliver measurable impact.

This programme goes far beyond theory. It demonstrates how demand is converted into value through every stage of the service relationship — from engagement and design to delivery, measurement, and continual improvement. You will learn how to understand stakeholder behaviours, map value journeys, design trusted partnerships, and create service interactions that maximise satisfaction and loyalty.

Through structured frameworks, practical tools, and scenario-based learning, you will develop a robust understanding of how to influence, negotiate, communicate, and facilitate value co-creation across diverse stakeholders. Whether your role focuses on customer experience, service delivery, product ownership, business relationship management, or organisational strategy, this course gives you the language, confidence, and practical toolkit to elevate the quality of every stakeholder interaction.

Upon completion, you will be prepared to sit the ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value certification exam — a core module of the ITIL 4 Managing Professional stream. The skills you gain will strengthen your ability to shape service culture, improve outcomes, and contribute to a more responsive and value-driven organisation.


What’s Included

✔ Accredited ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value (DSV) training
✔ Official ITIL® 4 DSV exam
✔ Comprehensive digital course materials
✔ Practice exam questions and self-assessment tools
✔ Tutor support and guidance
✔ Access to the official ITIL® 4 publications (digital)
✔ DrTutor learner support for eLearning students
✔ Certificate upon successful completion
✔ Optional extras (e.g., Take2 exam insurance) available at checkout


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor Support

Self-paced learning with 12-month access
Approx. 12–14 hours to complete
Price: £847.00 + VAT

A flexible online learning experience ideal for independent learners wanting to study at their own pace. Includes exam voucher, progress tracking, multimedia lessons, and personalised DrTutor support throughout your study period.


Live Virtual Classroom – Instructor-Led

Real-time online training delivered by certified ILX instructors
Interactive sessions, group exercises, and exam preparation
Typical duration: 3 days (6–7 hours per day)
Price: £2,006.25 + VAT

Designed for learners who benefit from live teaching, expert guidance, and collaborative activities in a structured format, without the need to travel.


Classroom Training (In-Person)

Delivered at selected training centres
Immersive, instructor-led learning with practical workshops
Typical duration: 3 days
Price: £2,885.00 + VAT

Ideal for teams or individuals seeking a fully immersive learning experience with direct interaction, peer discussions, and hands-on exercises.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Understand key principles of stakeholder value and co-creation

  • Map and manage stakeholder journeys end-to-end

  • Build trusted, high-value service relationships

  • Translate demand into actionable service opportunities

  • Strengthen customer experience and personalise service offerings

  • Manage communication, expectations, and service interactions

  • Use negotiation, prioritisation, and collaboration techniques

  • Apply behavioural insight to improve service engagement

  • Monitor service relationships and drive continual improvement

  • Align stakeholder needs with organisational outcomes


Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Certification: ITIL® 4 Specialist: Drive Stakeholder Value
  • Study Formats: eLearning, Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • Licence Length: 12-month eLearning access

    Course Duration:

    eLearning: 12–14 hoursVirtual/Classroom: Approx. 3 full days
  • Exam Format: Multiple choice, online proctored
Who It’s For

This course is ideal for:

  • Customer Experience and Customer Success professionals
  • Service Delivery Managers
  • Business Relationship Managers
  • Product Owners & Service Owners
  • IT and Digital Service Managers
  • Engagement Leads & Stakeholder Managers
  • ITSM and Service Desk Leaders
  • Anyone involved in service design, delivery, or customer interaction

Exam Information

  • Format: 40 multiple-choice questions
  • Duration: 90 minutes
  • Closed Book: Yes
  • Pass Mark: 70%
  • Delivery: Online, remote proctored

Pre-Course Requirements

You must hold one of the following:

  • ITIL® 4 Foundation Certificate, or
  • ITIL® v3 Foundation, or
  • ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Transition Certificate

If you choose Virtual or Classroom learning, a short mandatory online pre-course will be required before attending the live sessions.


FAQ 

1. What is the purpose of the ITIL® 4 DSV certification?
It helps professionals master stakeholder engagement, customer experience, service relationships, and value co-creation across digital services.

2. Is DSV part of the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional stream?
Yes. It is one of the four modules required to achieve the ITIL 4 Managing Professional designation.

3. How long does it take to complete the eLearning course?
Most learners complete it in 12–14 hours.

4. Can I access the course materials offline?
All core materials are delivered digitally and require internet access. Downloads may vary by content type.

5. Do I need ITIL 4 Foundation to take this?
Yes — it is a mandatory prerequisite.

6. How long do I have access to eLearning?
You receive 12 months of access from the activation date.

7. Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes — all study options include the official ITIL® exam.

8. Can I retake the exam?
Yes. Optional Take2 exam insurance can be added at checkout.

9. Does the qualification expire?
ITIL 4 certifications do not expire, but PeopleCert recommends periodic CPD.

10. Is the Virtual Classroom live or pre-recorded?
It is fully live, instructor-led training with real-time interaction.

11. Will I receive a digital certificate?
Yes — successful learners receive an official PeopleCert e-certificate.

12. Does this course help with customer experience roles?
Absolutely. DSV is strongly aligned with CX, stakeholder engagement, and service relationship management.

13. Can businesses book this as a private team course?
Yes — DrTutor can arrange private virtual or on-site sessions on request.

14. Is the classroom training schedule fixed?
Classroom training is offered on selected dates throughout the year.

15. Is tutor support included?
Yes — all learners receive support, with ILX support added for eLearning.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
ITIL 4 Strategic leader bundle.pngITIL 4 Strategic leader bundle.png

The ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader Learning Path is designed to equip executives, senior managers, and IT professionals with the comprehensive skills and strategic insight required to lead in today’s rapidly evolving digital and service-driven business environment. This integrated learning path combines three globally recognised ITIL® 4 certifications—ITIL® 4 Foundation, ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve, and ITIL® 4 Digital & IT Strategy—into a cohesive programme that provides both foundational knowledge and advanced strategic capabilities. Participants will gain a robust understanding of service management principles, the service value system, governance, risk management, and digital strategy execution, all aligned to deliver measurable business outcomes.

Through immersive learning experiences, scenario-based exercises, and practical case studies, learners will explore how to integrate IT strategy with business objectives, optimise service value streams, and drive continual improvement across their organisations. The programme emphasizes practical application, enabling leaders to translate theory into actionable strategies that enhance operational efficiency, improve decision-making, and support innovation. By mastering the ITIL® 4 framework, participants will develop the ability to create sustainable, value-driven digital transformation initiatives that align IT services with business priorities and stakeholder expectations.

This learning path also positions learners to achieve the prestigious ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation, demonstrating mastery in both directing, planning, and improving service delivery, as well as crafting and executing effective digital strategies. Beyond individual professional growth, the course provides organisations with leaders capable of fostering high-performing teams, optimising service management practices, and ensuring technology investments consistently deliver value.

Upon completion, participants will not only be prepared for all three ITIL® 4 certification exams but will also gain a strategic lens for evaluating and improving IT and digital operations. This comprehensive understanding empowers leaders to confidently drive transformation, manage change, mitigate risks, and leverage innovation to achieve competitive advantage. Whether you are shaping organisational strategy, leading IT-enabled projects, or advancing your professional credentials, the ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader Learning Path provides the knowledge, confidence, and executive-level insight necessary for impactful leadership.

What’s Included

  • ITIL® 4 Foundation
  • ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
  • ITIL® 4 Digital & IT Strategy
  • All official PeopleCert examinations
  • Accredited learning materials
  • Scenario-driven learning
  • Full ILX-DrTutor learner support
  • Official practice questions
  • Exam preparation resources
  • Digital course resources
  • Accredited ILX eLearning delivery
  • ITIL Strategic Leader designation upon completion
  • Optional extras including Take2 exam insurance

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 82 hours, 12-month licence, with all three exams included. Price: £1,902 + VAT or £158.50 + VAT per month

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the core concepts of ITIL 4 and the four dimensions of service management


Apply ITIL practices and principles to meet organisational requirements


Optimise service value chains and improve service delivery


Plan, direct, and improve value streams effectively


Integrate governance, risk, and compliance into IT operations


Implement continual improvement methods for sustainable organisational success


Leverage digital strategies to enhance innovation and operational performance


Develop leadership skills to drive strategic IT initiatives


Measure and report on key performance indicators for IT services


Enhance decision-making through scenario-based simulations

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation, Managing Professional, Strategic Leader
  • Certification: ITIL 4 Foundation; ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve; ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy
  • Duration: 82 hours eLearning; 5-day Live Virtual Classroom; 5-day Classroom
  • Exam Duration: 60–90 minutes per exam, depending on course
  • Pass Mark: 65–70%
  • Prerequisites: None for ITIL 4 Foundation; ITIL 4 Foundation required for the other two
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for IT and digital managers, senior executives, aspiring leaders, and professionals responsible for IT service delivery, governance, and strategic initiatives. It is suitable for individuals seeking to enhance organisational value through improved digital strategy, governance frameworks, and service management practices across IT-enabled products and services.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 60–90 minutes per exam
  • Number of Questions: 40–60 per exam, depending on certification
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65–70% depending on certification
  • Delivery Method: Online via remote proctor or in-classroom for Live/Physical options

Pre-Course Requirements

There are no prerequisites for the ITIL 4 Foundation exam. For ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy, learners must hold a valid ITIL Foundation certificate. No prior experience is mandatory, but practical exposure to digital service management and IT operations is recommended to maximise learning benefits.

FAQ

What is the ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation?
The ITIL® 4 Strategic Leader designation recognises professionals who have achieved a comprehensive understanding of IT strategy, governance, and digital transformation through three core ITIL 4 certifications.

Which certifications are included in this bundle?
The bundle includes ITIL 4 Foundation, ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve, and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy.

How long is the eLearning course?
The eLearning option provides approximately 82 hours of accredited online content, accessible for a 12-month licence period.

Can I take the exams online?
Yes, all included exams can be taken online via a secure remote proctoring system.

Do I need to complete ITIL 4 Foundation before the other courses?
Yes, ITIL 4 Foundation is required before taking ITIL 4 Direct, Plan & Improve and ITIL 4 Digital & IT Strategy.

What is included in the learning materials?
All courses include accredited digital learning resources, official manuals, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation tools.

Are tutor support and guidance included?
Yes, full DrTutor tutor support is provided throughout the learning path to help learners succeed in all three certifications.

How is the Live Virtual Classroom delivered?
The Live Virtual Classroom is an interactive, five-day course in an online virtual environment with 6–7 hours of instructor-led training each day.

Is there an in-person classroom option?
Yes, the bundle also offers a five-day in-person instructor-led course with workshops, exercises, and exam preparation.

What is the pass mark for the exams?
Pass marks vary by exam and range between 65–70% depending on the certification.

Can I purchase optional extras?
Yes, optional extras such as Take2 exam insurance and hardcopy manuals are available at checkout.

Do these certifications expire?
No, ITIL certifications do not expire.

How do these certifications benefit my career?
Achieving the ITIL 4 Strategic Leader designation demonstrates expertise in IT service management, strategy, and governance, enhancing career prospects in senior IT and digital leadership roles.

Can I apply these skills in real-world projects?
Yes, the learning path includes scenario-based exercises and practical examples to directly apply ITIL principles to organisational IT and digital strategies.

Are the courses internationally recognised?
Yes, all three ITIL certifications included are globally recognised and accredited by PeopleCert.

What is the total duration for the Live or Classroom options?
Both the Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom options are five-day courses, with 6–7 hours of learning per day.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 85Hrs
ITIL 4 Strategic leader bundle.pngITIL 4 Strategic leader bundle.png

The ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Bundle is a comprehensive and strategically designed learning path that equips IT professionals and managers with the advanced skills and knowledge required to lead and optimise IT-enabled services in modern organisations. This bundle delivers five globally recognised ITIL® 4 certifications, providing learners with both technical and strategic capabilities to manage complex service environments, drive digital transformation, and deliver measurable business value. Participants will gain a deep understanding of ITIL® 4 concepts, including the service value system, the service value chain, and the guiding principles that underpin effective IT service management.

The programme covers essential areas such as service creation and support, stakeholder engagement, high-velocity IT, and the planning, directing, and improvement of organisational practices. Learners will develop the ability to align IT initiatives with business strategy, manage risk and compliance effectively, foster continual improvement, and drive innovation across digital services. Scenario-based exercises and interactive simulations mirror real-world decision-making challenges to ensure practical application of skills.

This learning path enhances individual expertise while delivering tangible organisational impact. IT professionals will gain the confidence and authority to lead IT-enabled transformations, optimise operational efficiency, and enhance customer experiences. It is especially valuable for IT managers, service delivery leads, digital transformation leaders, and aspiring senior executives who aim to implement a structured, value-driven approach to IT service management. Completion of this bundle demonstrates mastery of ITIL® 4 best practices, positions learners as strategic leaders within their organisations, and supports career progression in an increasingly competitive and digitally-driven business landscape.


What’s Included

  • ITIL® 4 Foundation accredited eLearning and exam
  • ITIL® 4 Create, Deliver & Support accredited eLearning and exam
  • ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value accredited eLearning and exam
  • ITIL® 4 High Velocity IT accredited eLearning and exam
  • ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve accredited eLearning and exam
  • Official digital manuals for all five certifications covered by this learning path
  • Full DrTutor learner support throughout the programme
  • Scenario-based exercises for real-world application
  • Exam preparation resources to maximise learner success
  • Optional extras available at checkout, including Take2 exam insurance


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 56 hours, 12-month licence, with all exams included. Price: £3,126 + VAT or £260.50 + VAT per month.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Master ITIL® 4 core concepts including the service value system, service value chain, and guiding principles


Understand and implement ITIL® 4 service management practices in real-world environments


Plan, design, and manage IT-enabled products and services effectively


Align IT initiatives with business strategy to drive value and outcomes


Enhance service delivery, operational efficiency, and customer experience


Embed continual improvement, governance, risk, and compliance practices


Develop high-velocity IT capabilities for rapid, digital service delivery


Manage stakeholder relationships and optimise service value streams


Apply scenario-based decision-making to practical organisational challenges


Drive measurable improvements in service management and digital transformation initiatives

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Course Level: Managing Professional
  • Certification: ITIL® 4 Foundation; ITIL® 4 Create, Deliver & Support; ITIL® 4 Drive Stakeholder Value; ITIL® 4 High Velocity IT; ITIL® 4 Direct, Plan & Improve
  • Duration: 56 hours eLearning, 12-month licence
  • Exam Duration: Varies per certification
  • Pass Mark: Varies per certification
  • Prerequisites: ITIL® 4 Foundation required for all modules except Foundation itself
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning


Who It’s For

This bundle is ideal for IT professionals and managers responsible for delivering IT-enabled services, managing stakeholder relationships, driving digital transformation, aligning organisational strategy, and leading continual improvement. It is also suitable for digital leaders and aspiring senior executives seeking a structured framework to enhance service management, optimise team performance, and deliver measurable business value.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: Varies by certification
  • Number of Questions: Varies by certification
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: Varies by certification
  • Delivery Method: Online through accredited examination platforms


Pre-Course Requirements

There are no prerequisites for the ITIL® 4 Foundation exam. To attempt the other four certifications, learners must hold a valid ITIL® 4 Foundation and attend training through an accredited training organisation. No pre-course work is required.


FAQ

How is the learning path delivered?
The ITIL® 4 Managing Professional Learning Path is delivered through accredited eLearning with full DrTutor support, providing a self-paced, flexible experience.

How are the exams structured?
Each certification has its own exam format, including multiple-choice questions designed to assess knowledge, understanding, and practical application of ITIL® 4 concepts.

Do all five certifications expire?
ITIL® 4 certifications do not expire, but it is recommended to stay current with evolving ITIL® best practices through continuous professional development.

What are the benefits of achieving the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional designation?
The designation demonstrates advanced knowledge and skills in IT service management, enhances career prospects, and positions professionals to lead strategic digital and IT service initiatives effectively.

How do I access the digital versions of the ITIL® 4 manuals?
Official digital manuals are included for all certifications and can be accessed through the accredited eLearning platform upon enrolment.

Can I purchase optional extras like exam insurance?
Yes, optional extras such as Take2 exam insurance and hardcopy manuals are available at checkout to enhance your learning experience.

Who should attend this course?
IT managers, service delivery leads, digital transformation leaders, and aspiring senior executives aiming to optimise IT-enabled services and align them with business strategy should attend.

How long does it take to complete the learning path?
The bundle comprises approximately 56 hours of online content, designed to be completed over a 12-month self-paced licence period.

What support is available during the course?
DrTutor provides full learner support, including guidance, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation resources throughout the learning path.

How are scenario-based exercises integrated?
Exercises simulate real-world decision-making and organisational challenges to ensure practical application of ITIL® 4 concepts.

Is prior ITIL experience required?
ITIL® 4 Foundation is required for all modules except the Foundation course itself. Other than that, no prior experience is necessary.

Can I complete this bundle entirely online?
Yes, the bundle is delivered through accredited eLearning with a flexible self-paced approach.

Will this course help with career advancement?
Yes, achieving the ITIL® 4 Managing Professional designation positions learners for leadership roles and demonstrates expertise in IT service management and digital transformation.

What industries benefit from this learning path?
IT, digital services, consulting, finance, healthcare, and any organisation delivering IT-enabled products or services can benefit from the skills acquired.

How do I prepare for the exams?
Exam preparation resources are provided, including practice questions, scenario-based exercises, and access to official digital manuals.

Can this bundle be customised for corporate teams?
Yes, DrTutor can provide guidance on team enrolment and corporate training options for multiple learners.

What is the licence period for eLearning?
The eLearning licence period is 12 months, providing ample time to complete all five certifications.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 65Hrs
Management of Portfolios.pngManagement of Portfolios.png

The MoP® Foundation course provides a structured introduction to portfolio management, giving professionals the skills to align multiple projects and programmes with organisational strategy. You will learn how to prioritise initiatives, optimise resource use, manage risks, and maximise business value.

This course covers the core MoP® principles, portfolio definition and delivery cycles, practices for governance, and the key roles and responsibilities required for effective portfolio management. Through real-world examples and scenario-based learning, you will understand how to embed a portfolio office, make informed decisions, and ensure transparency and accountability across all initiatives.

By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the MoP® Foundation exam, equipped with practical knowledge and confidence to contribute to portfolio management or senior management decision-making.


What’s Included

  • Accredited MoP® Foundation training
  • Official MoP Foundation exam
  • Official MoP manual (digital or printed)
  • Portfolio process and cycle maps
  • Mock exams or exam simulator for eLearning learners
  • Full tutor support
  • 12-month access for online learners
  • Downloadable course materials and resources

Delivery Options & Pricing

  • eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by ILX, supported by Drtutor – From £732.00
    Self-paced online learning with 12 months’ access, full tutor support, mock exams, process maps, and downloadable resources.

  • Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors £1883
    Interactive, instructor-led online sessions with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and full exam preparation.

  • In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited £2620
    Face-to-face training with group activities, practical exercises, scenario walkthroughs, exam preparation, and certified ILX instructors.

All delivery methods prepare you fully for the MoP® Foundation certification exam.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):
  • Understand portfolio management and its value to organisations

  • Apply MoP® principles, cycles, and governance practices

  • Define roles, responsibilities, and portfolio office structures

  • Evaluate and prioritise portfolio initiatives based on strategic alignment

  • Use portfolio management techniques for risk, resources, and value optimisation

  • Apply MoP® documentation and tools for decision-making and control

  • Embed portfolio management to support organisational change and value realisation

  • Be fully prepared for the MoP® Foundation certification exam

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Accreditation: ILX Group / AXELOS
  • Certification: MoP® Foundation
  • Exam: 50 multiple-choice questions, 40 minutes, pass mark 50%
  • Duration: 10–12 hours eLearning, 1–2 days Virtual/Classroom
  • Access Period: 12 months for online learners
  • Prerequisites: None; suitable for beginners and experienced professionals

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

What is the purpose of the MoP® Foundation course?
It provides fundamental knowledge of portfolio management, including how to align projects and programmes with organisational strategy to maximise value.

Who should take this course?
Portfolio managers, PMO staff, senior stakeholders, change managers, and anyone responsible for managing multiple initiatives.

Do I need prior project or programme management experience?
No, the course is designed for both beginners and experienced practitioners.

How long does the exam take, and what is the pass mark?
The exam is 40 minutes long, consisting of 50 multiple-choice questions. The pass mark is 50%.

Is the exam included in the course?
Yes — all delivery formats include the official MoP Foundation exam.

Can I study at my own pace?
Yes — the eLearning route provides 12 months’ access to allow flexible learning.

What support is available during the course?
Full tutor support, mock exams, study guides, and interactive resources are provided throughout.

Is the MoP Foundation recognised globally?
Yes — MoP is a globally recognised framework for portfolio management in organisations.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 12 Hrs
Management of Portfolios.pngManagement of Portfolios.png

The Management of Portfolios (MoP®) Practitioner course builds on the Foundation level and equips professionals with the practical skills to apply MoP principles, practices and techniques within a real organisational environment. Designed for portfolio managers, programme managers, project managers, PMO leaders and strategic decision-makers, this course focuses on turning strategy into successful delivery by aligning investment, resources and change initiatives with organisational priorities.

This training provides a comprehensive, applied understanding of how to implement portfolio management to optimise value, improve decision-making, enhance risk control and strengthen organisational governance. You will learn how to use MoP guidance to evaluate business cases, prioritise initiatives, balance capacity, manage interdependencies and ensure consistent oversight of change portfolios.

The course includes realistic scenarios, exercises and practical application of MoP tools, giving you the confidence to use MoP methods in your own organisation. You will explore portfolio definitions, delivery cycles, governance structures, organisational energy, stakeholder engagement and best-practice approaches for creating a sustainable portfolio management framework.

Completing this course prepares you for the MoP® Practitioner exam and provides the practical insight required to support executives, boards and PMOs in shaping a balanced, strategically aligned and value-driven change portfolio.

What’s Included

Accredited MoP® Practitioner training
Official MoP® Practitioner exam
Portfolio management scenarios and practical exercises
Exam preparation and sample papers
MoP® Practitioner digital course materials
Tutor support from ILX-accredited instructors
Certificate upon passing the Practitioner exam

Delivery Options & Pricing

There is no eLearning option for MoP Practitioner. Training is delivered exclusively by ILX-accredited tutors in Virtual Classroom or In-Person formats.

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX Tutors – From £1,143.75

Real-time instructor-led training
Interactive discussions and scenario-based learning
Exam preparation included
Digital course materials provided
Ideal for remote learners who need structured support

In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited – From £1,542.75

Face-to-face training with ILX practitioners
Group exercises, case-study applications and facilitated workshops
Full MoP course pack and exam preparation
Suitable for organisations wanting on-site or team-based delivery

All options fully prepare you for the MoP® Practitioner certification exam.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!): How to apply MoP® principles, practices and techniques in real scenarios
How to analyse portfolio information to support strategic decision-making
How to evaluate and prioritise programmes and projects
How to balance organisational capacity, resources and risk
How to design, implement and maintain portfolio governance
How to apply MoP® tools across portfolio definition and delivery cycles
How to support senior leaders, PMOs and boards with portfolio insights
The knowledge and application skills needed to pass the MoP Practitioner exam
Key facts:

Key Facts

Certification level: MoP® Practitioner
Prerequisite: MoP® Foundation (required)
Exam format: Objective testing, open-book (MoP manual only), 2.5 hours
Audience: Portfolio managers, PMO leaders, programme managers, senior managers, change leaders
Accreditation: PeopleCert / Axelos
Delivery: Virtual Classroom or In-Person only
Provider: drtutor (partnered with ILX for tutor-led delivery)

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Do I need MoP Foundation before taking Practitioner?
Yes. You must hold the MoP® Foundation certification before sitting the Practitioner exam.

Is this course available as eLearning?
No. MoP Practitioner is delivered only by ILX tutors via Virtual Classroom or In-Person.

Does this course include the exam?
Yes. The official MoP® Practitioner exam is included.

Is the MoP manual required?
Yes. The exam is open-book using the official MoP manual.

Will this help me work in a PMO or strategic role?
Yes. MoP Practitioner develops practical portfolio management skills used in PMOs, strategy, governance and executive-level environments.

Do I get a certificate?
Yes — after passing the Practitioner exam, you will receive the official MoP® Practitioner certification.



Requirements:

Prerequisites: In order to sit the Practitioner exam, you must have passed the MoP Foundation qualification. 

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Management of Portfolios.pngManagement of Portfolios.png

The Management of Portfolios (MoP®) Foundation & Practitioner Combined course provides a complete, end-to-end learning pathway for professionals responsible for aligning change initiatives with organisational strategy. This comprehensive programme covers both the MoP Foundation and Practitioner levels, giving you the knowledge, practical skills and confidence to apply portfolio management effectively in real organisational environments.

The course explores how portfolio management enables organisations to make informed investment decisions, prioritise initiatives, optimise resource allocation and ensure that change activity delivers maximum value. You will learn the MoP Principles, Practices and key techniques, and then apply them through scenario-based learning to develop real-world capability in supporting executives, PMOs, programme managers and strategic leaders.

Throughout the training you will examine portfolio definition and delivery cycles, governance structures, strategic alignment techniques, organisational energy, risk management, dependency mapping, benefits management and decision-support processes. This combined course prepares you for both MoP® Foundation and MoP® Practitioner exams, ensuring you can understand, apply and tailor portfolio management guidance in your organisation.

This is the ideal route for anyone seeking full MoP certification in one structured, cost-effective programme that moves from theory to applied practice.

What’s Included

Accredited MoP® Foundation training
Accredited MoP® Practitioner training
Official MoP® Foundation exam
Official MoP® Practitioner exam
Digital MoP® course materials
Portfolio management scenarios and exercises
Mock exam questions and exam preparation
Tutor support throughout the course
Certificate upon passing both exams

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – ILX Accredited – From £2,700

Real-time training delivered by ILX-accredited tutors
Covers both Foundation and Practitioner
Interactive discussions, case studies and scenario-based exercises
Comprehensive exam preparation for both levels
Digital course pack and all required materials included
Ideal for remote learners wanting structured guidance

In-Person Classroom / On-Site – ILX Accredited – From £4000

Face-to-face training with ILX instructors
Group exercises, guided application of MoP tools and practical workshops
Foundation and Practitioner exam preparation included
Printed materials provided
Ideal for teams or organisations seeking dedicated on-site delivery

All delivery options fully prepare you for both MoP Foundation and MoP Practitioner certification exams.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understanding the key concepts, terms and principles of MoP®


Applying MoP principles, practices and techniques in real scenarios


Aligning programmes and projects with strategic organisational objectives


Evaluating and prioritising investments across a portfolio


Analysing risk, capacity, resources and interdependencies


Designing and implementing effective portfolio governance


Supporting senior leaders and PMOs with decision-support information


Applying MoP guidance across portfolio definition and delivery cycles


The practical competence required to pass both MoP® Foundation and Practitioner exams


Key facts:

Key Facts

Certification: MoP® Foundation + MoP® Practitioner
Accreditation: PeopleCert / Axelos
Prerequisite for Practitioner: MoP® Foundation
Exam method: Online with remote proctor
Exam type: Multiple-choice (Foundation) and Objective Testing (Practitioner)
Study format: Virtual Classroom or In-Person/ Tutor support
Provider:  ILX-accredited tutor-led components

FAQ

Is this course suitable for beginners?
Yes. It starts at Foundation level and builds up to Practitioner, making it suitable for those new to portfolio management.

Are both exams included?
Yes. The combined package includes both MoP Foundation and MoP Practitioner exams.

Do I need the MoP manual?
Yes. The Practitioner exam is open-book using the official MoP manual.

Can I take Practitioner without Foundation?
No. You must pass the Foundation exam before attempting Practitioner.

Is the content identical across delivery methods?
Yes. All formats cover the full MoP syllabus, including principles, practices and application.

Does this qualification help with PMO or strategic roles?
Absolutely. MoP skills are highly valued in PMOs, governance boards, strategy teams and senior management environments.


Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 16 Hrs
Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®).pngCertified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®).png

The Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®) certification is one of the most prestigious and globally recognised credentials for senior business analysis professionals. Issued by the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®), CBAP® validates advanced knowledge, extensive practical experience, and professional competence in business analysis practices aligned to the BABOK® Guide Version 3.

This course is designed for experienced Business Analysts and professionals working in senior, strategic, or leadership roles who are responsible for identifying complex business needs, defining high-value requirements, and delivering solutions that drive measurable organisational outcomes. It provides in-depth coverage of the six BABOK® knowledge areas, enabling learners to apply structured, best-practice approaches to requirements management, stakeholder engagement, solution evaluation, and business value delivery.

Through a combination of expert-led content, real-world case studies, and practical examples, this CBAP® training strengthens your ability to operate confidently at an enterprise level. You will deepen your understanding of how business analysis supports strategy, governance, change initiatives, and continuous improvement across a wide range of industries, including finance, technology, public sector, healthcare, and professional services.

Completing this course supports progression into senior business analysis roles and prepares you for the CBAP® certification exam, helping you demonstrate credibility, leadership capability, and strategic insight. CBAP®-qualified professionals are highly sought after and typically trusted with complex initiatives, cross-functional programmes, and decision-making responsibilities that directly influence organisational success.

What’s Included
  • Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®) eLearning course
  • Approximately 14 hours of structured online study
  • 12-month self-paced eLearning licence
  • Coverage of all six BABOK® Guide Version 3 knowledge areas
  • 50 industry-recognised business analysis tools and techniques
  • 11 real-world business case studies
  • Three full CBAP simulation test papers for self-assessment

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
This self-paced eLearning course allows learners to study flexibly over a 12-month period. The programme is aligned to IIBA standards and supports experienced professionals preparing for the CBAP exam. Ongoing academic support is provided through ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £450.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £37.50 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will master the Business Analysis Core Concept Model.


Learners will understand and apply all six BABOK® Guide Version 3 knowledge areas.


Learners will apply over 50 business analysis tools and techniques.


Learners will analyse business needs and recommend high-value solutions.


Learners will strengthen stakeholder collaboration and communication.


Learners will evaluate solutions and measure business value delivery.


Learners will gain confidence to operate at senior and strategic levels.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Advanced
  • Study Time: Approximately 14 hours
  • Access Period: 12 months
  • Delivery Method: eLearning
  • Certification: Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®)
  • Awarding Body: IIBA®

Who It’s For
This course is designed for experienced Business Analysts with significant practical experience, Senior Business Analysts, Project Managers, Product Managers, Consultants, and professionals working in requirements analysis, systems analysis, and process improvement roles.

Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites to take this training course. However, formal eligibility requirements must be met before applying for the CBAP exam through IIBA.

Exam Information

  • Exam Name: Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®)
  • Certification Body: International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®)
  • Exam Duration: 3.5 hours (210 minutes)
  • Number of Questions: 120 multiple-choice questions
  • Question Type: Scenario-based multiple choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: Not published by IIBA® (scaled scoring model)
  • Delivery Method: Online exam delivered by IIBA® via remote proctoring
  • Exam Availability: Scheduled directly through IIBA® after eligibility approval
  • Exam Included: No – the exam fee is paid separately to IIBA

Note: The CBAP exam is not included with this course. Candidates must apply directly to IIBA and meet eligibility requirements, including professional experience, professional development hours, references, and agreement to the IIBA Code of Conduct.

Pre-Course Requirements
There is no mandatory pre-course work. This course assumes prior professional experience in business analysis.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the CBAP certification?
CBAP is an advanced professional certification awarded by IIBA that recognises senior-level expertise in business analysis practices and leadership.

Is the CBAP exam included in this course?
No. The exam must be booked separately through IIBA once eligibility requirements are met.

How long do I have access to the course?
You receive a 12-month eLearning licence from the date of enrolment.

How much study time is required?
The course contains approximately 14 hours of structured learning, excluding additional revision and practice exams.

Who issues the CBAP certification?
The certification is issued by the International Institute of Business Analysis (IIBA®).

What experience do I need to sit the CBAP exam?
You must have at least 7,500 hours of business analysis work experience over the last 10 years, including 900 hours in four of the six BABOK® knowledge areas.

Are professional development hours required?
Yes. A minimum of 35 hours of professional development within the last four years is required.

Does this course cover the BABOK® Guide Version 3?
Yes. The entire course is aligned to BABOK® Guide Version 3.

Is this course suitable for beginners?
No. This course is designed for experienced professionals operating at senior or strategic levels.

What roles does CBAP help with?
CBAP supports progression into Senior Business Analyst, Lead Analyst, Product Manager, Programme Manager, Strategy Consultant, and Business Architect roles.

Is the certification internationally recognised?
Yes. CBAP is recognised globally across multiple industries and sectors.

Can I study alongside full-time work?
Yes. The self-paced eLearning format is designed for working professionals.

Does CBAP improve career progression?
Yes. CBAP holders are often trusted with higher-impact initiatives, leadership responsibilities, and strategic decision-making roles.

What salary can CBAP-qualified professionals earn?
In the UK, CBAP-certified professionals typically earn between £65,000 and £90,000 per year, with senior and consulting roles exceeding £100,000, depending on experience and sector.

Is this course accredited?
The training is aligned with IIBA standards and supports CBAP exam preparation but does not itself award the certification.

Does the CBAP certification expire?
Yes. CBAP holders must maintain certification through IIBA’s Continuing Development Requirements (CDR) programme.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Business Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path.pngBusiness Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path.png

The Business Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path is a comprehensive, career-focused programme designed to develop end-to-end business analysis capability using industry-relevant tools, methodologies, and real-world case studies. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this learning path is ideal for individuals seeking to enter the business analysis profession or progress into more advanced, data-driven analyst roles within modern organisations.

This programme provides structured exposure to core business analysis principles alongside practical data analytics, Agile methodologies, and advanced analytical techniques. Learners gain hands-on experience with widely used tools such as Excel, Tableau, Python, SQL, R, and Agile Scrum frameworks, enabling them to analyse complex data, support business decision-making, and contribute effectively to organisational change initiatives.

The learning path combines expert-led instruction, self-paced eLearning, applied projects, and industry case studies developed in collaboration with leading global organisations. It supports the development of analytical thinking, stakeholder engagement, requirements management, and data-driven insight generation, preparing learners to operate confidently in business, technology, and transformation environments.

With 12 months’ access to structured learning content and practical exercises, this programme equips learners with in-demand business analysis skills that align with current employer expectations across sectors including finance, technology, consulting, healthcare, and public services.


What’s Included

Twelve months’ access to the complete Business Analyst Learning Path eLearning programme.
Certified Business Analysis Professional CBAP® course content.
Tableau training for data visualisation and dashboard development.
Data analysis and visualisation with Python.
Mathematical optimisation for business problems.
Business Analyst capstone project.
Harvard Business Publishing case studies for business analysis.
Elective modules including Agile Scrum Master, CCBA®, SQL training, data science with R, and business analytics with Excel.
Practical projects, assessments, and applied learning activities.
Course completion certificate upon meeting the required criteria.


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX
This programme is delivered as self-paced online training with 12 months’ access to all course content. Learners can study at their own pace, complete practical projects, and build a portfolio of applied business analysis skills.
Price: £1,250.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £104.17 + VAT per month, subject to finance availability

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will develop the ability to apply structured business analysis frameworks to identify organisational needs and recommend effective solutions.


Learners will gain practical expertise in analysing data using Excel, Tableau, Python, R, and SQL to support evidence-based decision-making.


Learners will understand Agile and Scrum methodologies and how they are applied within business analysis and project environments.


Learners will build competency in requirements elicitation, stakeholder management, and business analysis planning.


Learners will develop confidence in translating data insights into actionable business recommendations.


Learners will complete real-world projects and case studies that demonstrate applied business analysis capability.


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Professional learning path.
  • Duration: 12-month access.
  • Study Time: Approximately 14 hours plus applied projects and electives.
  • Delivery Method: eLearning only.
  • Certification: Skills and knowledge-based programme with course completion certificate.
  • Exam: No single formal exam included.


Who It’s For

This learning path is suitable for graduates, early-career professionals, and career-changers seeking to build practical business analysis and data analytics skills. It is also appropriate for professionals in business, IT, operations, or project roles who want to strengthen analytical capability and transition into business analysis responsibilities.


Exam Information

This learning path does not have a single, overarching exam. Instead, learners are assessed across individual courses and projects as follows:

  • Certified Business Analysis Professional (CBAP®): Learners must complete at least 85% of the online self-paced learning or attend one live virtual classroom batch, complete one project, and pass one assessment with a score of at least 60%. Formal CBAP® exam registration is separate via IIBA, requiring eligibility criteria.

  • Tableau Training: Learners complete at least 85% of the course and a project-based assessment to demonstrate dashboard creation and data visualisation skills.

  • Data Analysis and Visualisation with Python: Completion of at least 85% of the online course is required, with practical exercises assessed.

  • Mathematical Optimisation for Business Problems: At least 85% of the course must be completed, with project exercises used for assessment.

  • Business Analyst Capstone Project: Learners attend one LVC batch and complete a real-world project demonstrating applied business analysis skills.

  • Harvard Business Publishing Case Studies: Learners complete one LVC batch and submit analysis of case studies for assessment.

  • Elective Courses (Agile Scrum Master, CCBA®, SQL, R, Excel): Assessment varies by course, typically requiring completion of exercises or projects.

Learners receive a course completion certificate for the learning path after meeting the above criteria across all modules. Individual certifications (e.g., CBAP®) are obtained by fulfilling external exam and eligibility requirements where applicable.

Note: There is no single formal certification exam associated with this learning path. Learners receive a course completion certificate upon meeting defined completion and assessment criteria across the included modules. Some individual courses within the programme may align to external certification pathways, which are pursued separately if eligibility requirements are met.


Pre-Course Requirements

There are no mandatory prerequisites for enrolling in this learning path. Prior exposure to business processes, data analysis, or project environments is beneficial but not required.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Business Analysis Business Analyst Learning Path?
It is a structured eLearning programme that develops business analysis, data analytics, and Agile skills through multiple integrated courses and practical projects.

How long do I have access to the course?
You will have 12 months’ access to all learning materials from the date of enrolment.

Is this course suitable for beginners?
Yes. The learning path starts with foundational concepts and progressively builds advanced skills, making it suitable for beginners and career-changers.

Is there a formal certification included?
There is no single formal certification exam included, but learners receive a course completion certificate and gain training aligned to recognised industry standards.

Can this course help me become a Business Analyst?
Yes. The learning path develops the core skills, tools, and methodologies required for Business Analyst roles across multiple industries.

What tools will I learn during the programme?
You will gain experience with Excel, Tableau, Python, SQL, R, Agile Scrum frameworks, and supporting analytical libraries and tools.

Is the training self-paced?
Yes. The programme is delivered entirely as self-paced eLearning, allowing you to study around work and personal commitments.

Does this course include real-world projects?
Yes. The learning path includes applied projects, case studies, and a capstone project designed to reflect real business scenarios.

What industries is this course relevant to?
The skills taught are applicable across finance, technology, consulting, healthcare, retail, public sector, and professional services.

Will this course help with career progression?
Yes. The programme strengthens analytical capability, decision-making skills, and technical knowledge valued by employers.

What salary can a Business Analyst expect in the UK?
In the UK, Business Analysts typically earn between £40,000 and £65,000 per year, with senior and specialist roles exceeding £70,000 depending on experience and sector.

Does this course guarantee a job?
No course can guarantee employment, but this learning path significantly improves job readiness and employability.

Are there any live sessions included?
This delivery option focuses on eLearning. Some modules reference live virtual components conceptually, but the programme is completed online.

Can I study while working full-time?
Yes. The self-paced structure is designed to support learners studying alongside full-time employment.

Is financial instalment payment available?
Yes. Monthly payment options are available, subject to finance approval.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Business Analysis Applied Business Architecture.pngBusiness Analysis Applied Business Architecture.png

The Business Analysis Applied Business Architecture course is a three-day live virtual classroom programme designed to equip professionals with practical skills in business architecture, bridging strategy and operational execution to align organisational goals. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this course is endorsed by the International Institute of Business Analysis™ (IIBA®) and provides 24 PD Hours/CDUs, making it suitable for career advancement in enterprise and strategic architecture roles.

This immersive course focuses on the application of business architecture frameworks and techniques to translate organisational strategy into operational capability. Participants will learn how to create business motivation models, business capability models, and business model canvases, and use capability-based planning to shape and operationalise strategy effectively. By exploring stakeholder engagement, value mapping, and strategic analysis, learners develop a comprehensive understanding of how business architecture can drive organisational performance and support transformative change.

Through storytelling, visualisations, and hands-on case study exercises, participants gain practical experience in applying business architecture concepts to real-world scenarios. The course emphasises critical thinking, design thinking, and architectural thinking, allowing professionals to present strategic recommendations confidently to executive audiences and support the successful delivery of organisational change initiatives.

This course is highly suitable for CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers seeking to strengthen their expertise in aligning strategy with execution. Participants will leave with actionable skills to implement business architecture frameworks, optimise value delivery, and provide strategic advice that drives measurable business outcomes.


What’s Included

  • Three days of instructor-led training delivered in a live virtual classroom environment.
  • Comprehensive course materials covering all concepts, techniques, and exercises.
  • Access to practical case studies for applied learning.


Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
This immersive learning experience is delivered entirely online, providing the interaction and guidance of an in-person classroom without the need for travel.
Price: £2,990.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £249.17 + VAT per month, subject to finance availability

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will acquire the ability to create business motivation models and business model canvases to conceptualise and structure strategic thinking.


Learners will understand how to develop business capability models and use capability-based planning to operationalise strategy effectively.


Learners will gain knowledge of stakeholder identification and engagement techniques to address concerns and optimise collaboration.


Learners will develop skills in value mapping, analysing value disciplines, value chains, and creating compelling value propositions.


Learners will understand capability mapping, strategic analysis, and methods for identifying organisational strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats.


Learners will learn how to present strategic narratives to executives using business modelling, storytelling, and visualisation techniques.


Learners will gain practical experience through case studies, applying business architecture theory to real-world organisational challenges.


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Professional learning programme.
  • Duration: 3 Days.
  • Delivery Method: Live virtual classroom.
  • Certification: Skills and knowledge-based, endorsed by IIBA™, 24 PD Hours/CDUs.
  • Exam: No exam associated with this course.


Who It’s For

This course is ideal for CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers seeking practical skills in business architecture. It is suitable for professionals responsible for aligning strategy with execution to improve organisational performance.


Prerequisites

There are no formal prerequisites for this course. Knowledge of business fundamentals and TOGAF® frameworks is advantageous but not required.


Exam Information

There is no formal exam for this course. Participants receive a certificate of completion endorsed by IIBA™ and eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs.


Pre-Course Requirements

There is no pre-course work required. Learners are encouraged to bring prior organisational or strategic experience to maximise engagement and application.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is business architecture?
Business architecture is a discipline that aligns organisational strategies with operational frameworks by mapping processes, value streams, capabilities, and goals, creating a cohesive structure to drive efficiency and strategic decision-making.

How will this course support my career progression?
This course provides practical tools to implement business architecture frameworks, enabling professionals to align strategy with operations, optimise value delivery, and provide strategic advice, positioning them for leadership and strategic roles.

Is this course suitable for beginners?
While no formal prerequisites are required, familiarity with business fundamentals enhances comprehension. The course is designed to support professionals at various levels seeking practical skills in business architecture.

How is the course delivered?
This course is delivered as a live virtual classroom, combining interactive lectures, hands-on exercises, and case study analysis. Participants experience the engagement of a traditional classroom with the convenience of online delivery.

What tools or frameworks will I learn?
Learners will work with business motivation models, business capability models, business model canvases, and techniques for stakeholder engagement, value mapping, capability mapping, and strategic analysis.

How many PD Hours or CDUs will I earn?
This course is eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs endorsed by IIBA™.

Does this course include practical exercises?
Yes, practical exercises and case studies are integrated throughout to reinforce learning and application of business architecture concepts.

Can this course help me with strategic decision-making?
Yes, learners will gain skills to analyse organisational strategy, map capabilities, optimise value streams, and present recommendations to executive audiences.

Who is this course ideal for?
CXOs, strategists, planners, department heads, chief architects, enterprise architects, program architects, program managers, and change managers.

Do I need any prior business architecture knowledge?
Prior knowledge is not required, but experience with organisational strategy or frameworks like TOGAF® is beneficial.

Is there a certificate provided?
Yes, a certificate of completion is awarded, endorsed by IIBA™, eligible for 24 PD Hours/CDUs.

What is the price of the course?
The course is priced at £2,990.00 + VAT, with an optional finance plan of £249.17 + VAT per month.

How long is the course?
The course is delivered over three full days of intensive skills-based training.

Is travel required for the course?
No, the live virtual classroom format allows full participation online.

Can this course help improve my organisational influence?
Yes, the skills gained enable participants to align strategy and operations, communicate effectively with stakeholders, and influence decision-making at senior levels.

What outcomes can I expect after the course?
Participants will leave with practical skills in business architecture, strategic analysis, value mapping, and stakeholder engagement, ready to implement frameworks that support organisational change.

Will this course impact my earning potential?
Professionals with business architecture expertise can expect enhanced career prospects, with UK salaries typically ranging from £60,000 to £90,000 per year depending on role, seniority, and sector.

Are there any optional modules?
No optional extras are provided for this course.

Do I need to complete pre-course work?
No pre-course preparation is required.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
APMG International Change Management™ Foundation.pngAPMG International Change Management™ Foundation.png

The APMG International Change Management Foundation course provides a comprehensive introduction to organisational change principles and practices. This globally recognised certification equips professionals with the knowledge and skills necessary to support, implement, and manage change initiatives effectively across different organisational environments.

Designed for individuals responsible for facilitating change, including Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, and team leaders, this course focuses on understanding both the organisational context and human responses to change. You will learn practical techniques to identify resistance, engage stakeholders, communicate effectively, and support individuals through transition periods.

The course emphasises the importance of aligning change initiatives with organisational culture, goals, and strategies. Participants gain insights into the roles and responsibilities of Change Managers, including coordinating with change sponsors and teams, assessing change impacts, and ensuring initiatives achieve their desired outcomes. By completing this Foundation course, professionals can enhance organisational capability, foster collaboration, and create the groundwork for successful and sustainable change.

What’s Included
Accredited APMG International Change Management Foundation training
APMG International Change Management Foundation exam
Official Change Management v3 study guide (digital version included with all study options; hardcopy included with classroom and live virtual classroom)
Tutor support throughout the course
Optional extras including Pass Protect exam insurance and hardcopy study guide for eLearning option.

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced accredited online training with 12-month licence, approximately 10–12 hours of study. Includes digital Change Management v3 study guide and exam voucher.
Price: £910.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £75.83 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX 
Three-day immersive online classroom with interactive workshops, practical exercises, and live tutor support.
Price: £2020.00 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by ILX 
Three-day in-person training with lectures, scenario-based exercises, and group discussions. Hardcopy study guide included. Price: £2130.00 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the organisational context, culture, and goals of change initiatives


Recognise and manage human responses to change, minimising negative impacts


Differentiate between valid concerns and resistance to change


Propose appropriate solutions in response to concerns and resistance


Support change sponsors, leaders, and agents effectively


Develop stakeholder engagement and communication strategies


Assess change impacts, severity, and progress collaboratively with colleagues


Apply change management principles to real-world organisational scenarios

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Course Duration: 12-month licence for eLearning; 3 days for classroom/virtual options
  • Delivery Method: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • Certification: APMG International Change Management Foundation
  • Awarding Body: APMG International

Who It’s For
Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, team leaders, and anyone involved in supporting or implementing organisational change initiatives

Prerequisites
There are no prerequisites for this course

Exam Information
  • Multiple choice exam
  • 50 questions, split into four sections
  • Duration: 40 minutes
  • Closed book
  • Pass mark: 50%

Optional Extras
Pass Protect exam insurance
Hardcopy of official Change Management v3 study guide for eLearning learners

Pre-course Requirements
Mandatory online pre-course for live virtual classroom delivery.

Frequently Asked Questions

How is the Change Management Foundation course delivered?
Available via eLearning, live virtual classroom, and in-person classroom. eLearning takes approximately 10–12 hours, while classroom options are delivered over three days.

Who is the Change Management Foundation course for?
Ideal for professionals involved in organisational change initiatives, including Project Managers, team leaders, HR professionals, and anyone seeking to improve their understanding of change processes.

How do I access my digital study guide?
Upon purchasing the course, you will receive an email to redeem your exam voucher on the APMG portal, which grants access to the digital Change Management v3 study guide.

What happens if I fail my exam?
You may re-take the exam for a fee. Pass Protect allows you to re-sit at a reduced cost if purchased alongside your initial course.

Can I purchase a hardcopy of the study guide?
Hardcopy is included with classroom and live virtual classroom options. eLearning learners can add it as an optional extra.

Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the APMG Foundation certification is recognised globally as a standard for change management competence.

Do I need prior experience in change management?
No formal experience is required, but familiarity with organisational processes and project management is beneficial.

How long is the eLearning licence valid?
The eLearning licence provides 12 months of access to training materials and exercises.

Does the course include tutor support?
Yes, tutor support is provided for all study options to guide learning and answer questions.

What roles will this course help me in?
Supports Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, HR professionals, team leaders, and business leaders responsible for change.

How will this course benefit my career?
Provides internationally recognised certification and equips you with practical skills to support and implement organisational change effectively.

Can the skills learned be applied in Agile or hybrid projects?
Yes, principles are applicable across various methodologies, including Agile, traditional, and hybrid environments.

Is the study guide included in the course fee?
Digital version included with all options; hardcopy included with classroom and live virtual classroom. Optional for eLearning.

What is the pass mark for the exam?
50% of the total marks (25/50).

Are there pre-course requirements for eLearning?
No mandatory pre-course work for eLearning.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
APMG International Change Management™ Practitioner.pngAPMG International Change Management™ Practitioner.png

The APMG International Change Management Practitioner course is an advanced, globally recognised certification that equips professionals with the skills and knowledge required to lead and implement organisational change effectively. Building on foundational change management principles, this Practitioner course focuses on the practical application of structured methodologies, helping change leaders, managers, and organisational development professionals drive successful transformation initiatives.

This course is designed for individuals responsible for delivering organisational change programmes, including Change Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and other change support staff. Participants will learn how to identify the learning needs of individuals, provide feedback that supports progress, and use coaching techniques to guide leaders at all levels. The course also emphasises conflict resolution, sustaining change, embedding new behaviours, and facilitating collaboration across teams.

Throughout the course, learners will gain hands-on experience in applying change management principles to real-world scenarios. By the end of the programme, participants will be able to establish a clear framework for implementing change, manage stakeholder expectations, address resistance, and ensure the benefits of change are realised long-term. This comprehensive training enables professionals to strengthen organisational capability, foster a culture of continuous improvement, and become highly effective change leaders.

What’s Included
Accredited APMG International Change Management Practitioner training
APMG International Change Management Practitioner exam
Tutor support throughout the course
Optional extras including official study guide and Pass Protect exam insurance.

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, accredited online training with a 12-month licence, allowing learners to study flexibly and access practical exercises and case studies aligned with the Practitioner exam.
Price: £1040.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £86.67 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Two-day immersive training delivered online with interactive workshops, practical exercises, and live tutor guidance.
Price: £2020.00 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Two-day in-person immersive accredited training, combining lectures, group work, and scenario-based exercises.
Price: £2130.00 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identify the learning needs of individuals impacted by change initiatives


Provide constructive feedback to support development and progression through change


Apply coaching techniques to guide leaders and managers at all levels


Recognise and resolve conflict during change processes


Facilitate group collaboration and co-design for successful change implementation


Develop strategies to embed and sustain organisational change over the long term


Apply structured change management methodologies to real-world scenarios


Strengthen stakeholder engagement and collaboration throughout change initiatives

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Practitioner / Advanced
  • Course Duration: 12-month licence for eLearning; 2-day classroom/virtual options
  • Delivery Method: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom
  • Certification: APMG International Change Management Practitioner
  • Awarding Body: APMG International

Who It’s For
Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and associated support staff responsible for implementing or managing organisational change initiatives.

Prerequisites
Passing the APMG Change Management Foundation exam is required before enrolling in the Practitioner course.

Exam Information
  • Objective testing based on a case study scenario
  • Five sections, 16 marks each, total 80 marks
  • Duration: 2.5 hours
  • Open book (official Change Management v3 study guide only)
  • Pass mark: 50% (40/80)

Optional Extras
Official Change Management v3 study guide
Pass Protect exam insurance

Pre-course Requirements
Mandatory online pre-course is required for those selecting the live virtual classroom delivery option.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the Change Management Practitioner course?
It is an advanced, accredited course by APMG International, designed to develop practical skills for managing and embedding organisational change successfully.

Do I need to complete the Foundation course first?
Yes. Completion of the Change Management Foundation certification is a prerequisite for Practitioner.

How will this course help me manage conflict during change initiatives?
You will learn to recognise sources of conflict, apply resolution techniques, and facilitate communication to maintain alignment and progress.

What does the Practitioner exam involve?
The exam uses objective testing based on a case study, with five sections worth 16 marks each, completed over 2.5 hours. You may use the official Change Management v3 study guide.

How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for the exam?
Applications for adjustments must be submitted directly to ILX at the time of exam scheduling, ideally with at least 15 working days’ notice.

Can I study this course online?
Yes, eLearning and live virtual classroom options are available, both supported by ILX and DrTutor.

Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, APMG certifications are recognised globally and demonstrate competence in professional change management practices.

How long is the eLearning licence valid?
The eLearning licence provides 12 months of access to the training materials and exercises.

Does this course include tutor support?
Yes, tutor support is provided for all delivery formats to answer questions and guide learning.

What career roles does this course support?
Change Managers, Programme Managers, Project Managers, Portfolio Managers, Organisational Development Managers, and consultants leading change initiatives.

How will this course benefit my career?
It equips you with recognised, practical skills to lead change, manage resistance, improve stakeholder engagement, and embed sustainable organisational improvements.

Are there pre-course requirements for eLearning?
No mandatory pre-course work is required for the eLearning option.

Can the skills learned be applied in Agile environments?
Yes, the course content is applicable to various change management methodologies, including Agile, traditional, and hybrid approaches.

Does the course provide certification upon completion?
Yes, successful completion of the exam awards the APMG International Change Management Practitioner certification.

What is the pass mark for the Practitioner exam?
The pass mark is 50% of the total marks (40 out of 80).

Is the study guide included in the course fee?
No, the official Change Management v3 study guide is available as an optional extra.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 16 Hrs
APMG International Change Management™ Foundation  Practitioner.pngAPMG International Change Management™ Foundation Practitioner.png

The APMG International Change Management™ Foundation & Practitioner course is a five-day live virtual classroom programme designed to equip professionals with comprehensive knowledge, frameworks, and practical techniques to lead successful organisational change. Delivered exclusively by ILX, this course provides immersive, skills-based training and combines both Foundation and Practitioner levels, ensuring participants can not only understand change management principles but also apply them effectively to real-world organisational scenarios.

This course addresses the growing need for skilled change managers who can guide organisations through complex transitions, overcome resistance, and implement strategic initiatives that drive measurable outcomes. Participants will explore stakeholder engagement, organisational culture, communication strategies, and facilitation techniques while mastering the application of change management frameworks to achieve sustainable improvements. By the end of the course, learners will be capable of planning, implementing, and embedding change initiatives that align with organisational objectives and enhance business performance.

The Foundation level equips participants with the essential knowledge of change management principles, organisational context, human responses to change, and stakeholder management strategies. The Practitioner level builds on this foundation by enabling learners to apply objective testing and case study analysis to manage complex change initiatives. This combination ensures professionals gain both theoretical understanding and practical experience, making them highly effective change leaders within their organisations.


What’s Included

Accredited APMG International Change Management Foundation & Practitioner training delivered in a live virtual classroom.
Official Change Management v3 study guide (optional for eLearning, included with LVC).
Foundation and Practitioner exams included.
Tutor support throughout the course.
Further optional extras, including Pass Protect exam insurance.


Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
This immersive online delivery provides the engagement of a classroom environment with the flexibility of virtual learning.
Price: £3,410.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £284.17 + VAT per month subject to availability

eLearning – Delivered by ILX
Self-paced accredited online training with access for 12 months. This option includes all course materials and ILX support.
Price: £1,760.00 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Instructor-led training in a traditional classroom setting over five days. Includes all course materials, tutor support, and exams.
Price: £3,635.00 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Participants will develop the ability to identify organisational context, culture, and goals to tailor change initiatives effectively.


Participants will gain skills to recognise human responses to change, distinguish between valid concerns and resistance, and implement strategies to manage both.


Participants will learn to develop stakeholder engagement plans, create clear communication strategies, and promote teamwork to ensure successful change adoption.


Participants will master facilitation techniques for co-design, enabling productive collaboration and problem-solving during change initiatives.


Participants will gain expertise in measuring the impact of change, assessing progress, and applying coaching principles to empower change leaders.


Participants will understand how to sustain change by embedding new practices into organisational systems and processes.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Professional, accredited Foundation & Practitioner programme.
  • Duration: 5 Days.
  • Delivery Method: Live virtual classroom.
  • Certification: APMG International Change Management™ Foundation & Practitioner.


Who It’s For

This course is ideal for Change Leaders, Change Managers, Organisational Development Managers, Project Managers, Programme Managers, Portfolio Managers, and other professionals supporting or managing change initiatives.


Prerequisites

There are no formal prerequisites for this course. Completion of the Foundation exam is required before undertaking the Practitioner exam.


Exam Information

Foundation Exam
Format: Multiple-choice assessment
Number of questions: 50
Sections: Four
Duration: 40 minutes
Pass mark: 25 out of 50 (50%)
Closed book: Yes

Practitioner Exam
Format: Objective testing based on a case study scenario
Reference materials: Official Change Management v3 study guide allowed
Sections: Five
Marks per section: 16
Duration: Two and a half hours
Pass mark: 40 out of 80 (50%)



Pre-Course Requirements

Completion of mandatory online pre-course work is required for the live virtual classroom option to ensure participants are prepared for immersive training.


Optional Extras

The official Change Management v3 study guide (for eLearning only) and Pass Protect exam insurance are available.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is APMG International Change Management?
APMG International Change Management provides a globally recognised standard for change management practices, combining theoretical frameworks with practical application to ensure successful organisational change.

How long is the course?
The live virtual classroom delivery lasts five days, with the first three days covering the Foundation level and the final two days covering the Practitioner level.

What study options are available?
Participants can choose eLearning, live virtual classroom, blended learning, or classroom delivery, with eLearning access provided for 12 months.

How will this course help my career?
This course enhances your ability to manage and lead change initiatives, demonstrating globally recognised expertise that increases employability, influence, and career progression opportunities.

Do I need prior knowledge of change management?
No prior experience is required, though familiarity with organisational processes and project management may be beneficial.

What is included in the course fee?
Training, exams, tutor support, and course materials are included. The study guide is included for live virtual classroom courses and optional for eLearning.

How is the course delivered online?
The live virtual classroom provides interactive instructor-led sessions, practical exercises, and case study analyses, delivering the engagement of a physical classroom in an online environment.

Can I complete the Practitioner exam without passing Foundation?
No, you must pass the Foundation exam before attempting the Practitioner exam.

What is the format of the Foundation exam?
The Foundation exam is multiple-choice, 50 questions, 40 minutes, closed book, pass mark 50%.

What is the format of the Practitioner exam?
The Practitioner exam is objective testing based on a case study, five sections of 16 marks each, two and a half hours duration, open book using the official study guide, pass mark 50%.

How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for exams?
You must contact ILX during the exam scheduling process, providing at least 15 working days’ notice for reasonable adjustments.

Are there any pre-course requirements?
Mandatory online pre-course work is required for the live virtual classroom option.

Can I access the official study guide digitally?
Yes, the digital Change Management v3 study guide is available once your exam voucher is redeemed via the APMG portal.

What optional extras are available?
Pass Protect exam insurance and the official study guide for eLearning courses can be added at checkout.

How will this course improve my organisational impact?
Participants gain skills to plan, communicate, and implement change effectively, engage stakeholders, and embed new practices to sustain organisational improvement.

What are the typical career outcomes and salary expectations?
Professionals with APMG International Change Management certification often progress to senior roles such as Change Manager, Organisational Development Manager, or Programme Manager. UK salaries typically range from £50,000 to £80,000 per year depending on experience and seniority.

Is travel required for the course?
No, the live virtual classroom allows full participation online.

What practical skills will I gain?
Participants will develop stakeholder management, facilitation, coaching, communication planning, value assessment, and change sustainability skills.

How are exams scheduled?
Exams are scheduled via APMG once vouchers are redeemed. Participants can select their preferred date and time.

What is the total duration of learning for eLearning?
The eLearning course provides approximately 27 hours of content, accessible over 12 months.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 35Hrs
scrum-drtutor.pngscrum-drtutor.png

The Agile Scrum Foundation course provides a structured and practical introduction to two of the most widely adopted delivery approaches in modern organisations: Agile methodologies and the Scrum framework. Designed for project teams, IT professionals, business analysts, product specialists and anyone working in fast-moving environments, this course explains how Agile and Scrum drive speed, collaboration and adaptive delivery across all industries. 

You will learn the core values and principles of Agile, how iterative planning improves responsiveness, and how Scrum provides a clear, lightweight structure for delivering value through defined roles, ceremonies and artefacts. Using scenario-based explanations, examples and practical walkthroughs of the full Sprint lifecycle, this course shows not only what Agile and Scrum are, but how they work in real project environments to improve productivity, transparency and customer outcomes. 

By the end of the course, you will be fully prepared to sit the Agile Scrum Foundation exam, equipped with the knowledge, terminology and confidence to contribute effectively to Agile teams and support Scrum-based delivery within your organisation.

What’s Included

Agile Scrum Foundation accredited training
Agile Scrum Foundation certification exam
Simulation exam papers for self-assessment
12-month access to the full online course
Self-paced digital learning – approx. 3 hours total study
Comprehensive Agile and Scrum reference materials
Progress tracking and knowledge checks
Mobile and desktop-friendly learning environment
Full support from drtutor learning team

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning / Online Self-Paced – Delivered by drtutor
Self-paced online learning with 12 months’ access, full digital content, interactive modules, practice questions and exam preparation tools.
From £315.00 + VAT
(Was £650.00)

There is no ILX virtual classroom or in-person option for this course. Agile Scrum Foundation is delivered exclusively online.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Explain Agile values, principles and methodologies


Understand Scrum roles: Product Owner, Scrum Master, Development Team


Apply Scrum ceremonies: Sprint Planning, Daily Scrum, Sprint Review, Retrospective


Manage and refine backlogs, user stories and acceptance criteria

Track progress through iterative delivery cycles


Foster collaboration, transparency and continuous improvement


Use Agile and Scrum to drive productivity and accelerate value delivery


Prepare confidently for the Agile Scrum Foundation certification exam


Key facts:

Key Facts

Certification: Agile Scrum Foundation (ASF)
Accreditation: EXIN
Duration: Approximately 3 hours (self-paced)
Access Period: 12 months
Study Method: eLearning only
Exam Format: 40 questions, multiple choice, 60 minutes, 65% pass mark
Prerequisites: Familiarity with IT, IT service management or project environments is recommended but not required

Who It’s For

Project Managers, Scrum Masters, Product Owners, Business Analysts, IT professionals, developers, testers, architects, process coaches and anyone working within Agile or hybrid project environments.

FAQs

Can I take the Agile Scrum Foundation exam online?
Yes. The ASF exam is taken online via a remote proctor after you complete your eLearning.

How long do I have access to the online course?
You will have full access for 12 months, allowing you to study at your own pace.

How long does the course take to complete?
The course is designed to take approximately 3 hours, depending on your familiarity with Agile concepts.

What are the benefits of achieving ASF certification?
ASF certification validates your understanding of Agile and Scrum, enhances your professional credibility, improves your ability to work in dynamic teams and supports career progression in Agile delivery environments.

Is there any pre-course work?
No. This course requires no pre-study.

Does this course include any optional extras?
No optional extras are required or offered — everything needed for your certification readiness is included.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 6 Hrs
Agile Business Consortium Scrum Product Owner.pngAgile Business Consortium Scrum Product Owner.png

The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Product Owner course, accredited by APMG-International, provides a comprehensive and in-depth understanding of the Product Owner role within Agile and Scrum frameworks. Designed for individuals aiming to lead and manage the product development process, this course equips learners with the knowledge, practical skills, and strategic insights required to maximise product value and drive business success. Participants will develop the ability to define a clear product vision, prioritise tasks effectively, manage and refine the product backlog, and ensure alignment between stakeholder expectations and the development team’s deliverables. Through scenario-based learning and interactive exercises, learners will explore how to facilitate effective sprint planning and review sessions, maintain transparency, and foster collaboration within Agile teams. By completing this course, professionals demonstrate competence in one of the most in-demand Agile roles, enhancing career progression opportunities, boosting organisational productivity, and contributing to high-performing project delivery. This course is suitable for IT professionals, project managers, business analysts, and anyone aspiring to play a pivotal role in Agile product development and value delivery.

What’s Included

Accredited Scrum Product Owner training
Scrum Product Owner exam
Tutor support throughout the course
Official digital course materials
Optional extras such as Pass Protect exam insurance

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approximately 10 hours of online content, with exam included. Price: £703 + VAT or £58.58 + VAT per month

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions, two days, with exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation. Duration: as scheduled, exam included. Price: £2,055 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, two days, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: as scheduled, exam included. Price: £2,165 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand core Scrum concepts, roles, events, and artifacts


Develop and communicate the product goal effectively


Create, prioritise, and manage product backlog items


Ensure product backlog transparency and visibility


Maximise value delivery in Agile projects


Facilitate sprint planning, review, and retrospective sessions


Collaborate effectively with stakeholders and development teams


Apply practical techniques to resolve product development challenges

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner
  • Certification: Scrum Product Owner
  • Duration: 10 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 50 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for individuals wishing to develop expertise as a Scrum Product Owner. It is suitable for IT professionals, project managers, business analysts, and team members seeking to maximise value delivery and ensure alignment between business objectives and development activities.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 50 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 50
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Delivery Method: Closed book, exam included

Pre-Course Requirements

No prior certifications, qualifications, or pre-course work are required.

FAQ

1. What is a Scrum Product Owner?
A Scrum Product Owner is responsible for maximising the value of products by prioritising work and acting as a bridge between stakeholders and development teams.

2. What study options are available?
The course is available as eLearning, Classroom, and Live Virtual Classroom.

3. What is a product backlog in Scrum?
A product backlog is an organised list of features, improvements, and tasks required to deliver a product vision. Items are prioritised to maximise value.

4. Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes, the exam is included, with optional Pass Protect insurance available.

5. How long does the eLearning course take?
Approximately 10 hours, which can be completed at your own pace over 12 months.

6. Are there prerequisites for this course?
No formal prerequisites are required.

7. How does this course benefit my career?
It demonstrates professional competence in the Scrum Product Owner role, enhances career prospects, and is highly valued in Agile environments.

8. Can I apply the knowledge immediately in my workplace?
Yes, the course provides practical skills to manage backlogs, plan sprints, and facilitate stakeholder collaboration.

9. What certification will I receive?
Scrum Product Owner certification accredited by APMG-International.

10. How is the live virtual classroom delivered?
Through interactive instructor-led online sessions with exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance.

11. Is the course suitable for beginners?
Yes, the course is designed to be accessible for those new to Scrum and Agile methodologies.

12. What learning materials are provided?
Official digital course materials and tutor support are included.

13. Are workshops included in the classroom option?
Yes, scenario-based exercises and workshops are part of the in-person training.

14. How are product backlog items prioritised?
The Product Owner ranks items by value, business need, and stakeholder priorities.

15. Will this course prepare me for Agile project challenges?
Yes, it equips learners with techniques to address real-world challenges in Agile project delivery.

16. Can I retake the exam if needed?
Yes, with optional Pass Protect exam insurance, a resit can be arranged at reduced cost.

17. How do I manage stakeholder expectations in Scrum?
The course provides strategies to communicate product goals, priorities, and progress effectively.

18. Will I understand sprint planning and reviews?
Yes, the course covers facilitation of sprint planning, review, and retrospective sessions.

19. Is tutor support available throughout the course?
Yes, learners have full access to tutor guidance for the duration of their study.

20. Does this course help with team collaboration?
Absolutely, it emphasises communication, collaboration, and alignment between stakeholders and development teams.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 10 Hrs
Agile Business Consortium Scrum Essentials.pngAgile Business Consortium Scrum Essentials.png

The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Essentials course provides a comprehensive introduction to Agile principles and Scrum practices, designed for professionals seeking to develop practical skills to work effectively within a Scrum team. This accredited programme equips learners with the knowledge to understand Scrum roles, events, artifacts, and core principles, allowing them to contribute confidently to Agile projects. Participants will explore real-world scenarios, gaining the ability to apply Scrum pillars and empirical product planning techniques while collaborating effectively with stakeholders. Upon completion, learners will have a solid foundation in Scrum, enabling them to manage sprints, refine backlogs, and support continuous improvement initiatives. The course is suitable for individuals entering Scrum roles, those supporting Agile projects, or anyone aiming to enhance their organisation’s Agile capability. Certification validates practical knowledge and demonstrates the ability to apply Scrum methodology in professional environments, enhancing career prospects and providing a strong starting point for further Agile and Scrum qualifications.

What’s Included

  • Accredited Scrum Essentials training
  • Scrum Essentials exam
  • Scrum Essentials official manual
  • Tutor support
  • Optional Pass Protect exam insurance
  • Optional extras available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approx 10 hours, with exam included. Price: £698 + VAT or £58.17 + VAT/Month

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions with exercises, 1 day, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: as published by ILX

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, 1 day, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: as published by ILX.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Recall and apply key Scrum concepts, roles, events, artifacts, and guidelines


Understand self-management and cross-functional teams


Define and create high-value increments


Apply Scrum pillars through Scrum events


Write clear and concise Product Backlog items


Use empirical product planning techniques


Collaborate effectively with stakeholders


Manage and contribute to Scrum-based projects


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Certification: Scrum Essentials
  • Duration: 1 day (Classroom), approx 10 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 50 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 50
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom (1 day)

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for professionals seeking to build their competence within Scrum teams, individuals preparing to take on Scrum roles, project team members, business analysts, and anyone looking to understand Agile principles in practical, real-world settings. It is suitable for participants across industries who want to contribute effectively to Agile projects and enhance team collaboration.

Exam Information

Multiple choice, closed book, 50 questions, 50 minutes duration, 60% pass mark. Exam is included in the course price.

Pre-Course Requirements

There are no mandatory pre-course requirements. No prior Agile or Scrum experience is needed to attend this course.

FAQ

What is Scrum Essentials?
Scrum Essentials is a foundational course that teaches Agile principles and Scrum practices, providing knowledge of Scrum roles, events, artifacts, and guidelines.

Who should attend Scrum Essentials?
Anyone looking to contribute to a Scrum team, understand Agile practices, or manage Scrum-based projects can benefit from this course.

How long does the eLearning take?
The self-paced eLearning course takes approximately 10 hours to complete, with a 12-month licence period.

Is the exam included?
Yes, the Scrum Essentials exam is included in the course price for all learning methods.

What is Pass Protect?
Pass Protect is optional exam insurance that allows you to retake your exam at a reduced cost if your first attempt is unsuccessful.

Can I take the course online?
Yes, the course is available as eLearning or Live Virtual Classroom, providing flexibility to suit different learning preferences.

What are the delivery methods for Scrum Essentials?
The course is available as eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and in-person Classroom.

Are there prerequisites?
No formal prerequisites are required for this course.

What will I learn about the Scrum team?
You will learn the roles, responsibilities, and interactions of a Scrum team and how to work effectively within it.

What is a Product Backlog?
A Product Backlog is an organised list of tasks, features, and improvements required to achieve the product goal. The Scrum Product Owner prioritises these items based on value and business needs.

How is this course accredited?
This course is accredited by the Agile Business Consortium and APMG International, ensuring it meets industry-recognised standards.

Will I receive a certificate?
Yes, successful participants receive the Scrum Essentials certificate upon passing the exam.

Can I apply what I learn immediately?
Yes, the course focuses on practical application, enabling you to contribute to Scrum-based projects immediately.

Does this course prepare me for advanced Agile certifications?
Yes, it provides a solid foundation for further certifications such as Scrum Product Owner or Agile Scrum Master.

How are the exam questions structured?
The exam consists of 50 multiple-choice questions, closed book, with a 60% pass mark.

Are workshops included in Classroom training?
Yes, in-person sessions include interactive workshops and scenario-based exercises.

Can I collaborate with other participants in Live Virtual Classroom?
Yes, sessions include exercises, discussions, and interactive activities to promote collaboration.

What optional extras are available?
Pass Protect exam insurance and additional official manuals are available at checkout.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 10 Hrs
Agile Scrum Master (ASM).pngAgile Scrum Master (ASM).png

The Agile Scrum Master (ASM) course is an EXIN-accredited programme designed to provide comprehensive, practical training for professionals seeking to lead Scrum teams effectively. This course empowers participants with the knowledge and skills to manage Agile projects, coordinate cross-functional teams, and deliver high-value products in functional stages. Through this training, learners will gain a deep understanding of Agile principles, Scrum terminology, roles and responsibilities, and the practical application of Scrum artifacts and processes. Participants will also learn to facilitate daily stand-ups, sprint reviews, and implement distributed Scrum in multi-location teams. Successfully completing this course equips professionals to optimise project delivery, enhance collaboration, and confidently adopt Agile methodologies within their organisations, positioning them for career advancement in project management, product management, and leadership roles.

What’s Included

  • Agile Scrum Master (ASM) training
  • Agile Scrum Master (ASM) exam
  • Two live Scrum projects to apply learned skills
  • Four simulation test papers to test knowledge
  • Tutor support

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12-month licence, approx 9 hours to complete, with exam included. Price: £652 + VAT or £54.33 + VAT per month

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand Agile and Scrum terminology


Run daily scrums and create effective user stories


Conduct sprint reviews and retrospectives


Understand the roles of Agile and Scrum team members


Produce key Scrum artifacts


Implement distributed Scrum for multi-location teams


Set up and manage projects on a JIRA cloud site


Maximise value from projects delivered with Scrum

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner entry-level
  • Certification: Agile Scrum Master (ASM)
  • Duration: Approx 9-10 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 90 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning

Who It’s For

Project Managers, Product Managers, Scrum Masters, Scrum Product Owners, and other team leaders or managers seeking formal recognition of their Scrum skills and the ability to lead Agile teams effectively.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 90 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Delivery Method: Online (remote proctored) or in-class as per delivery mode

Pre-Course Requirements

There are no mandatory prerequisites. The course is suitable for professionals new to Scrum as well as those with some Agile experience looking to formalise their knowledge.

FAQ

Who is the Agile Scrum Master course designed for?
Project managers, team leaders, Scrum Masters, Product Owners, and professionals involved in Agile projects.

What is the pass mark for the ASM certification?
65%

Is the Agile Scrum Master certification hard?
The course prepares you with both theory and practical exercises to ensure success.

What study options are available for the ASM course?
eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and Classroom

How long is the eLearning course?
Approximately 9 hours

Does the course include practical exercises?
Yes, two live Scrum projects are included to apply learned skills.

Are exams included in the course price?
Yes, the exam is included.

How many simulation tests are provided?
Four simulation test papers are included to test knowledge.

Is there tutor support during the course?
Yes, tutor support is included.

Can this certification help career growth?
Yes, it demonstrates capability in leading Agile teams and project delivery.

What Scrum tools will I learn?
JIRA cloud site for project setup and management.

Can I implement Scrum in distributed teams after this course?
Yes, the course covers distributed Scrum practices.

Do I need prior Agile experience?
No prior experience is required.

Is this certification recognised internationally?
Yes, EXIN accreditation ensures global recognition.

How is the certification exam delivered?
Multiple choice, online remote proctored or in-class depending on delivery.

Can I combine this with Product Owner training?
Yes, it complements Scrum Product Owner certification for complete Agile knowledge.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 10 Hrs
Agile Business Consortium Scrum Master.pngAgile Business Consortium Scrum Master.png

The Agile Business Consortium Scrum Master course equips participants with comprehensive knowledge and practical skills to lead Agile teams effectively within the Scrum framework. Designed for individuals who wish to excel in project delivery and team facilitation, this course highlights the strategic value of Scrum Masters in modern organisations. Participants will learn to guide teams through iterative development cycles, align project outcomes with organisational goals, and foster a collaborative environment that maximises productivity and business value. Beyond theoretical understanding, learners develop actionable leadership skills to coach, mentor, and remove impediments, ensuring consistent delivery of high-quality products. By achieving Scrum Master certification, participants demonstrate their ability to apply Agile principles and Scrum methodologies across diverse industries, driving measurable improvements in project execution, operational efficiency, and stakeholder satisfaction. This certification also positions professionals to take on leadership roles, influence organisational change, and contribute to the adoption of Agile practices at scale.

What’s Included

  • Accredited Scrum Master training
  • Scrum Master exam
  • Tutor support
  • Further optional extras, including Pass Protect exam insurance

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX with DrTutor support
Self-paced, 12 hours, 12-month licence, with exam included. Price: £703 + VAT or £58.58 + VAT/Month

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Interactive online instructor-led sessions with exercises, two days, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2055 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, two days, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2165 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the core concepts, roles, events, and artifacts used in Scrum


Help Scrum Product Owners shape and refine product backlogs


Enable Scrum development teams to self-organise and create high-value products


Guide organisations in adopting and embedding Scrum practices


Build accessible knowledge bases to improve team performance and quality of work

Key facts:
Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation / Practitioner
  • Certification: Scrum Master
  • Duration: 12 hours eLearning / Live Virtual Classroom duration as per ILX
  • Exam Duration: 50 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, Classroom

Who It’s For

This qualification is designed for individuals preparing for a Scrum Master role or currently in one, as well as managers and team leaders responsible for teams adopting Scrum methodologies. It is suitable for professionals across industries who aim to lead Agile teams, improve project outcomes, and implement Scrum frameworks effectively.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 50 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Delivery Method: Online via remote proctor

Pre-Course Requirements

There are no mandatory prerequisites for this course. Familiarity with Agile or Scrum concepts may be beneficial but is not required.

FAQ

What does a Scrum Master do?
The Scrum Master supports the Agile team, facilitates Scrum processes, resolves conflicts, removes barriers, and drives organisational change to deliver value successfully.

How do you become a Scrum Master?
Complete the accredited training course and pass the Scrum Master exam. ILX uses group discussions and practical exercises to embed Scrum knowledge effectively.

Do I need prior Agile or Scrum experience?
No prior experience is required, though familiarity with Agile or Scrum may help in understanding the course materials.

Will I get a certificate after completing the Scrum Master course?
Yes, successfully passing the exam grants an industry-recognised certification from APMG-International and the Agile Business Consortium.

What study options are available?
Three study options are offered: eLearning, Live Virtual Classroom, and Classroom, allowing learners to choose the method that suits their needs.

How do I apply for reasonable adjustments for the official exam?
Adjustments are coordinated with ILX during exam scheduling.

Levelالمستوى: Proficiencyالإتقان
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 12 Hrs
Marketing  Sales.jpgMarketing Sales.jpg

In today’s competitive business environment, success depends not only on creating awareness through marketing but also on converting interest into actual sales. The Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales equips learners with a comprehensive, end-to-end understanding of both marketing and sales processes.

This course blends modern marketing strategies with proven sales techniques, ensuring that you can attract, engage, and convert customers effectively. You will gain insights into brand building, digital marketing, social media strategy, lead generation, sales funnel management, negotiation, and closing deals. The programme is ideal for business owners, marketing managers, sales professionals, freelancers, and anyone seeking a holistic understanding of the full customer journey from first contact to conversion.

By completing this course, you will be able to design and execute strategies that generate measurable business results, optimise resources, and create sustainable growth. It equips you with practical tools, actionable frameworks, and international best practices that can be immediately applied in real-world business scenarios.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Design and implement a unified marketing & sales strategy aligned with business objectives.

  • Conduct market research and customer analysis to identify target segments and positioning.

  • Build brand awareness and craft compelling messaging that resonates with customers.

  • Create, manage and optimise digital and offline marketing campaigns across multiple channels.

  • Generate and qualify leads effectively, turning interest into sales opportunities.

  • Use proven sales techniques — lead nurturing, presentation, negotiation, closing — to convert prospects.

  • Manage the full sales cycle: prospecting → outreach → negotiation → closing → follow-up.

  • Develop and execute email marketing and CRM‑based follow‑up workflows to nurture customer relationships.

  • Analyse marketing and sales data to measure performance, monitor conversion rates, and refine strategies.

  • Optimise pricing, offers, funnels and customer journey to maximise revenue and profit.

  • Align the marketing funnel and sales pipeline to ensure smooth handoff and high conversion.

  • Plan and manage sales teams or personal sales efforts, setting targets, tracking performance and scaling operations.

  • Balance long‑term brand building with short‑term sales performance for sustainable growth.

Key facts:

Course Facts & Details

Detail Information
Format 100% Online, Self-paced or scheduled live sessions
Duration 12–24 hours (depending on pace & provider)
Estimated Completion 3–6 Weeks (flexible)
Assessment Exam, Assignments, case studies, and final project
Entry Requirements None — suitable for beginners and professionals
Certification Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales (globally recognised)
Application Career advancement, business growth, freelance services, internal marketing teams

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

1. Do I need prior experience in marketing or sales?
No — this course is designed for both beginners and experienced professionals, so you can start with confidence.

2. Can I study while working full-time?
Yes — the programme is 100% online, self-paced, with optional live sessions, making it ideal for busy professionals.

3. Will this diploma guarantee a job or promotion?
No guarantees — but the skills and internationally recognised certification significantly enhance employability and career growth.

4. Is the diploma recognised internationally?
Yes — the Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales is recognised across industries globally, adding credibility to your profile.

5. Can business owners benefit without hiring agencies?
Absolutely — you will gain the skills to plan, execute, and monitor both marketing and sales campaigns independently, saving costs and increasing control.

6. How long does it take to complete the course?
The typical completion time is 3–6 months, depending on your pace and time commitment.

7. What format is the course delivered in?
The course is fully online, combining self-paced modules, interactive assignments, and optional live sessions for deeper learning.

8. Are there assessments or exams?
Yes — you will complete practical assignments, case studies, and a final project or exam to demonstrate your skills.

9. Can I get a certificate after completion?
Yes — you will earn a Professional Diploma in Marketing & Sales, recognised internationally and valuable for career advancement.

10. Will this course improve my business revenue?
Yes — by integrating marketing strategies with sales techniques, you will be able to attract high-quality leads and convert them into paying customers.

11. Is this suitable for freelancers?
Absolutely — freelancers can apply these skills to provide marketing and sales services to clients or grow their own businesses.

12. Can I apply the skills immediately?
Yes — every module is designed with practical, real-world applications so you can implement strategies from day one.

13. Does the course cover digital marketing tools?
Yes — you will learn key tools for analytics, social media management, CRM, email campaigns, and marketing automation.

14. Is this course suitable for SMEs and startups?
Yes — small and medium-sized businesses benefit by learning how to run marketing and sales effectively without depending on external agencies.

15. Are there opportunities to network with other learners?
Yes — the course provides forums, optional live sessions, and community interactions to share experiences and network with peers and instructors.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: --
Timeالوقت: 24 Hrs
Effective Leadership.jpgEffective Leadership.jpg

 

 Effective communication is an essential skill for leaders to develop. This course will teach you the strategies and techniques needed to communicate effectively as a leader. You will learn how to convey information clearly and listen actively, adapt your communication style to fit different situations and audiences, and show empathy and understanding. Additionally, you will learn how to provide constructive feedback and encourage open communication and feedback from others.

Verbal Communication :participants will learn the importance of clear and concise verbal communication. They will explore techniques for speaking with confidence, articulating thoughts effectively, and engaging with their audience. Additionally, participants will gain insight into how to avoid common communication pitfalls such as speaking too quickly, using jargon or technical terms, and failing to listen actively.

Non-verbal communication is also critical for effective communication as a leader. In this course, you will learn how to be aware of your own non-verbal cues and read the non-verbal cues of others. You will learn how to maintain eye contact, use positive body language, vary the tone of your voice, show empathy, and be aware of cultural differences in non-verbal communication.

Active listening is another crucial component of effective communication and leadership. This course will teach you how to actively listen to your team members, focus your attention on the speaker, use positive body language, paraphrase, ask open-ended questions, avoid interrupting, and summarize the conversation.

By taking this course, you will develop the skills needed to communicate effectively as a leader, build stronger relationships with your team members, and create a positive and productive work environment. You will also learn how to avoid misunderstandings and conflict and improve the overall effectiveness of your team.  

 

  

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The importance of clear and concise verbal communication for effective leadership

Techniques for speaking confidently, articulating thoughts effectively, and engaging with your audience

How to avoid common communication pitfalls, such as speaking too quickly, using jargon, and failing to listen actively

The role of non-verbal communication in effective leadership, including maintaining eye contact, using positive body language, varying tone of voice, and being aware of cultural differences

The importance of active listening and how to use positive body language, paraphrasing, asking open-ended questions, avoiding interrupting, and summarizing conversations to improve communication

How to adapt your communication style to fit different situations and audiences

How to provide constructive feedback and encourage open communication and feedback from others

How to build stronger relationships with your team members and create a positive and productive work environment

How to avoid misunderstandings and conflicts and improve the overall effectiveness of your team.

Course Introduction Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mn4CzDSDAhQ
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English-Arabicعربي-إنجليزي
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 3 Hrs
Project Management Communication.jpgProject Management Communication.jpg
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

In the fast-paced world of project management, effective communication is key to keeping your projects on track and your team aligned. This course, "Project Management Communication," led by the best and most experienced instructor, delves into the essential communication strategies that every project manager needs to master. From handling emails, phone calls, and documentation to running efficient meetings and crafting concise reports, this course covers it all.

You'll learn how to develop a robust communication plan that fosters two-way communication, engages stakeholders, and maximizes team buy-in. Whether you're dealing with formal or informal communication, managing executive stakeholders, or answering tough questions, this course provides practical insights and techniques to enhance your project communication skills.

By the end of this course, you will be able to define "noise" in a message, choose the best communication methods for complex topics, understand the purpose of a stakeholder register, and navigate the power-interest grid. You'll also learn to overcome common communication impediments in cross-functional teams and apply the SHARKS approach for effective meeting organization.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identify the best method of communication for an emotionally charged and complex topic.

Recall the purpose of a stakeholder register.

Name the four quadrants in a power and interest grid.

Recognize the most common impediment to communication in cross-functional teams.

Develop and implement a communication plan.

Differentiate between one-way and two-way communication.

Practice active listening techniques.

Manage communication with executive stakeholders.

Understand the purpose and management of project meetings.

Decide what information to include in project reports.

Use clear language and simple charts to convey information effectively.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 6 Hrs
business plans.jpgbusiness plans.jpg

In this course we will be covering an overview of business plans for new and existing companies.

Introduction 

There are many different types of company, different sizes, those that are new and those that are existing.

When a business idea is first thought of, the initiator does not often think about the process of making that idea become a reality.

They often think in terms of success and profit but for new business ideas, it is essential that there is a business plan in place to assist with start-up.

A sound business plan can assist with many aspects of new business introduction, providing a written strategy to take the business idea forward.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Business plans


Vision, mission and values

Course Introduction Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yx9cqYDw5Zk
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
cryptocurrency-300x300.jpgcryptocurrency-300x300.jpg

In this course you will learn about the types of risks that are related to businesses and also how to measure the success of a business. As well as this you will also look into overcoming failure.

 Introduction 

An entrepreneur cannot avoid risk in a start-up and everyone knows that a large proportion of new businesses eventually fail. The trick is to understand the risk to your business and decide whether that risk is a risk worth taking.

If taking the risk pays off – great!

If not, how do you deal with it and carry on?

You should realise that if you start your own business, a certain amount of risk is involved.  If this is something you are not prepared for or can’t deal with, your business venture may not succeed.  You could be risking your own money or your reputation. Whatever the risk, you need to be prepared to deal with it if you are an entrepreneur.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Risk

Measuring business success

Business success

Overcoming failure

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
leading-ga8c85012e_640.jpgleading-ga8c85012e_640.jpg

 In this course you will look into decision making and delegation and how these skills can be improved on to help you become a great leader. You will learn about different types of decisions that could be made and the pro's and con's of delegation.

Developing leadership skills

We will look at how to develop those skills in this session by focusing on decision making and delegation.

Imagine starting your own business, you have everything in place, finance, premises and product.  You have advertised your business and are all set to start trading. You have sourced the best suppliers for your product. You have recruited and hired the best staff to work on your business venture, but do you have the skills to the lead the staff?

As an entrepreneur, you will want the best for your business, but it is important to monitor all aspects of the business, including staff. It can be difficult for entrepreneurs, who are sometimes so engrossed in their brilliant idea that they believe people will automatically follow them. To turn your vision into a successful company, entrepreneurs must be leaders of people.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Developing leadership skills

Decision making

Delegation.

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
businessman-2753324_640-300x284.jpgbusinessman-2753324_640-300x284.jpg

In this course  you will learn how to identify the needs of your customers, as well as how to meet these needs. As well as this you will also be able to target your customers in regard to your business and services.

Introduction

At the heart of every product or service there is a customer need. Most products are born of someone needing a solution to an issue. It is essential for organisations, whatever their size, to identify what it is that their customer needs and try to deliver a product or service to meet that need.

Business ideas can be thought of instantly or developed over a long period of time. No matter how long a business idea takes to develop, it is essential that it delivers what the customer needs.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identifying customer needs

Meeting customer needs

Targeting customers

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Project Management Requirements.jpgProject Management Requirements.jpg
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

Effective project management hinges on clear and well-managed project requirements. This course equips project managers with essential strategies and methodologies to successfully navigate the complexities of project requirements. Led by our expert instructors, you will explore a systematic 10-step process designed to effectively manage project requirements, ensuring alignment with business needs and project goals.

Our instructors cover a comprehensive range of topics including identifying applicable standards, preparing elicitation plans, stakeholder identification, gathering and analyzing requirements, prioritization techniques, use case creation, documentation, and managing change requests. Learn how to secure approval for project requirements and maintain alignment amidst evolving project scopes.

Enhance your proficiency in managing project requirements with practical skills and insights that enable you to deliver successful projects aligned with organizational objectives. Gain the expertise needed to manage complexities, foster stakeholder collaboration, and achieve project success through effective requirements management.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Appropriately manage project requirements throughout the project lifecycle.

Differentiate between strategies for eliciting requirements and maintaining stakeholder engagement.

Define key terms and concepts essential for stakeholder analysis.

Identify the 10 attributes that define project requirements.

Apply effective methods for prioritizing project requirements

Implement strategies to document and communicate project requirements effectively.

Navigate challenges in managing change requirements while maintaining project scope and objectives.

Utilize best practices for obtaining stakeholder approval.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 2 Hrs
Project Management Risk.pngProject Management Risk.png
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

Navigating the complexities of project management requires mastering the art of risk management. Without proper management, risks can jeopardize project goals and undermine its overall success. In this comprehensive course, PMP author Bob McGannon guides you through the essential principles of anticipating, assessing, and effectively managing project risks, regardless of project size or scope. Bob explores the latest insights from the PMBOK seventh edition, emphasizing the pivotal role of risk management in project success. Learn how to gauge stakeholders' risk tolerance, develop a robust risk management plan, create a detailed risk register, and maintain project continuity amidst unforeseen challenges.

Throughout the course, you'll delve into strategies for integrating risk management into project planning, handling ambiguity, and fostering stakeholder engagement. Bob also covers strategic approaches to managing uncertainties, identifying potential triggers, and implementing tailored responses to optimize project outcomes.

Expand your skills in anticipating and mitigating project risks, equipping yourself with the tools and insights needed to lead successful projects in dynamic environments. By the end of this course, you will be prepared to proactively manage risks, safeguard project objectives, and enhance project resilience against unforeseen challenges.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identify and prioritize project risks through effective risk assessment techniques.

Develop strategies for mitigating and managing both threats and opportunities.

Implement methods for aligning project risk appetites with organizational tolerances.

Navigate uncertainties in project requirements and technological deployments.

Articulate effective communication strategies for conveying risk implications to stakeholders.

Utilize risk analysis tools to evaluate the impact and likelihood of identified risks.

Foster a culture of risk-awareness and proactive risk management within project teams.

Integrate lessons learned from risk management into future project planning and execution.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 10 Hrs
web-300x300.jpgweb-300x300.jpg

This course is an introduction to business monitoring when starting up a new business.

Introduction

As an entrepreneur starting up a new business, you need to keep track of your finances and where necessary take corrective action.

By failing to introduce proper financial controls system, it can cause many small businesses to fail.  By failing to monitor figures, they lose control of the business.  

With so many figures to keep on top of, which are the most important?

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Business monitoring

Maintaining the momentum

Why an entrepreneur must have passion, drive and focus

Course Introduction Video: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Sources of Information.jpgSources of Information.jpg
In this course you will learn how to find information using the best techniques and reliable sources of information. As well as this you will look into local and national factors that can help any business.

Introduction

  • For a business to remain viable in our ever changing, fast paced world, it is essential that reliable information is used at all stages in the business process.
  • Today, we are surrounded and bombarded with information from many sources and we have to make sense of this information if we want to use it to our advantage.
  • We rely on many sources but need to ensure that these sources will assist us in the task that we are carrying out.
  • We must learn to use sources that will assist us in the current business environment and allow the business to move forward.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Sources of Information

Reliability of Information

Local factors

National factors


Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yx9cqYDw5Zk


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Business.jpgBusiness.jpg
In this session we will be covering and overviewing of business organisation structure and the function of differing departments and employees.


Introduction

Organisations are structured in a variety of ways, dependant on their objectives and culture. The structure of an organisation will determine the manner in which it operates and its performance. 

Structure allows the responsibilities for different functions and processes to be clearly allocated to different departments and employees. The wrong organisational structure will hinder the success of the business. 

Organisational structures should aim to maximize the efficiency and success of the organisation. An effective organisational structure will facilitate working relationships between various sections of the organisation. It will retain order and command whilst promoting flexibility and creativity.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Types of business structure

Business and its functions

Legal considerations


Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=yx9cqYDw5Zk
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Project Management Schedules.jpgProject Management Schedules.jpg
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

Master the art of creating project schedules that ensure timely and budget-friendly project completion, all while maintaining the flexibility to adapt to unexpected changes. This course, "Project Schedule Management," led by a seasoned expert, provides you with essential techniques for managing project timelines proactively. 

Throughout this course, you will learn to formulate a detailed schedule management plan that aligns with your project goals and objectives. You will discover how to identify key activities and milestones that are critical to the success of your project. Additionally, you will gain expertise in accurately estimating project costs, ensuring that your budget remains on track.

Resource allocation and negotiation are crucial skills covered in this course. You will learn to efficiently allocate resources, balance assignment variables, and replace generic resources with specific personnel. The course also addresses the complexities of working with part-time and remote teams, ensuring that you can manage resources effectively in various working environments.

The course emphasizes continuous schedule management and refinement. You will explore techniques for uncovering and resolving schedule conflicts, managing the critical path, and adjusting the level of work over time. You will also learn to include schedule contingency time, baseline the schedule, and optimize it to meet stakeholder expectations.

Furthermore, the course introduces strategies for shortening project timeframes, reducing costs, and improving overall schedule efficiency. By the end of the course, you will have acquired the skills needed to manage project schedules proactively, adapt to changes as they arise, and ensure successful project outcomes.

Note: This course aligns with best practices from A Guide to the Project Management Body of Knowledge (PMBOK® Guide) - Sixth Edition, published by the Project Management Institute®.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Determine the appropriate types of project schedules for various scenarios.

Apply effective methods for estimating project activities.

Use dependencies to sequence project activities logically.

Understand the variables involved in resource assignments.

Implement strategies to handle negative slack in project schedules.

Adjust schedules to minimize project costs while maintaining efficiency.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
training .jpgtraining .jpg

In this course you will learn about finance, staffing and training ( learning and development ) within a business and company. This course will cover a range of topics that will help you when starting a business, from start-up costs and how to hire the right staff.

Introducation

Before starting any new business, the entrepreneur must have a firm grasp of start-up finance and where it will come from. There will be many factors to consider before they embark on their plan. They need to work out how much money they will need to take their project forward and the source of that money.

If you were to start up a digital learning business, how much money do you think you would need for the

first 3-6 months ? or first 6-12 months ?!

I would suggest you look around on the internet to see how much these things cost and how much you think you might need for 3 months of supplies.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Financial considerations when starting a business

Sources of start up finance

How to hire the right people

Staff training and plans.

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6y-FqmKkNJE

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Good Communication.jpgGood Communication.jpg

Good communication is important for all relationships. We will outlines best ways to improve your communication skills. It involves the distribution of messages clearly and concisely, in a way that connects with the audience. Good communication is about understanding instructions, acquiring new skills, making requests, asking questions and relaying information with ease.  

Introduction

You will find a large part of entrepreneurial success relies on the ability to communicate at different levels.  You might have excellent business experience and a wonderful idea but if you don’t communicate effectively then you could be harming your business.

The entrepreneur needs to understand how to communicate and use the most effective communication methods for their audience.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Personal communication

Importance of good communication

Types of communication

Effective communication

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
industry-460x325.jpgindustry-460x325.jpg

In this course you will learn about different business types, from micro businesses to start-ups and existing businesses. You will also look into the advantages and disadvantages of each of these types of business.

Introduction

Due to the economic climate over the past few years, it has changed the shape and nature of how businesses are set up and sustained.

With the move away from traditional high street businesses to more internet based businesses, organisations that used to employ hundreds of people can now be staffed with less people but still provide the same level of service.

There are still large business organisations, and these also have a valid place in the business world. You are going to look at different sizes of business and how they operate.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Micro Businesses

SME’s – Small to Medium Enterprises

Large Businesses

Start-ups and Existing Businesses

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7ABgJxVP34Q

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
mission-gb12c85bd5_640.jpgmission-gb12c85bd5_640.jpg
In this course you will discover what an entrepreneur is and the skills that are benefically to becoming one. As well as this you will learn about different goals and different ways to set those goals using specific tools.

Introduction

You will find out what is an Entrepreneur, “Someone who starts their own business, especially when this involves seeing a new opportunity”

Firstly, what do you think the answers are to these questions? Are they true or false? You have to be rich to be an entrepreneur? You have to invent something to be an entrepreneur? You must appear on Dragon’s Den to be an entrepreneur? Answers: ???.

You don’t have to be rich, invent something or appear on programmes such as Dragon’s Den to become an entrepreneur. Anyone can be an entrepreneur if they want to be!

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

What an entrepreneur is


Entrepreneurial skills


Goals


Entrepreneurial skills


Practical and technical skills


GROW model


SMART targets

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Project Management Teams.pngProject Management Teams.png
This course uses cutting-edge technology for delivery in the classroom and online via Microsoft Teams and LMS integration. Real-world scenarios and assessments focus on developing participants' knowledge and skills.

  Understanding the dynamics of project teams is essential for achieving success in any project environment. This course provides invaluable insights into various tools and techniques that project managers can utilize to enhance team cohesion and productivity. Led by our expert instructors, you will explore leading methodologies for understanding team members' personality traits and fostering team development.

Our instructors cover a range of assessments including the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator, DiSC personality profile, StrengthsFinder, and emotional intelligence assessments. Additionally, you'll delve into models such as the Tuckman Team-Development Model, situational project leadership, and strategies for managing project change and transitions. Learn how to apply these tools to effectively manage team dynamics, promote collaboration, and create an environment conducive to team success.

Enhance your ability to manage and lead project teams effectively by leveraging these tools and methodologies to cultivate a cohesive and high-performing team environment. Gain practical skills that will enable you to navigate team dynamics with confidence and achieve project success.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Evaluate and apply insights from the Myers-Briggs Type Indicator to enhance team communication and collaboration.

Utilize the Tates work styles assessment to identify and leverage diverse working styles within project teams.

Enhance your understanding of emotional intelligence and its impact on team dynamics and performance.

Implement the situational leadership model to effectively address varying employee needs and situations.

Apply the Lencioni model to diagnose and address dysfunctions within project teams.

Employ strategies for managing projects in matrix organizations to optimize team performance and efficiency.

Foster a collaborative team environment that maximizes individual strengths and minimizes team dysfunctions.

Utilize assessment tools to tailor leadership approaches and communication strategies.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 2 Hrs
tecj-300x300.pngtecj-300x300.png

An overview of promoting your new business through networking.

Introduction 

In order to be a great entrepreneur, you need to be able to introduce your business idea effectively so that people become interested in it. This often involves presenting your concept in a way that captures attention and sparks curiosity, even in situations where you might feel uncomfortable or out of your element.

In this course, you will learn essential techniques to confidently present your business idea to potential investors, customers, and partners. We will explore strategies to craft a compelling pitch, engage your audience, and convey the value of your product or service with clarity and enthusiasm.

Additionally, promoting your own skills and strengths is a crucial aspect of entrepreneurial success. Despite being a nation that often struggles with self-promotion, this course will teach you how to overcome this challenge. You will discover how to highlight your unique capabilities and achievements without feeling boastful, effectively "blowing your own trumpet" in a way that resonates with others and builds your personal brand.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Introducing yourself to clients, customers and others


Networking

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
leadership-g311771357_640.jpgleadership-g311771357_640.jpg

In this courseyou will start to develop your leadership skills by looking into negotiation and prioritising. You will learn how to use and develop these skills to help you become a great leader in the workplace and within your business.

Developing leadership skills

It is very important for leaders to know about the different types of leadership, we will look at how to develop those skills in this session by focusing on negotiation and prioritising.

Imagine starting your own business, you have everything in place, finance, premises and product.  You have advertised your business and are all set to start trading. You have sourced the best suppliers for your product. You have recruited and hired the best staff to work on your business venture, but do you have the skills to the lead the staff?

As an entrepreneur, you will want the best for your business, but it is important to monitor all aspects of the business, including staff. It can be difficult for entrepreneurs, who are sometimes so engrossed in their brilliant idea that they believe people will automatically follow them. To turn your vision into a successful company, entrepreneurs must be leaders of people.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Developing leadership skills

Negotiation

Prioritising

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Legal Obligations of Business.jpgLegal Obligations of Business.jpg

In this course you will learn about the legal considerations that you will need to take when starting a business. As well as this you will also look into costs and cashflow of a business.

Introduction 

When starting a new business, it is important to understand the legalities which can impact the business. The legalities of setting up a new business can be complex, and it would be beneficial to seek advice from organisations which offer support to business start-ups such as Business Gateway including legal issues surround the business structure, intellectual property, tax & NI and employing staff. 

The implications of getting it wrong can be severe for a business and could result in heavy fines, loss of reputation, prosecution or imprisonment.

There are a number of options available for start-ups when deciding what legal structure to put in place for the business:

  • Sole Trader
  • Partnership
  • Franchise
  • Limited company

If the limited company route is chosen, the business must be registered with Companies House.


You will learn 

  1. Types of business structure
  2. Business functions
  3. Legal considerations

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
7 P’s Marketing.png7 P’s Marketing.png

Learn about marketing and the role it can play within a business and the different methods used. As well as this you will look into the purpose of marketing and the 7 P's

Introduction

Marketing is about trying to satisfy customers so that they will return and make more purchases. It is the management process which involves finding out what consumers want and satisfying consumer requirements profitably.

This can be done in a number of ways, like carrying out research to find out what products customers want or researching and developing products for the market. It is also important for a company to decide on suitable packaging for the products, as well as deciding where to sell the products.

It is vitally important for the organisation to set a suitable price for the products so that a profit is made and that they are advertised, promoted and sold effectively.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

How Marketing Affects the Business, including:

The purpose of marketing

7 P’s of marketing

Marketing methods

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
turn-on-gebbbbb452_1280-460x249.jpgturn-on-gebbbbb452_1280-460x249.jpg

In this course you will Learn about personal performance and readiness for business start up

Introduction

Every entrepreneur must understand their personal qualities and use these personal qualities to build their business.It is important to look at yourself objectively and measure your good points and bad points. You could make a list of what you think your personal qualities are, but it can often be easier to use a ‘SWOT’ analysis.

The SWOT analysis stands for: STRENGTHS, WEAKNESSES OPPORTUNITIES, THREATS.

You will find out that SWOT analysis is a development tool used to identify your own personal qualities and will help you to see areas that you can build upon and areas that you lack knowledge in. The idea is that you go through each category and list your personal qualities or lack of them, against these categories.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Personal SWOT analysis

Reflection on personal performance

Stress

Are you ready to be an entrepreneur - case study

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
analysis-1841158_1920-460x307.jpganalysis-1841158_1920-460x307.jpg

In this course you will learn about the requirements when choosing a business premises such as cost, stock, equipment and machinery.

Introduction

  • A business idea involves many pieces that need to be put together to make it successful. The owner or entrepreneur will have researched every area of the business to get it started and put everything in place.  
  • No matter how much research has been done, it is essential for the initiator to understand the resources that are required to make the idea a success. Premises can be vital to the success of an organisation and make the staff feel safe and secure.
  • A business needs many elements to make it work successfully.
  • Once the business idea has been thought through, it needs a plan of the resources required to make that idea work as a viable business. Planning and putting in place the right materials and equipment to get the business started can be difficult to do.  Especially when the business owner must estimate levels initially.  
  • It can often be guesswork as to how much stock and sundries a new business will require. 
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Resources, focusing on business premises

Considerations to be made

Choice and cost of premises

Planning for the right material

Stock requirements

Equipment requirements

Machinery


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
tablet-5551322_1920-600x399.jpgtablet-5551322_1920-600x399.jpg

Learn about the buying and delivery process when setting up a business.

Introduction

  • When an organisation is being set up, decisions need to be made on numerous aspects of that organisation.  These decisions will affect and shape how that organisation operates and performs for years to come.
  • Following the decision on what the product or service will be, it needs to be decided which elements will be made in house and which ones will be outsourced with someone else making it.
  • Some organisations decide to make the whole product or only parts of it.
This is a big decision for companies to make.
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The make or buy decision

When does it take place within an organisation?

In-house or outsourcing?

Finance and quality

Means of Delivery - internet only and franchise

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
leadership-course.jpgleadership-course.jpg
In this course you will start to look into leadership skills and how to use these skills within your business. You will also learn about different leadership styles.

Introduction

Leadership incorporates many diverse skills and qualities and for many people it does not come naturally, we’re involved in leadership situations. In some, we may be led by others such as our parents, older siblings or peers. Whereas, in other situations, we may do the leading.  

Leadership may be defined as having the power to exert influence over others. The same situation exists with entrepreneurs – although their focus is to get the best from the staff, they must work together with staff to get the best results.    

Think about any situation where you have been a leader. What were you good at? What were you not so good at? If you have never been a leader, think of someone who has.  

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Leadership Skills

Leadership Styles

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Stakeholders.jpgStakeholders.jpg

In this course we will be Learning about different stakeholders and how they relate to businesses. As well as this you will look into the difference between internal and external stakeholders as well as any form of conflict that might occur because of this stakeholders.

Introduction

Every entrepreneur must understand that there will be individuals and organisations that have an interest in their business. These ‘stakeholders’ are interested in how the business is performing and what affect it has on them.

Stakeholders can be defined as people, organisations, interest groups or other bodies who have an interest in what the organisation does and how it performs. Organisations need to be aware of who their main stakeholders are, what their interests are in the business and the level of influence they have. 

The most powerful stakeholders are likely to be the people who have financed the business. Stakeholders come in many forms, we will be concentrating on competitors, suppliers and customers.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Stakeholders

Internal

External

Competitors as stakeholders.

Course Introduction Video:

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4e4fiZKYEI8

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
meeting-taem-300x300.jpgmeeting-taem-300x300.jpg

In this course you will learn about trends and ideas and how you can work with these trends to benefit your business and which ones can affect your business. You will also know how to generate ideas and business ideas.

Introduction 

A trend can be defined as “a general direction in which something is developing or changing”. Many changes have occurred in the world that have had a direct effect on our buying habits. We are now more aware of how our products are manufactured and sourced and this shapes how business is done. The composition of the traditional household has changed, which ultimately affects our buying patterns.

There are four main types of trend

  1. Technology trends
  2. Environmental trends
  3. Ethical trends
  4. Social trends

You will learn 

  1. Trends which affect business
  2. Recognising business trends
  3. Generating ideas
  4. Business ideas
  5. Business influences


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
ipad-820272_1920-768x512.jpgipad-820272_1920-768x512.jpg

In this session you will cover and learn about different types of business. You will also cover the advantages and disadvantages of these different types of business.

Introduction
• There are many different types of business set up.
 • Many entrepreneurs set up businesses on their own and run the business by themselves.
• There are also organisations that are run by a few people, working as a partnership.
• Whatever the size or set up of the business, it needs the correct management team to make it work.

You will learn:
  1. Sole Trader
  2. Partnerships
  3. Private Limited Companies (Ltd)
  4. Public Limited Companies (Plc)

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
FCA Market Abuse Regulation.pngFCA Market Abuse Regulation.png
The "FCA Market Abuse Regulations (MAR)" course provides an in-depth examination of the Market Abuse Regulation, which governs the conduct of financial markets and aims to prevent market abuse. This regulation is crucial for maintaining market integrity and ensuring that financial markets operate transparently and fairly.

The course explores the scope and application of MAR, including the definition of market abuse and the types of behavior that constitute market manipulation and insider trading. Participants will learn about the FCA's role in enforcing MAR, including the regulatory framework, supervisory practices, and enforcement mechanisms.

The course covers key aspects of MAR such as the requirements for disclosure of inside information, the prohibition of market manipulation, and the obligations for issuers and firms. It also delves into the compliance measures and reporting requirements necessary to adhere to MAR.

Through a combination of theoretical insights and practical examples, including case studies of market abuse incidents, participants will gain a thorough understanding of how MAR is applied in practice and how firms can ensure they are compliant. The course also addresses the penalties and sanctions that may be imposed for MAR violations and the procedures for challenging enforcement actions.

By the end of the course, participants will be equipped with the knowledge needed to navigate MAR effectively, understand the regulatory expectations, and implement robust compliance frameworks to prevent market abuse.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Overview of Market Abuse Regulation (MAR) and its objectives

Definition and types of market abuse, including insider trading and market manipulation

FCA’s role in enforcing MAR and the regulatory framework involved

Requirements for disclosure of inside information and prohibition of market manipulation

Compliance obligations for firms under MAR

Reporting requirements and procedures for adhering to MAR

Analysis of case studies involving market abuse

Penalties and sanctions for MAR violations and processes for challenging enforcement actions

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 3 Hrs
FCA Technology and AI in Financial Services.jpgFCA Technology and AI in Financial Services.jpg

The "FCA Technology and AI in Financial Services" course explores the integration of technology and artificial intelligence (AI) within the framework of the Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) regulatory oversight. As financial services increasingly leverage advanced technologies, understanding how these innovations interact with regulatory requirements is crucial for maintaining compliance and ensuring market integrity.

The course examines the FCA's approach to regulating technological advancements and AI applications in financial services. It covers key topics such as the impact of technology on regulatory compliance, the FCA's guidelines on the use of AI, and how emerging technologies are reshaping the financial landscape. Participants will gain insights into the regulatory challenges and opportunities presented by these technologies, including issues related to data privacy, algorithmic trading, and automated decision-making.

The course also addresses the FCA's strategies for supervising and enforcing compliance in a technology-driven environment. It includes discussions on the regulatory framework for digital transformation, the role of technology in enhancing market transparency, and the FCA’s expectations for firms adopting new technologies. Case studies and practical examples will illustrate how firms can navigate regulatory requirements while leveraging technological advancements.

By the end of the course, participants will have a comprehensive understanding of the intersection between FCA regulation, technology, and AI, as well as the skills needed to ensure that technological innovations comply with regulatory standards.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Overview of FCA’s regulatory approach to technology and AI in financial services

Impact of technology and AI on regulatory compliance and market integrity

FCA guidelines and expectations for the use of AI in financial services

Challenges related to data privacy, algorithmic trading, and automated decision-making

Regulatory framework for digital transformation in financial services

Role of technology in enhancing market transparency and regulatory oversight

Case studies of technology and AI applications in financial services

Strategies for ensuring compliance with FCA regulations while adopting new technologies

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 4 Hrs
money-laundering.jpgmoney-laundering.jpg
This course is designed to equip professionals in the financial services sector with the knowledge and skills needed to comply with the FCA's regulations on financial crime prevention and Anti-Money Laundering (AML). Participants will gain an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework surrounding financial crime, focusing on how firms can detect, prevent, and report money laundering, fraud, and other financial crimes.

Through interactive case studies and real-world examples, attendees will learn how to implement and maintain effective AML policies and procedures. The course also covers the role of compliance officers and senior managers in ensuring their firms meet FCA requirements for financial crime prevention. Upon completion, participants will be well-prepared to safeguard their organizations against financial crime and remain compliant with the FCA’s regulatory expectations.

This course is ideal for compliance officers, risk managers, AML specialists, and legal professionals in financial services.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understanding the legal and regulatory framework for financial crime prevention.

Implementing and maintaining effective Anti-Money Laundering (AML) programs.

Identifying, reporting, and preventing suspicious activities related to money laundering and fraud.

The role of compliance officers and senior managers in preventing financial crime.

Complying with the FCA's financial crime and AML regulations.

Conducting customer due diligence and Know Your Customer (KYC) processes.

Developing internal controls and monitoring systems to detect financial crime.

Responding to FCA inquiries and financial crime investigations.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 3 Hrs
Financial Conduct Authority.jpgFinancial Conduct Authority.jpg

This course offers a comprehensive understanding of the regulatory framework set by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) in the UK. It is designed for professionals in the financial services industry who need to ensure that their organizations comply with FCA rules and guidelines. Participants will gain practical insights into the role of the FCA, the regulatory obligations of firms, and the best practices for maintaining compliance in a rapidly changing regulatory landscape.

The course covers essential topics such as navigating the FCA Handbook, implementing the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SMCR), and understanding key aspects of consumer protection, financial crime prevention, and regulatory reporting. Through real-world case studies, participants will learn how to apply these concepts to their own organizations, ensuring they meet all regulatory standards while fostering a culture of accountability and integrity.

This program is ideal for compliance officers, risk managers, legal advisors, and senior managers responsible for regulatory oversight within their firms. Upon completion, participants will be equipped with the skills and knowledge needed to effectively manage compliance and mitigate regulatory risk.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understanding the role and structure of the FCA and its regulatory objectives.

Navigating the FCA Handbook and applying its principles to your organization.

Implementing the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (SMCR) for accountability.

Regulatory reporting requirements and FCA supervision processes.

Ensuring consumer protection and handling customer complaints.

Complying with Anti-Money Laundering (AML) and financial crime prevention.

Evaluating the effectiveness of compliance programs using data insights.

Adapting to regulatory changes and implementing best practices for compliance.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 4 Hrs
Best Practices for FCA Compliance Using AI and Technology.jpgBest Practices for FCA Compliance Using AI and Technology.jpg

The "Best Practices for FCA Compliance Using AI and Technology" course focuses on leveraging artificial intelligence (AI) and technology to enhance compliance with Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) regulations while minimizing the risk of penalties. This course provides practical strategies for integrating advanced technologies into compliance processes to ensure adherence to regulatory requirements and improve operational efficiency.

Participants will learn about the FCA’s expectations for using technology in compliance management, including how to use AI for monitoring and reporting, automating compliance tasks, and improving data accuracy. The course covers best practices for implementing technology solutions that align with FCA regulations, including risk management tools, automated reporting systems, and AI-driven analytics.

The course also addresses common pitfalls and challenges in adopting new technologies and offers guidance on avoiding penalties through effective implementation and oversight. Participants will explore case studies of successful technology integration in compliance programs and gain insights into maintaining regulatory standards while leveraging technological innovations.

By the end of the course, participants will have a clear understanding of how to use AI and technology to enhance FCA compliance, mitigate risks, and avoid regulatory penalties.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

FCA expectations and guidelines for using AI and technology in compliance

Best practices for integrating AI and technology into compliance management

Strategies for automating compliance tasks and reporting processes

Techniques for improving data accuracy and risk management with technology

Common challenges and pitfalls in technology adoption for compliance

Case studies of successful technology integration in compliance programs

Methods for avoiding penalties through effective technology implementation

Approaches for maintaining regulatory standards while leveraging technological advancements

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 2 Hrs
FCA Risk Management and Regulatory Reporting.jpgFCA Risk Management and Regulatory Reporting.jpg

This course focuses on the key components of risk management and regulatory reporting under the FCA's regulatory framework. It is designed for financial services professionals responsible for risk oversight, reporting, and compliance within their firms. Participants will learn how to implement effective risk management strategies, ensure accurate and timely regulatory reporting, and navigate the FCA's supervisory expectations.

The course covers the role of the FCA in supervising firms' risk management processes, regulatory reporting obligations, and the consequences of non-compliance. Through interactive sessions and case studies, participants will gain a clear understanding of how to identify, assess, and mitigate risks while maintaining compliance with FCA regulations. By the end of the course, attendees will be able to build strong risk management frameworks and ensure that their firm's reporting processes align with FCA requirements.

This program is ideal for risk managers, compliance officers, finance professionals, and senior leaders who oversee risk and regulatory functions.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Key principles of risk management under FCA regulations.

Implementing effective risk management frameworks within financial firms.

Regulatory reporting requirements, including deadlines and key metrics.

Best practices for identifying, assessing, and mitigating risks.

The FCA's supervisory approach to risk and compliance.

Techniques for ensuring accurate and timely regulatory reporting.

Consequences of non-compliance with FCA reporting obligations.

How to respond to FCA inquiries and manage regulatory inspections.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 3 Hrs
FCA Supervision and Enforcement.jpgFCA Supervision and Enforcement.jpg

The "FCA Supervision and Enforcement" course offers a detailed exploration of the Financial Conduct Authority's (FCA) frameworks and strategies for supervising and enforcing regulatory compliance within the financial services industry. It is designed to provide participants with an in-depth understanding of how the FCA monitors firms' adherence to regulatory standards, manages risks, and takes enforcement actions when necessary.

The course covers the FCA’s approach to supervision, including its risk-based methodology, which focuses on identifying and mitigating potential risks to consumers and the financial market. Participants will learn about the different supervisory tools and techniques employed by the FCA, including routine inspections, thematic reviews, and data analysis.

In addition, the course delves into the enforcement process, highlighting how the FCA investigates breaches of regulations, determines appropriate sanctions, and implements corrective measures. Key topics include the regulatory framework that governs supervision and enforcement, the types of enforcement actions that can be taken, and the principles behind penalty determinations.

Through case studies and real-world examples, learners will gain insights into the practical application of FCA supervision and enforcement strategies. The course also covers the processes for challenging FCA decisions and the mechanisms available for appeal or review.

By the end of the course, participants will have a thorough understanding of the FCA’s role in maintaining market integrity and consumer protection, as well as the skills needed to navigate the regulatory landscape effectively.


Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Overview of FCA supervision principles and methodologies

Detailed procedures of FCA enforcement actions

Key regulations and guidelines for FCA supervision

Risk-based approach to evaluating and prioritizing regulatory risks

Analysis of real-world FCA enforcement case studies

Compliance obligations and expectations for regulated firms

Types of sanctions and penalties imposed by the FCA

Processes for appealing or reviewing FCA enforcement decisions

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 2 Hrs
Quality Leaders .jpgQuality Leaders .jpg

Embark on a transformative journey into the realm of quality leadership mastery. This course is meticulously crafted to empower learners with the essential knowledge and skills required to lead effectively in quality management contexts.

Introduction to Quality Leadership: Gain a profound understanding of the principles that underpin quality leadership. Explore the foundational concepts and theories that define the role of a quality leader within an organization. Discover how effective leadership can influence and drive continuous improvement in quality standards.

Essential Skills for Quality Leaders: Develop crucial skills necessary for successful quality leadership. Enhance your communication abilities to effectively convey visions and strategies for quality enhancement. Sharpen your problem-solving techniques to adeptly address challenges and optimize processes. Acquire the ability to inspire and motivate teams towards achieving quality objectives.

Key Factors for Successful Quality Leadership: Delve into the critical factors that contribute to achieving and sustaining excellence in quality leadership. Learn strategies to foster a culture of quality within your organization. Explore best practices for leveraging technology and data-driven insights to drive continuous improvement initiatives. Understand the importance of ethical leadership and its impact on organizational integrity and reputation.

This course is designed for aspiring leaders, managers, and professionals seeking to elevate their capabilities in quality management. Whether you are looking to advance your career or enhance your organizational impact, "Quality Leadership Mastery" equips you with the tools and insights needed to thrive in dynamic business environments.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Introduction to Quality Leadership

Essential Skills for Quality Leaders

Key Factors for Successful Quality Leadership

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 60-90 min
Strategic Leadership -Building a Winning Team.jpgStrategic Leadership -Building a Winning Team.jpg

This course provides an in-depth exploration of strategic leadership, focusing on the skills and qualities necessary to guide organizations toward long-term success. Students will learn to develop a strategic vision, inspire and motivate teams, and cultivate the key traits of successful teams. The course covers:

Strategic Leadership Defined

Understanding what strategic leadership is and how it differs from other leadership styles such as transactional and transformational leadership.

Key Qualities and Skills

Emphasizing critical and strategic thinking, effective communication, and inspirational motivation. Students will learn how to analyze situations objectively, make informed decisions, and anticipate future trends.

Developing a Strategic Vision and Plan 

Techniques for setting clear, measurable goals, communicating effectively with teams, identifying key initiatives, and adapting plans as needed.

Cultivating Successful Teams

Strategies for establishing clear roles and responsibilities, providing necessary support and resources, and fostering a positive and collaborative team culture.

Sustaining Success and Continuous Improvement

 Methods for monitoring and evaluating progress, celebrating successes, fostering a culture of learning and growth, and responding to new challenges and opportunities.

Maintaining Focus and Momentum Amid Change

Approaches to maintaining adaptability and resilience, staying informed about industry trends, and regularly reassessing priorities to keep the organization aligned with long-term goals.

Through a combination of lectures, case studies, and practical exercises, students will gain the tools and insights needed to become effective strategic leaders capable of steering their organizations through complex and changing environments.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The definition of strategic leadership and how it compares to other types of leadership.

The key qualities and skills necessary for effective strategic leadership, including critical and strategic thinking, and how to inspire and motivate teams to achieve goals.

How to develop a strategic vision and plan by setting clear and measurable goals, communicating effectively with the team, identifying key initiatives, and adapting as needed.

The key traits of successful teams and how to cultivate these traits in your own team, including establishing clear roles and responsibilities, providing support and resources, and fostering a positive team culture.

How to sustain success and continuous improvement through monitoring and evaluating progress, celebrating successes, fostering a culture of learning and growth, and responding to new challenges and opportunities.

The importance of maintaining focus and momentum in the face of change and how to achieve this by adapting and pivoting as needed.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Innovative Leadership.pngInnovative Leadership.png

Innovative Leadership: Driving Change and Creativity is a comprehensive training course that provides a practical and theoretical understanding of what it takes to lead an organization in today's rapidly changing business landscape. This course is designed for individuals who are looking to become innovative leaders and drive change within their organizations.

The course covers five key topics, each designed to equip participants with the knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary to lead with innovation and creativity. Topics include defining innovative leadership, building a culture of innovation, fostering collaboration and cooperation, developing a strategic vision, and embracing change.

At the end of this course, participants will have a deep understanding of what it takes to become an innovative leader and how to drive change and creativity within their organizations. Participants will also have the opportunity to put their newfound knowledge into practice through practical exercises and case studies.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

How to define and understand innovative leadership, and the key qualities and skills necessary to be an effective leader.


How to build a culture of innovation within your organization, and the importance of fostering a supportive and inclusive environment.


How to foster collaboration and cooperation among employees, and the benefits of tapping into the collective creativity of your team.


The process of developing a strategic vision, including how to conduct research, analyze data, and effectively communicate your vision to your team.


How to embrace change and effectively manage resistance to change, including the importance of taking calculated risks and learning from failure

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
interview.pnginterview.png
Although each interview experience will vary, when in comes to questions there are a number that will crop up again and again. This course will arm you with information that will mean that you are less likely to be caught off guard by whatever questions the interviewer fires at you.

Introduction

Interview questions and styles will change for every interview you go to.  Some will be formal and some may be a little more relaxed. However, there are questions that are commonly asked at many interviews.

It is worth while taking the time to look at a range of questions you might be asked, by thinking about them beforehand it will give you more confidence on the day of your interview.

So why are you being asked these questions?
·       To see if you have the skills and experience to carry out the job
·       To check your enthusiasm, motivation and interest for the job – why did you choose to apply?

·       To see whether you will fit in with the working environment and the staff.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Why you are being asked questions


A range of commonly asked questions and how you might answer them


Unusual interview questions


Questions to consider asking your future employer

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
interview.jpginterview.jpg
For most job applications getting an interview is half the battle. This course looks at strategies to improve your chances of your application landing you an interview rather than landing in the bin.

Introduction

There are various statistics on what the average number of applicants per job is and these vary greatly. Some say 115 applicants per job opening and others say up to 270.

Hiring managers receive hundreds of applications for each open position. This will vary according to which organisations and which industry you are interested in. The main point is that you are going to be facing a lot of competition.

This is ultimately a numbers game - how many applications are you submitting, how many people in your industry are you meeting, and how many job interviews have you got? If the answer to this is “not many,” you aren’t alone.

You may think you are the perfect candidate for a given job, but there are a number of reasons why hiring managers may not be contacting you for interviews.
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The odds of getting an interview

Reviewing your applications

Recruitment tracking systems

Following instructions

Spelling and grammar

Networking

Personal Profile / Personal Statement

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Interview.pngInterview.png

The best way to tackle an interview is by being prepared. This course will cover ways to prepare for a successful outcome.

Introduction

If you are invited to an interview you should spend some time researching the organisation; this will give you confidence if you are asked any questions on what they do.

Here are some ways that you could gather information about the company:
·       Business publications or magazine articles
·       Internet research – have they got a website?
·       Social media – do they have a Facebook page? Are they on LinkedIn?

·       You could telephone and ask for an information pack if this is relevant

You will learn 

  1. Researching the organisation
  2. Planning your journey
  3. Creating the right image

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
After The Interview.jpgAfter The Interview.jpg

In this course we will cover the challenges of what to do after an interview and the things to consider regardless of the outcome of the interview.

Introduction

You’ve completed your interview, fantastic! Getting to the other side is really stress relieving but remember that you still have more to consider and do. You will need to consider what to do if you aren’t successful or even if you are, is the job right for you? 

Whatever the outcome, whilst you wait it is important to continue applying for other job opportunities.

You will learn 

  1. Contacting the employer after the interview
  2. What to do if you are successful
  3. What to do if you are unsuccessful

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
hr-process-g35917c9ef_640.pnghr-process-g35917c9ef_640.png

In this course you will learn about interview day, well done if you have made it to the interview day. Chocked full of hints and tips, this session will help make the whole experience less stressful.

Job interviews are stressful and un-nerving. To reduce this stress and anxiety it is important to feel prepared. Preparation ranges from practicing your presentation to ensuring that you eat and drink appropriately.

On the day of your interview try to be relaxed and prepared. Throughout this session we will explore methods to ensure a smooth interview process.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

The interviewer(s)

Preparation on the day

Do and don’ts in an interview


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Social Media Presence.jpgSocial Media Presence.jpg

In this course you will learn about what a social media presence is and why it is important to your job search. This course is suitable for everyone.


Introduction

Your social media presence is how you post content and engage with other people on the internet. This includes how often you post, the type of content posted and the levels of engagement on your social media accounts. 

Whether you have a social media presence or not and however you feel about it, social media is here to stay and has impacted the recruitment market.

What does a social media presence mean to you? Write down your thoughts. Social media provides you with an opportunity to advertise yourself, helps you find job opportunities, allows employers to see beyond your CV and provides you with an opportunity to learn about companies and industry trends. 

You will learn 

  1. Understand the importance of a social media presence when job hunting
  2. Know some of the different social media platforms
  3. Understand how to use social media

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Hidden Job Market.jpgHidden Job Market.jpg

In this course you will learn about the hidden job market and how to make it work for your in your job search. This course is suitable for everyone.

Introduction

The term “hidden job market” is used to describe jobs that aren't posted online or advertised. Employers could choose to refrain from posting jobs for various reasons. For example, they might not have the money to advertise or they may wish to attract candidates through contacts in their sector.

Despite being described as hidden, it is still possible to find out about these jobs. Many opportunities are discovered through networking with others rather than traditional recruitment methods.

You will learn 

  1. Understand what the hidden job market is
  2. Know how to access the hidden job market
  3. Know how the hidden job market can work for you

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
skills.jpgskills.jpg
In this course you will learn about your skills and which are transferable. This course is suitable for everyone.

Introduction
Let's find out what skills you have. What equipment can you use, such as a computer or welding tools? What ways of working are you good at, such as talking to others, planning or multi-tasking?

All skills are useful when searching for a new job, but some skills are particularly highly prized by employers. Here is some more information about the most commonly requested skill sets.

CommunicationListening, speaking and writing. Employers want people who can accurately interpret what others are saying and organize and express their thoughts clearly.
Teamwork: Many jobs involve working in one or more groups. Employers want someone who can bring out the best in others.
Problem-solving skills: Employers want people who can use creativity, reasoning and past experiences to identify and solve problems effectively.
Personal management: The ability to plan and manage multiple assignments and tasks, set priorities and adapt to changing conditions and work assignments.
Interpersonal effectiveness: Employers usually note whether an employee can relate to co-workers and build relationships with others in the organization.
Computer or technical literacy: Although employers expect to provide training on job-specific software, they also expect employees to be proficient with basic computer skills.
Leadership or management: The ability to take charge and manage your co-workers, if required, is a welcome trait. Most employers look for signs of leadership qualities.
Competence in reading and maths: Almost all jobs require the ability to read and comprehend instructions and perform basic maths.

You will learn 

  1. Know how to identify the skills you have
  2. Understand which skills are transferable
  3. Know how to use transferable skills in practice

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Job Board.jpgJob Board.jpg

In this course you will learn about what an online job board is and how it can be useful to you in your job hunt. This course is suitable for everyone.

Introduction

A job board is a website that deals specifically with employment or careers. You might have heard them called job sites, job portals, job websites or employment websites. Employers can publish job offers when they have a position that needs to be filled. Jobseekers can search these sites to find a job that is being advertised and apply for it.

An online version of circling job adverts in newspapers, job boards can be an excellent job-hunting tool. From huge national job boards to niche job boards run by industry publications, job boards can help you reach thousands of employers and recruiters.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Know what an online job board is

Know the benefits of using an online job board

Understand how to use an online job board

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
CV.jpgCV.jpg

In this course you will learn about different types of CVs and how to make them work for you, as well as interview tips. This course is suitable for everyone.

Introduction 

Write down your ideas. You might include the reasons why you should have a CV, or some of the things you might expect to include on your CV.

A CV can make you think of lots of things, because it is an important document for you in your job search. You could have written lots of things. Some of the words you might have written could include;
·       Job role
·       Training
·       Work history
·       My details
·       Address
·       My story
·       Education
·       Name
·       Experience

·       First impression

You will learn 

  1. Understanding different types of CVs
  2. Know how to make a CV work for you
  3. Know how to be interview ready

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
man.svgman.svg

Good employee management is linked to lower staff turnover, higher productivity and business success.

Effective managers know how to motivate and communicate with their employees. They also understand their legal obligations and promptly deal with any problems that arise in the workplace.

Communicating with your employees is a significant part of your role as a manager. Clear communication can help employees understand their duties and your expectations. Motivated employees are essential to the success of a business. There are a number of legal obligations that you need to comply with as a manager or employer.

Problems relating to employees can be complex. You need strong communication and interpersonal skills to identify, discuss and resolve the issue.

This course will help you develop your management skills in each of these key areas, so you can build a high performing team and help your business achieve its goals.

This course includes the following resources which you can download

  • Employer’s Guide to Resolving Workplace Issues
  • Fair Work Ombudsman Best Practice Guides
  • Create A Business Vision (Queensland Government)
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Effective communication

Why motivation matters

Complying with workplace laws

How to manage common problems

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 60-90 min
Hiring Staff.jpgHiring Staff.jpg

Hiring is an important decision for your business. The right approach can benefit your workplace and save you time and money.

Hiring is not a single event - it's a process. Understanding each step in the process will help you get the best outcome for your business.

This course will provide you with general guidance about the process of planning, selecting the best applicant and settling-in your new employee. For specific advice and assistance contact you employer association or legal advisor.

This course includes the free online resources, templates and links to further information which you can download.

  • Job description template
  • Job advertisement template
  • Telephone screening form
  • Reference checking form
  • Letter to unsuccessful applicants
  • Induction checklist
  • Performance agreement template

Changes to the Fair Work Act relating to casual employees may affect this course. We’re reviewing the information in this course in light of these changes. We encourage you to check back here for updates.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the steps in the hiring process

Decide if hiring a new employee is the best option for you

Understand employee entitlements and your obligations

Attract the best applicants and conduct interviews

Select the most suitable candidate and make them an offer of employment

Induct employees, develop their skills and hold onto strong performers

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
work.svgwork.svg

Workplace flexibility means employers and employees making arrangements that suit them. This helps employees maintain their work/life balance and can improve business productivity and efficiency.

There are many types of flexible working arrangements. They may involve changes to when, where or how work is done. They may be temporary, ongoing or for a fixed period.

This course will help you to understand why flexible working arrangements can be good for your business. It outlines your legal obligations and shows you how to negotiate and manage flexibility so that it works for you and your employees.

There are many examples of flexible working scheduled roles, some cases include:

  • Giving employees the ability to design their own rosters with remote access through rostering and shift-swapping applications
  • Flexible start and finish times
  • Combining and sharing roles, for example: four days in an operational role and one day in a role that allows for remote working.

This course includes links to the following resources 

Workplace Flexibility Poster
Template Flexibility Request/Response
Best Practice Guide - Flexible Work Arrangements
Best Practice Guide - Use Of Individual Flexibility Agreements
Guide For Developing A Business Case For Flexibility (Wgea)
Manager Flexibility Toolkit (Wgea)
Developing A Flexible Working Arrangements Policy (Wgea)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learning what flexibility is

Who can ask for flexibility?

Types of flexible working arrangements

Flexibility benefit to the business

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
lady.svglady.svg

As a business adviser (for example: accountant, bookkeeper, payroll specialist or workplace consultant) you don't need to be an expert in workplace relations to add value for your clients – but you do need to be aware of the common issues and know where to find the right information.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Give clients the right advice on pay, record-keeping and other common workplace issues.

Locate free online resources for you and your clients

Identify and discuss problems with clients

Assist clients in responding to an audit or investigation

Manage your own risk and liability.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
justicia.svgjusticia.svg

This course provides general guidance on workplace laws for Franchisors.

As a Franchisor, it is essential to have an understanding of what actions you can take to encourage compliance in your network to help protect and manage your business.

This course aims to assist you to understand and comply with your workplace obligations as a franchisor. However, completing this course does not guarantee that you are meeting all of your obligations. You may wish to obtain independent legal or other specialist advice to ensure compliance with the Fair Work Act.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn and understand your obligations under workplace laws and the Franchising Code of Conduct

Identify conditions in which you may be liable for franchisee contraventions

Identify specific actions you can take to promote compliance with workplace laws in your franchise network

Learn how to use free online resources for you and your franchisees

Produce better ‘Action Plan’ for your business to help your network improve its workplace practices.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Franchisee Workplace .jpgFranchisee Workplace .jpg

This course provides general guidance on workplace essentials for Franchisees.

It is important that both franchisees and franchisors are aware of their obligations to employees. We’re here to help you understand your obligations and give you information and resources you can use to get it right.

As a Franchisees Business, you need to be aware of your workplace obligations and where to seek the support available to you, to help protect and manage your business.

This course includes the free online resources which you can download, assess to your current workplace anonymously practices and create an access the supports available to you as a Franchisees & Business.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand your obligations under workplace laws

Recognise the risks of non-compliance for your business

Identify specific actions you can take to help ensure you’re complying with workplace laws

Adapt the ‘Action Plan’ for your business to help improve if gaps are identified

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 60-90 min
opportunity.svgopportunity.svg

Starting a new job can be an exciting time. It can also be a little nerve-wracking.
All employees in the national workplace relations system are protected by certain legal rights.They cover things like:
the hours you work
the pay you get
the breaks and leave you can take
the way you’re treated at work.
It’s unlawful for your employer to give you less than your minimum rights – even if you have signed an employment contract which agrees to less.

This short course will assist you to get off to the best possible start at work. It will help you understand:

what your rights are
what questions to ask
the types of behaviour expected in the workplace.
This course will provide you general guidance about starting a new job. For specific advice and assistance contact the Fair Work Ombudsman or your union.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Things to Ask About Your New Job

Know Your Rights at Work

Know What's Expected


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Diversity and Discriminatio.svgDiversity and Discriminatio.svg

A diverse and inclusive workplace is good for business. It can help you to enhance productivity, reduce turnover and save money. It also minimises the risk of discrimination occurring.

This course will show you how to make your business a place where differences such as age, gender and race are genuinely valued. It outlines your legal obligations to prevent discrimination and provides advice on how to appropriately handle complaints if they do arise.

A diverse workforce is one which employs all kinds of people. All businesses can be diverse, regardless of the industry they’re in or the type of work they do.

Workplace diversity refers to the variety of differences between your employees. 

  • Recognising the differences between your employees in age, gender, ethnicity, language, education, religion, nationality, cultural identity, family status, sexual orientation and disability
  • Understanding the varied perspectives, approaches and talents that these differences bring to your workplace.

This course includes the following resources which you can download:

Diversity and Inclusion Poster

Workplace Discrimination and Harassment Policy Template
Good Practice Guidelines for Internal Complaint Processes
Fair Work Ombudsman Best Practice Guides.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

What is diversity and inclusion?

The benefits of a diverse and inclusive workplace

How to promote diversity and inclusion 

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Managing Performance.jpgManaging Performance.jpg
Employees are a key part of running a successful business. As an employer, there are simple steps you can take to maximise the performance of your employees.
This course will provide you with guidance on promoting good performance in your workplace, and addressing underperformance if it occurs. For specific advice and assistance contact your employer association or legal advisor. While there is no legislative obligation for workplace performance to be managed in a certain way, this course will give practical steps to help you get the best of out of your employees.

There are many reasons why employee underperformance occurs. Common reasons include: lack of understanding about what is expected, or lack of feedback on performance, lack of knowledge or skills required to do the job, lack of personal motivation or confidence, low morale in the workplace, interpersonal differences, or cultural misunderstandings, personal issues such as family stress, health issues or problems with drugs or alcohol.

Links And Resources: 

You will provided with toolkit gives you resources and links to help you manage performance in your workplace, there are 12 resources which you can download.

  • Checklist for implementing a performance system
  • Performance agreement template
  • Performance review discussion plan template
  • Managing underperformance – the initial steps checklist
  • Managing underperformance – the formal steps checklist
  • Performance improvement plan template
  • Underperformance meeting plan template
  • Letter of first/second warning template
  • Letter of final warning template
  • Small Business Fair Dismissal Code and checklist
  • Termination of employment letter template
  • Termination of employment letter template – serious misconduct.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Promoting Good Performance

Addressing Underperformance

Understanding Legal Related Issues

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 60-90 min
Record.svgRecord.svg
This course aims to assist employers to understand their obligations and ensure compliance with the requirements under the Act.
The Authorities requires an employer to make and keep certain employee records relating to remuneration, hours of work and leave entitlements for seven years.
Employers should keep records of hours worked for all employees, including pieceworkers.

Adopting best practice record-keeping makes it easier to keep track of employee details, identify payroll mistakes and keeps a business running efficiently. It also helps avoid fines for doing the wrong thing. 

Current and former employees have the right to access their own records. Inspectors must also be allowed to access employee records, and union officials may also access records and personal information in certain circumstances.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

What are the record-keeping obligations?

What information must be made and kept in employee records?

What are the pay slip obligations and information included?

Best practice guidelines for record-keeping obligations

Tools available to help you to meet your obligations

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Difficult conversations.svgDifficult conversations.svg

Most Managers enjoy good relationships at work. However, even in the best workplace, disagreements can occur. When this happens it’s best to address the issue early and talk about it with your manager or supervisor.

This course will help Managers to prepare you for a difficult conversation in the workplace, and provide advice on how to handle the conversation well.

Remember, if there is something wrong, most managers would prefer to resolve it quickly so both of you can get on with the job.

This course includes the following guides and resources which you can download .Difficult conversations in the workplace - manager course

Guides 
Why have a difficult conversation?
How to prepare for a difficult conversation
How to handle a difficult conversation
Manage your emotions
After the conversation
After you have left the workplace

Resources
Your conversation plan
Difficult conversations - complete guide.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Prepares for the conversation

Explains the situation clearly

Listens and considers his employee’s point of view

Manages your and the employee’s emotions

Agrees on how to move forward

Closes and documents the conversation.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Difficult conversations.jpgDifficult conversations.jpg

Most employee enjoy good relationships at work. However, even in the best workplace, disagreements can occur. When this happens it’s best to address the issue early and talk about it with your manager or supervisor.

This course will help Employee to prepare you for a difficult conversation in the workplace, and provide advice on how to handle the conversation well.

Remember, if there is something wrong, most managers would prefer to resolve it quickly so both of you can get on with the job.

This course includes the following guides and resources which you can download .

Guides 
Why have a difficult conversation?
How to prepare for a difficult conversation
How to handle a difficult conversation
Manage your emotions
After the conversation
After you have left the workplace

Resources
Your conversation plan
Difficult conversations - complete guide.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Prepare for the conversation

Explain the situation clearly

Listen and considers your manager’s point of view

Manage your emotions

Agree on how to move forward

Close the conversation.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Employability.jpgEmployability.jpg

Employability Essentials - Adapt to Change: You will understand why having the ability to adapt to change is an essential employment skill.

Employability Essentials -- Think Critically and Creatively: Being a critical and creative thinker is essential in today’s workplace. It’s also crucial to your career success, regardless of your field or your position. Employers are looking for employees who can creatively problem solve to find answers that are best for both employees and the company.

Change Model -- How to Change: Learners reflect on their own attitudes toward change and list them in the order they might experience them. In a separate exercise, they prioritize the actions a group might take when faced with change in the workplace.

Dealing with Change: The learner will identify ways to deal with the stress related to change.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn the techniques and ability used to adapt to change employment skill

Learn ways to think critically and creatively

Understand the techniques learners used to reflect on their own attitudes toward change.

Understand the importance of identifying ways to deal with the stress related to change.

Understand obstacles that cause problems and changes

Learn the techniques to think critically and creatively

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
hazards-workplace.pnghazards-workplace.png

Workplace Safety: The learner will understand the importance of workplace safety and ways to create and maintain a safe work environment.

Incident Report: Learners write an account of a workplace incident and evaluate statements for objectivity.

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): Explore the different types of personal protective equipment, which protects you against workplace hazards

Organizational Clue: Observe disorganization in an office setting and choose solutions to the problems as if playing the board game "Clue."

Using Fire Extinguishers: By the end of this learning activity, you’ll know how to understand, use, and maintain different types of fire extinguishers.

Choosing the Right Fire Extinguisher: Explore the different types of fires and the extinguishers used for each type.

Following Instructions: The learner will understand the importance of following instructions.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the importance of workplace safety

Understand obstacles that cause safety issues

Learn how to write workplace incident report

Identify the process of office setting and choose solutions to problems

Explore the different types of personal protective equipment

Understand and Explore Using/Choosing, and maintain different types of fire extinguishers.

Understand the importance of following instructions.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
diversity.jpgdiversity.jpg

Diversity refers to clear fact of human life, that there are many different kinds of people, the diversity meaning indicate to the existence of different characteristics in a work-place of people, the idea that this diversity drives cultural, economic, and social vitality and innovation. These characteristics makes workforce unique, such as our skills, behaviour and traits.

Organisations are required to implement diversity policies to inspire, respect and rise the workforce quality.

The Sterotypes: In this learning activity, the user will understand how believing in and using common stereotypes can get in the way of working together.

Learners test their knowledge of demographics in the United States and in the world. Immediate feedback is provided.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn techniques learners are required to implement diversity policies

Understand the importance of the existence of different characteristics in a work-place of people

Understand how believing and using stereotypes can get in the way of working together.

Understand the importance of diversity to inspire, respect and rise the workforce quality.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
ethics.jpgethics.jpg

Introduction to EthicsThe learner will identify the three general types of ethics.

Code of Ethics: In this interactive object, learners identify the feelings and values that motivate them and others to take responsibility for improving ethics in the workplace.

This course will come with APP

Workplace Ethics Best PracticesThe learner will be able to recognize best practices related to ethics in the workplace.

Ethical Dilemma Decisions: The learner will understand what an ethical dilemma is and how to make the best decision when faced with a choice of options that may not be ethically acceptable.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
ethics.jpgethics.jpg

Workplace Ethics (Enforcing Rules) : This interactive study guide will help students to identify recommended processes for enforcing rules on a work team.

Ethics in the Workplace: Set 1: The learner will recognize unethical behavior in the workplace.

Ethics in the Workplace: Set 2: The learner will evaluate workplace scenarios and determine ethical behavior.

Ethics in a Manufacturing Environment: The learner will be able to accurately recognize the applicable ethical issues specific to the manufacturing environment. Most of these issues and outlined in codes of conduct in the general business and industry arena.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Commercial awareness.jpgCommercial awareness.jpg

Developing better commercial awareness involves understanding both the external environment and your organisation’s place within it. However, this free course, *Commercial Awareness*, encourages you to look within your organisation and at your own role within it. By gaining different perspectives and widening your existing ones, you can enhance your commercial awareness significantly.

This course focuses on the internal environment of your organisation, viewing it as a complex entity full of interrelationships and interactions. You will build on – and critically assess – the concept of a ‘value chain’ within your organisation. While 'value' is crucial to commercial awareness, it is created by a connected network of agents rather than a simple linear chain. Together, these agents generate the added value of an organisation.

Throughout the course, you will develop maps of your organisation and your communication network, helping you locate yourself within this complex picture. This complexity may present challenges and barriers to developing commercial awareness, but it will also provide a richer understanding of your organisation. By the end of the course, you will have a better appreciation of the value your business generates and the contributions you make to that value, putting you in a more commercially aware state.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Articulate what an organisation exists to do: the value it creates

Appreciate a personal position within the organisation and how others relate to it

Relate the concept of a value chain to a personal working context, whilst acknowledging much more complex interrelationships within the organisation.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 4 Hrs
Remote team.jpgRemote team.jpg

This online course focuses on equipping supervisors, managers, and senior leaders with essential skills to effectively manage remote teams. Participants will learn to establish remote teams, set clear expectations, optimize communication strategies, and maintain productivity and motivation. It is designed for anyone managing teams, whether they work from home, their usual place of work, or remotely from different locations.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Define remote team

Considerations when managing a remote team

Managing remote teams

Productivity and motivation

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
British .jpgBritish .jpg

Explore some of the things that you and others consider as British culture. You will look at how influences from around the world come together in many ways to make Britain's culture unique and varied..

 Introduction

Although a small country today, Britain has in its history had links with other cultures from all over the world, in roles both as leaders and followers. This varied past gives Britain a diverse culture that has a wide range of different influences. Many of the traditions that are often considered to be British have their origins in other parts of the world. The list of things that make up British culture is infinitely long, and although there are definitely some iconic aspects to British life there cannot ever be a definitive list of everything. This is in itself an important part of being British, as it relates to the British value that everyone’s beliefs and preferences are a valid way to celebrate being British. We will explore some different ideas that people may associate with being typically British to learn where they come from and what part they play in modern British life.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Know a range of examples of British culture

Know which terms are used to refer to which parts of the British Isles

Understand how many other cultures make British culture what it is

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Equality Act And Discrimination.jpgEquality Act And Discrimination.jpg

In this course, learn about the Equality Act 2010 and how it prevents discrimination. You will learn about different types of discrimination that can occur and how to challenge discrimination that you encounter.

Introduction

The Equality Act was created to bring together several pre-existing pieces of legislation that were designed to protect people from mistreatment. 

The purpose of the Equality Act is to ensure people are not discriminated against. It specifically protects against nine protected characteristics, which are things that all people will have some or all of. 

The Equality Act is key to upholding the British values of mutual tolerance and respect, as well as rule of law and individual liberty.

You will learn 

  1. Understand the purpose of the Equality Act 2010
  2. Understand the main types of discrimination
  3. Know what the nine protected characteristics of the Equality Act 2010 are
  4. Know the importance of challenging discrimination

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Law.jpgLaw.jpg

In this course, you will learn about rule of law, from its origins in the Magna Carta to today's legal system. You will look at how rule of law applies to you.

Introduction;
Fundamental principle of rule of law is that no individual or organisation is above the law. Everyone is accountable to abiding by the rules. This is a principle that governs us at a national level but can also be seen at local levels and even within smaller groups such as at a school or within a football team. When you are abiding by the rule of law you are agreeing that you and everyone else will follow the rules of the state or institution. 

In the UK, we have a network of public services that uphold Rule of Law, including police, courts and judges.
This means that there is a clear process and procedure that any offence or grievance passes through so the law is upheld. A grievance is a dispute that an individual or group has, usually made into an official complaint.

While the police and army can be held to account by Parliament, courts operate above this to ensure even the government obeys the law. There are many levels of courts in the UK, each available to appeal decisions of the courts below them. This protects the system from error.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand what rule of law is

Explain the key principles of rule of law

Know in outline how the UK court system works

Know why it matters to you

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
happy lives.jpghappy lives.jpg

In this course, learn what to do when British Values are not being followed. You will explore reporting crimes, contacting charities for support and campaigning for change.

Introduction 

British values underpin daily life in Britain, and when everyone follows them we can all enjoy productive, happy lives. However, you may come across situations where you encounter people who are not following the British values and it is causing problems for you or someone you know.

Other times you may come across people who are saying or doing things that you disagree with, because you believe them to be wrong or harmful.

This course covers some of the things you can do to tackle the problems that may arise in such situations, through methods such as reaching out to charities or government bodies, or through peaceful and productive activism.

You will learn 

  1. Know what to do if you are the subject of discrimination or harassment
  2. Understand how to report crime if you witness it
  3. Know what activism is and what it can be used for
  4. Understand the importance of respectful disagreement


Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
British value.jpgBritish value.jpg

In this course, explore what the public services are, looking in particular at examples such as the emergency services and the NHS. You will understand their important role in UK society.

Introduction

A public service is an organisation funded through taxpayer’s money, providing assistance to citizens across many different sectors. Tax is a system where a country collects a portion of the wages of all its citizens, usually to reinvest in benefits for the state.

The UK has several such organisations, including the NHS, emergency services, schools and colleges, and job and advice centres.

We collectively refer to the sector in which the public services are located as the public sector. Most government departments and functions are located in the public sector as they are funded by taxpayers’ money for the benefit of everyone.

You will learn 

  1. Know some of the different public services in the UK
  2. Understand the role public services play in UK society
  3. Know why public services in the UK are important
  4. Know how you can support the work of the UK public services

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Tolerance.jpgTolerance.jpg

In this course you will explore mutual respect and tolerance by examining the meaning of diversity and why it is important to modern Britain. You will look at why tolerance and respect is important to you and everyone else.

Introduction

Everyone is different, with a range of different beliefs and opinions that make us who we are. There are very few people in the world who will have identical ideas about everything, and that is part of what creates the richness and vibrance of global society.

Mutual respect and tolerance means understanding that we don’t all share the same beliefs and values. It also means allowing everyone to have their own ideas without trying to impose your thoughts onto anyone else. Being able to respect other people’s ideas is important in building honesty, trust, communication and compassion. 

You will learn 

  1. Know what mutual respect and tolerance means
  2. Understand some of the ways in which the UK is diverse
  3. Know what immigration is and how it contributes to the diversity of the UK
  4. Understand why respect and tolerance are important

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
burma-ga808c44ff_640 (1).jpgburma-ga808c44ff_640 (1).jpg

In this course, explore how you can make a difference in your community through actions such as fundraising, campaigning and volunteering.

Introduction

Making a difference in your school, college or community is simply acting in a way that benefits those around you.

This can be as basic as setting a good example, to more complex activities such as organising charitable events. It could also mean donating your time, money or goods to support a good cause.

Making a difference can be a one-off act, or something you do regularly. Every positive action, however small, helps to make a difference.

You will learn 

  1. Know what making a difference means
  2. Understand some things you can do to support your community
  3. Know how to find volunteering opportunities near you

Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
British Values.jpgBritish Values.jpg

This course is an introduction to the four key British Values and how they relate to you in your daily life.

Introduction 

Values are principles, standards or qualities that an individual or group of people hold in high regard.

These values guide the way we live our lives and the decisions we make. A value may be defined as something that we hold dear, those things or qualities which we consider to be of worth.

A ‘value’ is commonly formed by a particular belief that is related to the worth of an idea or type of behaviour. Some people may see great value in saving the world’s rainforests. However, a person who relies on the logging of a forest for their job may not place the same value on the forest as a person who wants to save it.

You will learn 

  1. Understand what values are and identify some values you hold
  2. Know what the term ‘British values’ means
  3. Identify what the key British values are
  4. Know what British values mean to you

Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Individual Liberty.jpgIndividual Liberty.jpg

In this course you will learn about individual liberty, with a particular focus on the Human Rights Act 1998 and how it protects a wide range of freedoms for everyone in the UK.

Introduction 

Individual liberty is the right to believe, act and express yourself freely as long as you do so within the law. It means that for anything not governed by law, you can make your own choices about life.

For example, you cannot choose to steal from a shop or attack someone in the street, as these acts would be illegal. However, you can choose what to wear each day, which music you like to listen to, which shops you want to shop at and which foods you want to eat.

Individual liberty is about protecting everyone’s basic human rights so that they can enjoy their lives in the ways that they wish to. It is all about having free choice.

You will learn

  1. Understand what individual liberty is
  2. Explain what the Human Rights Act 1998 is
  3. Give examples of the freedoms that individual liberty protects

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
hammurabi.jpghammurabi.jpg

In this course you will learn about what democracy is and how it functions in the UK. You will explore the different systems of governance and discover how democracy matters to you.

Introduction

The word democracy comes from two Greek words; demos, meaning common people, and kratos, meaning power.

The definition of democracy is: "A system of government by the whole population or all the eligible members of a state." That means in a democracy, you have a right and responsibility to decide how your country is run, and what decisions are made. In small groups this can mean that every person has a direct part to play in all decision making. In a larger group, such as a country, it often means that the people elect representatives to speak and make decisions on their behalf.

There are many ways of ruling or governing a group of people. In general, they can all be defined as one of five types. Sometimes a system of governance will take elements from more than one of these groups to create hybrid models, such as a democratic republic.

You will learn 

  1. Explain different systems of governance
  2. Know what democracy is
  3. Understand how democracy works in the UK
  4. Know why democracy matters to you

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
emotional-intelligence.jpgemotional-intelligence.jpg
Emotionally Intelligent Leadershipcourse is designed to help leaders and professionals enhance their ability to navigate workplace interactions effectively by leveraging emotional intelligence (EI). Through a series of real-world scenarios, participants will develop crucial EI competencies, including self-awareness, self-management, social awareness, and relationship management.

This course provides a highly interactive learning experience where participants engage in decision-making exercises that mirror workplace challenges. These exercises involve managing diverse personalities, resolving conflicts, giving constructive feedback, and fostering an inclusive team culture. Participants will gain insights into their leadership style and how their emotional responses impact team dynamics, productivity, and overall morale.

By practicing emotionally intelligent responses in structured scenarios, learners will refine their ability to handle difficult conversations, build strong professional relationships, and enhance their leadership effectiveness. The course also offers strategies to foster psychological safety, promote team collaboration, and maintain a positive work environment, whether working remotely or in an office setting.

By the end of the course, participants will be equipped with practical tools and techniques to lead with empathy, make informed decisions, and inspire their teams to perform at their best. This training is ideal for managers, team leaders, HR professionals, and anyone looking to strengthen their interpersonal and leadership skills through the power of emotional intelligence.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the importance of emotional intelligence in leadership.

Develop self-awareness to recognize and manage emotions in stressful situations.

Improve self-management skills to maintain composure and effectiveness under pressure.

Enhance social awareness by understanding and responding to team members' emotions.

Strengthen relationship management to build trust and effective communication within teams.

Apply emotional intelligence to workplace scenarios involving conflict resolution.

Make emotionally intelligent decisions when dealing with performance issues.

Foster inclusion and engagement among remote and on-site team members.

Improve leadership communication strategies to support diverse team needs.

Balance empathy with accountability when managing team expectations.

Utilize EI techniques to provide constructive feedback and performance guidance.

Enhance decision-making by considering both logical reasoning and emotional impact.

Build strategies to support team members experiencing stress or disengagement.

Encourage collaboration and psychological safety within teams.

Develop action plans for continuous improvement in emotional intelligence.  


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 6 Hrs
Performance Management.jpgPerformance Management.jpg

In this course we will explore how the performance management processes can offer an opportunity to enhance the practice of performance management Plus. 

You will learn how to create a high-performance culture at your organization which requires higher levels of trust, communication, and productive working relationships between supervisors and employees. You need to establish performance management system to incorporate employee engagement into performance management–what we call Performance Management Plus.

The performance management course provides you the opportunity to develop the mutual trust that you need to sustain ahigh-performance culture through

• Frequent conversations
• Truthfulness in communications
• Commitment to employee success 

The Foundational Principles of the Performance Management helps to build strong, trusting, and genuine working relationships. We will learn the need to make sure and understand the importance of establishing and nourishing the relationship between supervisors and employees, even before initiating the performance management processes.

This course is more than signing performance plans or completing appraisals at the end of the year. It actually begins on day one, the moment a new employee begins their on boarding, and is a non-stop process. When supervisors and employees build strong and trusting relationships, then the rest of performance management comes naturally. The course foundational principles support you to establishment and maintenance of these positive working relationships, inspire you to use the performance management processes as a roadmap throughout the course to discuss the relationships vital to the success of PM Plus.

We will also support you to identify opportunities where Performance Management is used to create a workplace environment that supports the success of both the employee and the organization.

Lesson 1 will cover Performance Management and how its foundational principles can be applied throughout the year, using the performance management cycle as a roadmap.

Lesson 2 provides you the opportunity to practice Performance Management in a simulated work environment, and learn more about recognizing opportunities to engage and build trusting relationships within the workplace.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identify and explain the role of employees and supervisors in Performance Management.

Engage discussions throughout performance management cycle to enhance understanding of expectations and goals.

Support for employee development and success.

Mutual trust between employee and supervisor.

Clear communication of the annual rating and understanding of how it is derived.

Impact of effectively rewarding performance.

Supports the success of both the employee and the organization.

Fosters supervisor-employee trust and positive interactions.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 3 Hrs
Conflict Resolution.svgConflict Resolution.svg

In this course you will learn that conflict resolution is the method in which two or more parties work toward a solution to a problem. The Committed parties members involved work together to achieve a solution that solves the problem in a way that is productive.

Committed parties try to resolve the conflicts by actively communicating information about their conflicting motives or ideas to the rest of the group. At your work you may need to engage in conflict resolution with a client or team member. In organizations, conflict is expected, and good conflict management tools are needed to succeed at the best solution that solves the problem.

Three Tips for Better Conflict Resolution: Learn three ways to help resolve conflicts.

Four Types of Communication in Conflict: In this activity, you will practice choosing assertive responses to conflict.

The Five Whys: The learner will explore the techniques used to identify cause-and-effect relationships of a particular problem.

A Model for Initiating Conflict Resolution :  you'll identify and write assertive "I" statements that focus on BCF (behavior, consequences, and feelings).

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the importance of Communication in Conflict

Learn the techniques used to identify the cause of a particular problem

Learn three ways to help resolve conflicts.

Course Introduction Video:

 


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Goals and Motivation.svgGoals and Motivation.svg
Four Steps for Setting and Achieving Your Goals: You will learn four steps for good goal setting.

Maintaining Motivation (Your Goals): The learner will explore the challenges commonly faced with remaining motivated and identify the obstacles that cause a loss of motivation.

Motivation important in achieving your goals, it provides you with goals to work towards, helps you solve problems, helps you to change unprofessional behaviours.

Achieving goals requires far more than just hard work and devotion. Therefore, learning how to achieve goals is a matter. When you set a goal, you need first to evaluate its emotional significance. Then it assesses the level of effort it will take to get you there. You need to prioritize the goals that mean the most to you, those that you focus all of your energy on.

In part 3 of this course you will explore Problem-Solving Techniques Teams vs. Individuals: The learner will identify the uses for teams in problem-solving and their qualities.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn steps to setting and achieving Goals 

Identify the process of achieving Goals

Understand obstacles that cause a loss of motivation

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Time Management.svgTime Management.svg

Managing your time is a key element in a successful work environment. This course shows you how you can best organise the time you have available and motivate yourself to use it wisely. Using a quality effective time planner and master list you can accomplish your goal. The typical time management tools and procedures that you should use for maximum productivity and good organization.

In this course you will learn that time management is the process of organizing and planning how to divide your time between different activities. Time management is the ability to use your time productively and efficiently.

Time Management: The learner will assess his or her time management strategies and study habits.

Time Management Matrix: Explore what time management is, how to use a time matrix, and how to put it all together and use our new time management skills to accomplish more during your days.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn what time management is,

Identify new time management skills

Understand how to use a time matrix


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Supply Chain Management.svgSupply Chain Management.svg
In this learning course, you will learn what supply chain management is, four main links that make up the supply chain, and explore examples of how effective supply chain management works.

The Supply chain management is the optimization of a product's creation and flow from raw material sourcing to production, logistics and delivery to the final customer.

The purpose of supply chain management is to operate all supply chain activities both efficiently and professionally, which can also support companies maintain better operations and increase the bottom line.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Transportation and Integration

Operations

Purchasing

Distribution


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Problem Solving.jpgProblem Solving.jpg

Problem solving is the action of defining the problem; defining the reason for the problem; finding, prioritizing, and choosing another possibility for a solution; and implementing a solution.

Problem-solving skills are vital in practically any advanced role you can think of. You will learn how to develop and establish your problem-solving skills, therefore leadership must guide their employees and develop problem-solving techniques. Finding a suitable solution for concerns can be accomplished by following the basic step problem-solving process and methodology outlined below.

Problem Solving - Describing the Problem: The learner will understand how to measure a problem over time by using a common run chart to visualize the gap between past performance and future goals.

Problem Solving - Finding the Root Cause: The learner will understand how to use a cause and effect diagram to find the root cause of a problem.

Go Team Problem-Solving Method for Teams: The learner will apply the GO TEAM method in a team environment to solve a problem.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn the techniques used to identify the cause of a particular problem

Learn ways to describing the problem

Understand the techniques used to solve the problem

Understand the importance of using run chart to visualize the gap between past performance and future goals.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Problem-Solving.svgProblem-Solving.svg

Problem solving is the action of defining the problem; defining the reason for the problem; finding, prioritizing, and choosing another possibility for a solution; and implementing a solution.

Problem-solving skills are vital in practically any advanced role you can think of. You will learn how to develop and establish your problem-solving skills, therefore leadership must guide their employees and develop problem-solving techniques. Finding a suitable solution for concerns can be accomplished by following the basic step problem-solving process and methodology outlined below.

Problem Solving: Using a Decision Matrix: The learner will understand how to use brainstorming and a decision matrix to find the best solution to a problem.

Problem Solving: Using a Flow Chart: You will learn how to us a flow chart to describe the process actions and decisions to find a solution.

Problem Solving: Using a Run Chart: You'll understand how to use a run chart to describe a manufacturing problem.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn the techniques used to identify and use brainstorming and a decision matrix.

Learn ways to describing the problem and to find a solution

Understand the techniques used to solve the problem

Understand the importance of using Flow Chart, Run Chart and Decision Matrix

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
team.jpgteam.jpg

Integrity in the workplace refers to having honest character traits and work ethics, morality, reliability, and trustworthiness. A well-known definition is: Integrity is doing the right thing when no one is watching you.

When an organization has the right culture of integrity, that means employees take their commitments seriously, and eventually, are accountable for their results.

In this course you will find out the team that you belong to, you will learn the characteristics of each to build a stronger team. If you believe you are a participant of a fragmented, conflicted, or smooth- functioning team? Learn the characteristics of each to build a stronger team.

Integrity in Workplace: The learner will identify the qualities of a person with integrity and the importance of integrity within a work team.

The course includes Teamwork App test as the learner will identify positive team behaviours including respect, reliability, responsibility, and resolve.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn techniques of characteristics to build a stronger team

Identify positive team behaviors 

Understand the importance of integrity within a work team

Understand the importance of the existence of different characteristics in a work-place of people

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Communication.jpgCommunication.jpg

There are various different methods of communication. This includes verbal communication, non-verbal communication.

In the workplace, it is important to have decent communication skills and many businesses will look for applicants with quality communication skills. There are various different methods of communication, employees must consider and use in their daily work communication. The process and methodology outlined below.

Intercultural Communication (Gestures) : The learner will recognize common gestures and identify the meanings associated with those gestures.

Describing the Transactional Communication Mode: In this learning activity you'll review definitions then match the transactional communication model element with the definition or example.

Perception - Understanding the World Around You: Learn the definition of perception, its process and how it affects communication

*International Communication: In this learning activity you'll discover different communication styles from around the world.

*Nonverbal Communication: Learners read about nonverbal communication. In a drag-and-drop exercise, they evaluate photos of people interacting and determine if the behaviors shown interfere with communication or enhance it.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn techniques of common gestures and meanings

Identify positive team behaviors

Understand the transactional communication Mode.

Understand the importance of communication in workplace

Understand the different communication styles

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Effective Listening.jpgEffective Listening.jpg

Active listening is fundamental in any workplace when we need to communicate well with employees, clients and societies and earn their faith and respect.
Barriers to Active Listening can cause serious problems to any organization. The more you know about barriers, the more you can learn about how to eliminate it. 

This course describes types of Barriers to Active Listening and ineffective listening. It also observes some of the barriers and bad habits of listening, enabling you to address them. It will support you and your team to learn to listen more effectively, and consequently to increase the quality of your professional and personal life.

Seven Barriers to Listening: The learner will identify common barriers to effective listening.

Communicating in the Workplace: Compare the behaviors and situations that interfere with effective communication in the workplace with those that enhance listening skills and career performance.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the how to enhance listening skills and career performance

Understand obstacles that effect communication

Identify the common barriers to effective listening


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
time management.svgtime management.svg

Time management is the organization of responsibilities and activities to maximize the effectiveness of team and employee’s efforts. Basically, the purpose of time management is enabling teams to get better team effectiveness and enhanced work quality in less time. 

However, the team effectiveness is the ability of your team, usually with complementary skills, to work together to achieve the best results, therefore, powerful effective teams are able to inspire each other and work together to solve problems, which leads to better results.

In this course you will explore that “time is money” which is commonly used in business and industry. Managing your time efficiently and effectively is critical to your work performance and your personal satisfaction. It’s also important to your employer and your customers. Clients won’t pay extra for your wasted time and your boss won’t keep you around for very long if you’re not using your time wisely. The learner will identify individual roles that help teams accomplish goals and improve your time management skills and get more time back for you.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn the techniques and ability used to managing your time efficiently and effectively 

Understand obstacles that effect performance

Understand individual roles that help teams accomplish goals.

Understand how to enhance your team time management and effectiveness

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Communication  Being Human.svgCommunication Being Human.svg

There are many Barriers to Critical Thinking, this barriers could be broken down into four basic categories 

  1. Communication
  2. Being Human
  3. People-Related Obstacles
  4. Errors in Judgment

In this course part 1 we will examine Barriers to Critical Thinking and Overcoming  Barriers to Critical Thinking (Being Human)

The learner will explore basic human limitations that create barriers to critical thinking including selective thinking, false memories, and perceptual limitations.

The learner will identify ways to overcome barriers to critical thinking and problem-solving including false memories, personal biases and prejudices, and physical and emotional hindrances.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand barriers related to problems

Understand obstacles that cause barriers to critical thinking 

Understand the importance of  problem-solving 

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
thinking.pngthinking.png

There are many Barriers to Critical Thinking, this barriers could be broken down into four basic categories 

  1. Communication
  2. Being Human
  3. People-Related Obstacles
  4. Errors in Judgment

In this course part 2 we will examine People Related Obstacles and Overcoming Barriers to Critical Thinking People Related Obstacles:

People Related Obstacles: The learner will identify barriers to critical thinking related to internal and external factors after viewing scenarios. 

Overcoming Barriers to Critical Thinking_ People-Related Obstacles: The learner will identify techniques to use to overcome people-related barriers to critical thinking.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand barriers to critical thinking

Understand obstacles to internal and external factors 

Explore how to overcoming Barriers to Critical Thinking

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Communication and Judgment..svgCommunication and Judgment..svg

There are many Barriers to Critical Thinking, this barriers could be broken down into four basic categories 

  1. Communication
  2. Being Human
  3. People-Related Obstacles
  4. Errors in Judgment

In this course part 3 we will examine Communication and Errors in Judgment.

The first activity will examine communication: several of the barriers related to problems with communication.

The second activity will examine errors in judgment: The learners will explore the Errors in Judgment: Barriers to Critical Thinking and how it affects their decision-making processes.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand obstacles that cause barriers to critical thinking 

Understand the importance of decision-making processes

Explore what is Errors in Judgment

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Teamwork Outside the Box.pngTeamwork Outside the Box.png

In today's dynamic work environment, traditional teamwork approaches may not always suffice. "Teamwork Outside the Box" is designed to equip you with innovative strategies to enhance collaboration and productivity within diverse teams. This course explores unconventional methods to foster creativity, adaptability, and synergy among team members. By challenging the status quo, you will learn how to leverage different perspectives, drive innovation, and achieve outstanding results. Whether you are a team leader or a team member, this course will provide you with the tools to think creatively and work effectively in any team setting.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Innovative Collaboration Techniques

Enhancing Team Creativity

Leveraging Diverse Perspectives

Adaptive Problem-Solving Strategies

Building Synergy and Cohesion

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
business.svgbusiness.svg

The learner will become familiar with eight principles of collaborative leadership to build a team where members find satisfaction and reward in their job.

The learner will be introduced to the eight principles of leaderless teams and learn how these principles can be applied to create a positive work environment. 

This course includes an effective flashcard testing approach.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

What leaderless team is?

Understand the eight principle of leaderless team.

Implementation of eight principle of leaderless team.



Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Leadership and Management.jpgLeadership and Management.jpg

In today's dynamic business environment, the roles of leadership and management are often intertwined yet distinctly different. This course, "Distinguishing Leadership and Management," is designed to help professionals understand the unique qualities and functions of each role. Participants will explore the theoretical and practical aspects of leadership and management, learning how to effectively navigate both to drive organizational success. By the end of the course, you will understand what a leader is versus what a manager is, as well as what leadership entails compared to management. Through interactive discussions, case studies, and practical exercises, attendees will gain insights into how to balance and leverage the strengths of leadership and management within their teams and organizations.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Key Differences between Leadership and Management

Role Functions of Leaders and Managers

Understanding the Leader vs. Manager Dynamic

Comprehensive Insight into Leadership and Management

Enhanced Decision-Making Capabilities and Strategies


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 2 Hrs
optical.jpgoptical.jpg
Active listening is a communication technique that involves fully concentrating, understanding, responding, and remembering what is being said. It goes beyond merely hearing words to understanding the emotions and intentions behind them. By practicing active listening, individuals can build stronger relationships both personally and professionally. This approach fosters trust, demonstrates empathy, and reduces misunderstandings. Active listening involves maintaining eye contact, nodding, providing feedback, and asking clarifying questions. Ultimately, it helps create a supportive environment where people feel valued and understood, leading to deeper, more meaningful connections...
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Techniques for Active Listening.

Building Trust and Empathy.

Reducing Misunderstandings and Conflicts.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: No
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 5-15 min
people.jpgpeople.jpg

Effective communication is a cornerstone of successful relationships, yet many of us struggle with listening. "Double Trouble with Listening" is a comprehensive course designed to tackle the common challenges associated with listening. This course will delve into the barriers that impede effective listening and provide practical solutions to overcome them. Through interactive sessions and real-life scenarios, you will learn how to enhance your listening skills, improve your ability to understand and retain information, and foster better communication in both personal and professional settings. Get ready to transform your listening habits and reduce misunderstandings.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Identifying Listening Barriers

Techniques for Improved Listening

Enhancing Information Retention

Strategies for Effective Communication

Overcoming Misunderstandings

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
borador.jpgborador.jpg

Understanding the difference between needs and wants is crucial for effective decision-making and resource management. "Needs Vs. Wants" is a course designed to help you distinguish between essential needs and desirable wants in various aspects of life, from personal finances to business strategy. This course will guide you through the principles of prioritization and resource allocation, ensuring you can make informed choices that align with your goals and values. Through practical exercises and case studies, you will learn to apply these concepts in real-world scenarios, leading to more strategic and fulfilling outcomes.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Distinguishing Between Needs and Wants

Principles of Prioritization

Effective Resource Allocation

Strategic Decision-Making

Applying Concepts in Real-World Scenarios

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Risk management.jpgRisk management.jpg

Recent decades have seen an array of news stories where risk management failings have undermined an organisation and dented the credibility of its management. These failings have led to the demise of some companies – for example Lehman Brothers, World Com and Enron. Worse than this in many instances the failings have resulted in deaths and injuries – as with the Piper Alpha oil platform disaster in the North Sea in 1988 or the BP Deepwater Horizon explosion and oil spill in 2010.

Successful organisations embed a culture of risk management in all areas of their activities. To achieve this requires effective and practical risk management education. The course particularly benefits all those engaged as risk managers, those seeking to develop their risk management capabilities and those, like board members, who have ultimate responsibility for risks within their organisations. Additionally all those with, or seeking, a career in management in any organisation will benefit from the understanding of risks and how to manage them.

This eight-session course examines how to practise good risk analysis and then apply successful processes to manage it. The course is supported by case studies and audio-visual materials to help explain the varied and often complex risk management practices employed at Rolls-Royce and widely elsewhere.

The course is the result of collaboration between The Open University and Rolls-Royce PLC. This collaboration has ensured that contemporary theories about Risk Management are explored within the context of an international company that is required to apply these theories in its business practices.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

identify and understand the risks faced by organisations

know how to assess and measure the impact of risks on organisations

understand the different ways that risks can be managed or mitigated

understand how organisations can apply ‘Enterprise Risk Management’

understand the importance of effective monitoring and reporting of risks.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 24 Hrs
Attitude.jpgAttitude.jpg
The power of boosting your attitude can have a great influence on your life and workforce. Remaining aware of your attitude on daily work can fundamentally improve your life and quality of your work in the long term.

Our attitude plays a big part in our everyday and work lives and can affect how our life may turn out in the future. Having a good attitude, you’ll be a moral person who works hard, and you will live the nice life many would seek.

In this course you will learn how to Boosting Your Attitude: Learners will determine if they are satisfied with their attitudes and then rank tips for regaining a positive disposition in the workplace.

Use Your Learning Style to Boost Your Productivity: Learners will identify their learning styles and practice ways to retain information in class and on the job.
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the importance of regaining a positive disposition in the workplace

Learn how identify learning styles and practice to boost Your productivity

Understand attitudes in the workplace

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
strategic management.jpgstrategic management.jpg

Since the early 2000s, a new language has entered the realm of strategic management. Whereas the field used to talk primarily in terms of value propositions, generic strategies and competitive advantage, more recently, these ideas have been displaced or perhaps, absorbed, within a new language of business models.

Driven by forces such as the knowledge economy, the growth and spread of the Internet, and the emergence of new and powerful mobile technologies such as smartphones, organisations are having to rethink the way they structure their organisations, attract customers, and seek to achieve an advantage in the marketplace. This is happening at a frantic pace as long-established and previously dominant industry players are increasingly being challenged, disrupted and in many cases, beaten by small start-ups that seemingly appear out of nowhere.

In this free course, Business models in strategic management, you will be introduced to the theory and practice of business models as they have developed in strategy literature. In particular, you will explore the emergence of the business model idea, types of business models including those using the internet (e-business models) and how business models can be designed.

Inherent in this course is the idea that, despite being more frequently used in business, business models are not limited to the business context. Neither are they meant for strategic planning in organisations only. Rather they may have wider applications in our lives. For instance, you could apply them for building strategies of your professional development and career growth.


Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Emergence of the Business Model Concept

Types of Business Models

E-Business Models

Designing Business Models

Applications of Business Models Beyond Business

Strategic Planning Using Business Models

Applying Business Models to Professional Development and Career Growth

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 8 Hrs
devops-gd6955d927_640.jpgdevops-gd6955d927_640.jpg
Discovering development management, features the phrase ‘good development management’. As you discover development management, you should all the time be making judgements about the ‘goodness’ – or otherwise – of the development management you encounter. ‘Good’ can be judged from a number of perspectives, including ones that are:

  • practical (How well does it work? Has it achieved what was intended?)
  • political (Who gains? Who loses?)
  • ethical (Is it right? Or wrong?).

I want you to ask, and find answers to, these sorts of questions about the ‘goodness’ of development management. This is because the ‘goodness’ – or otherwise – of development management matters. It matters, in some cases, in terms of life and death. But it matters always in terms of the wellbeing of those touched by it. So the questions are worth asking. And the quest to discover ‘good’ development management is one that is worth undertaking.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Write a working definition of development management

Apply the complexity, emergence, difference (CoDE) framework to selected cases of development management

Develop some initial judgements of ‘good’ development management.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 4 Hrs
writing.jpgwriting.jpg

Quality writing skills are vital for anybody in business. You need them to efficiently communicate with clients, teams, and managers and to sell any ideas, products, or services you are offering.

In this learning course you'll review how to write effective goal statements.

The learner will distinguish effective from ineffective approaches to writing instructions.

The learner will study an effective workplace email being written while a narrator explains the step-by-step process. The learner will distinguish the difference between poorly written and effectively written emails.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Writing Effective Business Emails

Writing Effective Goals for Employee Motivation

Writing Effective Instructions




Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
writing process.jpgwriting process.jpg

The learner will identify the three steps in the writing process and the elements in each step.

Also, students demonstrate an understanding of summary writing by reading step-by-step instructions and then summarizing short paragraphs. Examples of summaries that are poorly written, as well as those that are written well, are included.

App-Test : Written Communication in the Workplace

The learner will identify writing that is appropriate for business communication.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

 Learn three steps in the writing process 

Understanding of summary writing

Understand pr-writing , drafting and editing


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
reading.jpgreading.jpg

This course is to help you determine your current reading speed and to introduce a speed reading tool, Spreeder, a free online Speed eReader designed to improve your reading speed.

Introduction

Spreeder is a free online Speed eReader tool designed to improve your reading speed and thus improve your comprehension, to be able to  improve your reading speed, remove bad habits and improve your comprehension.

You will learn
  • Your current reading speed and comprehension level
  • How to use Spreeder
  • How to create a Spreeder bookmarklet
  • What's your optimum Spreed limit?
  • How to Spreed on the go
  • Compare your reading proficiency
Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
referencing.jpgreferencing.jpg

In this course,  provides a beginner's guide to referencing.

Introduction 

If you haven't referenced before or maybe it's been a while, this course on referencing will include something for everyone; no matter the level. It provides a beginner's guide to referencing, as well as in-depth examples of using the Harvard referencing style for a variety of information sources. The lesson also includes tips and recommendations to help you do it the easy way.

You will learn

  1. Explain the purpose of referencing in academic work
  2. Apply the Harvard referencing style to a variety of contexts
  3. Utilise tools and techniques to improve your accuracy with referencing



Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
social media .jpgsocial media .jpg

This course will help you to start building or develop a great profile on LinkedIn. You will also learn how to connect with others in preparation for seeking job opportunities.

Introduction

LinkedIn is a social network, like FacebookTwitter and Google for your career, creating your professional identity. It is your online CV and needs to evolve as you obtain new skills, qualifications and jobs. LinkedIn is the first point of call for over 80% of recruiters.

You will learn
  • What is LinkedIn?
  • Why should I use it? 
  • How to create a LinkedIn profile
  • How to make connections
  • How to claim your unique URL


Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
Freebies.jpgFreebies.jpg

In this course, learn how benefits from the available discounts as well as free access to different tools and offers.

Introduction 

Being a student comes with benefits, such as discounts with top retailers and restaurants, as well as free access to all of the Office desktop apps for home use, including Word, PowerPoint, and Excel. In this course, we will be taking you through all the websites and apps you need in your student toolkit.

You will learn
  • How to access student offers and discounts
  • How to install Office tools for free
  • How to be a Prime Student
  • Must have add-ins and apps
Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Learning Tools.pngLearning Tools.png

In this course, learn the best use of Windows 10 settings, office and MS Edge

Introduction 
If you are going to be spending lots of hours working on a computer, you should know how to change a few settings to make sure that everything on the screen is easy to read.
If you prefer to have text read aloud, or you prefer to speak rather than type, we have a couple of tools which you may find useful.

It's a good idea to establish your preferred way of working early on because it will make completing your assignments easier and much more comfortable.

You will learn?

  • How to turn off the noise and distractions to improve study time with one click in MS Edge
  • How to improve your reading and writing skills with Immersive Reader
  • How to personalise your experience with Windows 10 settings 
  • How to talk rather than type with the Dictate tool
  • How to keep your paper/whiteboard notes in your pocket with Office Lens

Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 45-60 min
digital.jpgdigital.jpg

This course will support you to think about how you use technology, and how you can have a balanced relationship with it.

Introduction 
Do you feel like you're in control of technology, or is technology in control of you?   

We all use technology every day as part of our lives, but for some of us, this can take over our lives. In some instances, it can become addictive and harmful to your wellbeing and the wellbeing of others.

You will learn?

  • What is Digital Wellbeing?

  • How technology can affect your wellbeing and other peoples

  • How to deal with technology overload



Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
data.jpgdata.jpg

Learn about How do I know that my data is secure? How do I keep data safe? Data is all around you; there's no escaping it!. This course is ideal for beginners.

Introduction 

This course will help you to find out the answers to the two questions above and also give you ideas on how to become digitally responsible so that you keep your data and the data of others safe.

What will I learn?

  • What is Data Security?

  • Common problems with security

  • How to keep yourself safe whilst using technology

  • Introduction to iDEA award


Levelالمستوى: Beginnerمبتدئ
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: No
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
house.jpghouse.jpg
In this course, learn about prefabricated roof components

Introduction 
A timber roof truss is a structural framework designed to span the space above a room and to provide support for a roof.
Trusses occur at regular intervals, linked together with longitudinal timbers such as purlins. The space between each truss is called a bay. A truss looks like a triangle or arch which creates the profile shape of the roof. Trusses are connected together by means of bolts which are passed through toothed plates and strapped together.

The benefits of being able to standardise the qualities and features of a finished product will always maximise efficiencies in the use of materials and their costs.

You will learn 

  1. Triple roofs
  2. Trussed rafter construction
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
roofs.jpgroofs.jpg

In this course, learn about flat roof structures and construction.

Introduction 

In a flat roof, the waterproofing is always supported by a structural roof deck. This is usually a timber boarding of some type, which in turn is supported on joists. The ceiling, if any, is usually fixed directly to the underside of the joists.
Garages may be un-insulated, but most roofs above the habitable part of the house are insulated to comply with Building Regulations.
In houses, the insulation is sometimes placed immediately above the ceiling (and below the roof deck), or above the roof deck (beneath the waterproof covering).

These two design options provide the basis for warm and cold roofs.

You will learn 

  1. Flat roof main elements
  2. Strength and stability
  3. Typical construction
  4. Problems with flat roofs

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Flat roofs course.pngFlat roofs course.png

In this course, learn about flat roof structures and construction.

Introduction 

Flat roofs are the simplest type of roof construction and the cheapest to construct. However, these benefits also have some drawbacks, as they tend to leak and need a lot more maintenance than pitched roofs.
Despite the name, a flat roof is not flat, they are built with a slight pitch, running from the highest level, often abutting another part of the building, away to the lower end, where water run-off is collected in guttering.

The angle of a flat roof is approximately 10°and this translates into a slope ratio of approx. 1:60 to 1:80, i.e. every 60 cm of running length, the drop would be 1 cm.

You will learn 

  1. Flat roof main elements
  2. Strength and stability
  3. Typical construction
  4. Problems with flat roofs

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Roof- course .jpgRoof- course .jpg

In this course learn about understanding roof construction.

Introduction 

The climate conditions can be varied. There are four seasons which are Spring, Summer, Autumn and Winter, and each season can bring their own challenges for our roofing systems.

Most roofs are pitched because of the climate and this allows water, snow and ice to drain away. This helps to maintain the various types of roofing materials and limits the maintenance of the structure. Pitched roofs are effective and allow moisture to disperse and be taken away. Elements such as snow and rain can damage roofing materials, so the pitched roof is vital.

A roofing system is not only a way of removing unwanted snow or water but can also provide stability to a building. Later on we will look at various types of roofs and identify their pitch and shape.

A large percentage of buildings in the UK have a flat roof system. However, a flat roof system would need to be self-supporting and also be able to support any additional weight that is gained by either rain or snow. A flat roof would benefit from a slight camber e.g. up to ten degrees.

Prefabricated roof systems are ready made or in kit form, whereas traditional or modern are cut and made on-site.

You will learn 

  1. Climate and considerations
  2. Stability through structure
  3. The anatomy of a roof
  4. Types of roofing
  5. Roofing coverings
  6. Roofing components

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Energy Efficiency.pngEnergy Efficiency.png

In this course, learn about the benefits of thermal insulation and how it works in roof spaces.

Introduction 

Thermal insulation has key benefits for protecting the environment; it reduces the amount of energy used from fossil fuels, such as coal, oil, and gas. For this reason, thermal insulation is an important factor in promoting sustainability.
Insulation has the greatest potential for reducing CO2 emissions. Carbon dioxide (i.e. the ‘greenhouse’ gas) is directly linked to global warming as it traps heat within the atmosphere and changes climatic temperatures across the globe.

Energy conserved through the use of insulation far outweighs the energy used in its manufacture. Only when a building achieves a ‘Low-Heat’ standard does insulation’s embodied carbon become significant.

You will learn 

In this course we look at the benefits of thermal insulation and how it works in roof spaces:

  1. Efficiency and effectiveness
  2. Insulation materials
  3. Roofs, attics and lofts
  4. Flat roofs

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Introduction to Test Automation.pngIntroduction to Test Automation.png

The Introduction to Test Automation course is a practical, executive-level foundation programme designed to help software testing professionals understand the strategic role of automation within modern quality assurance environments. Rather than focusing on specific tools or certifications, the course develops a clear conceptual understanding of how automation supports faster delivery, improved consistency, and scalable testing practices across software development lifecycles.

This course is positioned as an essential stepping stone for organisations and individuals who are transitioning from predominantly manual testing approaches to more automated and efficiency-driven testing strategies. Learners gain clarity on where automation delivers genuine value, where it does not, and how informed decisions about automation can reduce risk, control costs, and improve overall product quality.

The training is highly relevant to real-world testing environments, providing a structured understanding of automation concepts that supports progression into tool-specific training, framework adoption, or advanced certification pathways at a later stage. This course does not lead to formal certification; instead, it builds the professional judgement and foundational knowledge required for effective automation adoption.

What’s Included
Instructor-led Introduction to Test Automation training
Accompanying digital course materials
Conceptual frameworks and real-world examples
Guided explanations of automation approaches and techniques.

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive learning experience delivered in an online virtual environment over 1 day, providing approximately 7 hours of guided instruction. The course includes interactive discussion, real-world examples, and structured knowledge development focused on automation fundamentals.
Price aligned with market standards for professional software testing training. Price: From £550 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will develop a clear understanding of what test automation is and how it fits within modern software testing and delivery models.


Learners will be able to distinguish between manual and automated testing approaches and understand where each is most effective.


Learners will gain the ability to evaluate testing scenarios and identify where automation provides genuine business value.


Learners will understand common automation approaches, techniques, and high-level tooling concepts without being tied to a specific product.


Learners will develop informed decision-making skills that support efficient, scalable, and quality-focused testing strategies.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Introductory
  • Duration: Approximately 7 hours
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: Prior experience in software or system testing recommended
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 1 day


Who It’s For
This course is designed for software testers, QA professionals, and test analysts who already have experience in manual or system testing and want to understand automation concepts before progressing to hands-on or tool-specific training. It is also suitable for test leads, QA managers, and technical professionals who need a strategic understanding of automation to support decision-making, team development, or process improvement initiatives.

Exam Information
Exam : Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
Learners should have at least one year of experience working in software or system testing environments. Familiarity with basic programming concepts or scripting languages such as Java or C++ can be beneficial but is not mandatory.

Frequently Asked Questions

Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course and does not provide formal accreditation or certification.

Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

Will I learn specific automation tools such as Selenium?
No. The course focuses on concepts, approaches, and decision-making rather than hands-on training with specific tools.

Is this course suitable as a first step into automation testing?
Yes. It is specifically designed as an introductory programme for professionals considering automation as a next step.

Do I need programming experience to attend?
Programming experience is not required, although basic familiarity with coding concepts may help contextual understanding.

How does this course differ from tool-specific automation training?
This course explains why and when automation should be used, whereas tool-specific training focuses on how to implement automation using particular technologies.

Is this course suitable for experienced automation testers?
No. It is aimed at beginners or those transitioning from manual testing roles.

Will this course help me progress to advanced testing certifications?
Yes. It provides the foundational understanding needed before pursuing advanced or tool-specific certifications.

Is this course relevant for managers or team leads?
Yes. It supports informed decision-making around automation strategy and investment.

Is this course suitable for corporate teams?
Yes. It is commonly used as an entry-level automation awareness programme for testing teams.

Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course study.

Are course materials provided?
Yes. Supporting course materials are included.

Does this course cover Agile or DevOps contexts?
Automation concepts are explained in the context of modern development and delivery environments.

Will I be able to automate tests after completing this course?
No. The course builds understanding, not hands-on automation capabilit.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 7 Hrs
iSQI Selenium 4 Tester Foundation.pngiSQI Selenium 4 Tester Foundation.png

The iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation course builds on foundational automation knowledge to provide participants with the skills, understanding, and formal certification required to design, implement, and maintain automated test solutions using Selenium WebDriver. This international certification is globally recognised and combines conceptual understanding with practical application so that learners can confidently develop and execute reliable automated tests across a range of web applications. Participants explore automation strategy, principles, and best practices as they relate to Selenium 4 and related tools within real-world testing environments. Completion of the course and successful examination demonstrates both knowledge and capability in essential Selenium automation techniques, making this training strategically valuable for test professionals seeking measurable credentialing and enhanced career prospects.

What’s Included
Accredited iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation training
Exam included (Pearson VUE or remote proctor)
Official course materials
Interactive instruction and practical examples
Practice support for exam preparation

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Instructor-led live virtual classroom training covering the full syllabus over three days in an online environment, combining theory and hands-on exercises with formative discussion and exam preparation guidance.
Price: £1,470.00 + VAT for virtual delivery including exam.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will gain the ability to explain core Selenium automation concepts and articulate how automated testing fits into broader quality assurance and DevOps practices.


Learners will be able to design, implement, and maintain automated solutions using Selenium WebDriver with a clear understanding of scripting principles and object locators.


Learners will develop practical skills in creating and executing automated web application tests that are robust, maintainable, and efficient.


Learners will understand how to select appropriate Selenium components and tools such as WebDriver, IDE, and Grid to support parallel and scalable automation.


Learners will be prepared to sit the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation examination and demonstrate measurable competency in automation design and execution,

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation (certification level)
  • Duration: 3 days (approx. 21 hours)
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: General programming knowledge, basic familiarity with Python or Java recommended
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 3 days.
Who It’s For
This course is intended for software testers, automation engineers, developers, and quality assurance professionals who seek internationally recognised certification in Selenium automation. It is suitable for those with some basic programming understanding and testing experience who wish to formalise their automation skills, as well as for practitioners aiming to demonstrate their capability with a credential that supports professional progression.

Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40 multiple choice
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation (iSQI / A4Q recognised)
  • Delivery Method: Online remote proctor or Pearson VUE authorised testing centre
Pre-Course Requirements
Participants should have a general understanding of basic programming concepts and familiarity with either Python or Java syntax. Prior exposure to foundational test automation principles will facilitate learning but is not strictly mandatory.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation course about?
The course introduces the essentials of Selenium automation, teaching participants how to create, execute, and maintain reliable automated tests while understanding tools, strategies, and best practices that enhance testing efficiency.

Can I take this course without coding experience?
Attendees should have a general knowledge of programming and some familiarity with Python or Java to fully engage with the practical aspects of the course, although complete beginners may still benefit from foundational portions.

Will this course enhance my career prospects?
Yes. The certification demonstrates recognised automation skills that can support roles such as software tester, automation engineer, or quality assurance specialist.

Is hands-on practice included?
The course combines theoretical understanding with practical training exercises that reinforce key concepts.

Is there pre-course work required?
No mandatory pre-course assignments are required, although preparation with basic programming and test automation principles will help learners.

Does the price include the exam?
Yes, the listed course price for virtual delivery includes the certification exam.

Can I take the exam remotely?
Yes. The exam can be conducted via remote proctoring or at a Pearson VUE test centre, depending on availability and learner preference.

Do I receive an internationally recognised certificate?
Yes. Upon passing the exam you receive the iSQI Certified Selenium 4 Tester Foundation certification, recognised globally.

What languages are used in the course?
The syllabus commonly references Python and Java as examples for Selenium automation scripts.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
Introduction to Risk Based Testing.pngIntroduction to Risk Based Testing.png

The Introduction to Risk Based Testing course provides a structured and practical understanding of how risk management principles are applied within software testing and wider IT projects. This course is designed to help professionals prioritise testing effort based on risk, enabling teams to focus resources where failures would have the greatest business, technical, or operational impact.

Through this two-day skills-based programme, learners develop a clear understanding of how risks are identified, analysed, and mitigated throughout the software development lifecycle. The course demonstrates how risk-based testing improves efficiency, supports better decision-making, and contributes to the delivery of more robust and reliable software solutions.

This training does not lead to formal certification; instead, it equips participants with practical knowledge and techniques that can be applied immediately within real-world testing and project environments.

What’s Included
  • Instructor-led Introduction to Risk Based Testing training
  • Accompanying digital course materials
  • Practical explanations of risk management concepts
  • Real-world examples applied to software testing contexts

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of guided instruction. The course includes interactive discussion, applied examples, and structured exploration of risk-based testing techniques.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the role of risk management within software development and software testing activities.


Learners will be able to explain the three stages of risk management: identification, analysis, and mitigation.


Learners will understand how risk-based testing is applied at both individual component level and across entire software projects.


Learners will develop the ability to prioritise testing effort based on risk exposure and business impact.


Learners will gain practical insight into applying risk management techniques to improve testing effectiveness and efficiency.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Introductory
  • Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for software testers, test analysts, test engineers, test consultants, and test managers who want to apply risk-based principles to improve testing outcomes. It is also relevant for user acceptance testers, software developers, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and professionals involved in managing or delivering IT and software development projects.

Exam Information
Exam  :Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for attending this course. However, prior experience working on IT or software development projects is recommended to maximise understanding and practical application.

Frequently Asked Questions

How does risk management improve software development and testing?
Risk management helps teams focus effort on the areas most likely to cause failure or business impact, improving efficiency, reducing defects, and supporting better delivery decisions.

Are there any prerequisites for the Introduction to Risk Based Testing course?
No formal prerequisites are required, although experience in IT or software projects is beneficial.

How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as a live virtual classroom programme over two consecutive days.

What are the benefits of completing this course?
Learners gain practical skills to prioritise testing effort, manage uncertainty, and improve the effectiveness of software testing activities.

Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.

Does the course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

Is this course suitable for managers and non-testers?
Yes. The course is relevant for professionals involved in project delivery, quality management, and decision-making roles.

Can these techniques be applied outside software testing?
Yes. Risk management principles covered in the course are applicable across wider IT and project management contexts.

Is there any pre-course work required?
No. There is no mandatory pre-course study.

Will completing this course help me increase my wages or salary potential?
Completing the Introduction to Risk Based Testing training can enhance your professional profile and demonstrate that you understand risk-driven testing approaches, which is valued by employers and can contribute to stronger performance reviews and improved negotiation position for salary progression.

What kind of job roles might offer higher wages after gaining skills from this course?
Roles such as Senior Test Analyst, Test Lead, QA Manager, Quality Assurance Consultant, and Project Test Coordinator often value risk-based testing expertise, and professionals in these positions frequently command higher wages compared to entry-level testing roles because of their strategic contribution to testing effectiveness.

Is risk-based testing knowledge recognised by employers in the UK and internationally?
Yes. Risk-based testing is widely recognised as a key competence in both UK and international software quality assurance practices, and many organisations explicitly list risk management and prioritisation skills in job descriptions, making this knowledge attractive to recruiters and hiring managers.

Can this course help me transition from a technical role into a managerial or leadership position?
Yes. The focus on risk prioritisation, quality decision-making, and strategic testing application in this course supports the development of leadership capabilities, which can be beneficial for individuals aiming to progress from technical testing roles into management, team leadership, or project coordination positions.

Does risk-based testing expertise typically lead to higher salaries compared to general manual testing roles?
Yes. Professionals who can apply risk-based testing principles are often viewed as higher-value contributors because they help organisations prioritise testing effort, reduce project risk, and improve delivery outcomes. As a result, roles that require risk-based decision-making and testing leadership responsibilities typically attract higher salaries than purely execution-focused manual testing positions.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Introduction to User Acceptance Testing.pngIntroduction to User Acceptance Testing.png

The Introduction to User Acceptance Testing course provides a comprehensive understanding of how UAT differs from other forms of software testing and why it is critical to delivering systems that truly meet business and user needs. The course explains where UAT sits within the software development lifecycle, who is responsible for conducting it, and how it supports effective decision-making before systems are released into live environments.

This course explores UAT across a range of delivery models, including traditional waterfall, V-model, and Agile projects. Learners develop practical skills in UAT planning, estimation, execution, and defect management, enabling them to bridge the gap between technical delivery teams and business stakeholders. The focus is on ensuring software solutions align with real-world user expectations and organisational objectives.

This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation or exam.

What’s Included
  • Instructor-led Introduction to User Acceptance Testing training
  • Accompanying course materials
  • Practical exercises focused on UAT planning, execution, and reporting
  • Hands-on examples aligned to real-world UAT scenarios

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of immersive, skills-based learning. The course combines theory, discussion, and practical activities to build confidence in managing and executing effective UAT processes.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the importance of user acceptance testing throughout all stages of software development.


Learners will be able to establish clear responsibilities between users, testers, and developers.


Learners will apply a risk-based approach to UAT activities.


Learners will be able to create a structured UAT plan.


Learners will define measurable and testable acceptance criteria.


Learners will identify the most common testing techniques used in UAT.


Learners will select appropriate UAT techniques based on system type and business risk.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Introductory / Foundation
  • Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days

Who It’s For
This course is designed for Software Testers, Project Managers, Business Analysts, Business Managers, and other professionals involved in user acceptance testing in management, operational, or support roles. It is particularly valuable for those responsible for ensuring systems meet business and user expectations prior to release.

Exam Information
Exam : Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No pre-course work is required.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is user acceptance testing (UAT)?
User acceptance testing is the final phase of testing where users or business representatives validate that a system meets agreed requirements and is fit for purpose before release.

Who is this course designed for?
The course is suitable for testers, business analysts, project managers, and business stakeholders involved in validating software against user and business needs.

Is the Introduction to User Acceptance Testing course accredited?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.

How will this course help with my career?
The course strengthens practical UAT skills that are highly valued in testing, business analysis, and project delivery roles, particularly in organisations delivering business-critical systems.

How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training over two days.

Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

What salary impact can UAT skills have?
In the UK, professionals with UAT responsibilities typically earn between £35,000 and £55,000 per year, with senior UAT analysts and business-facing testing roles earning £60,000 or more, depending on experience and sector.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Introduction to Test Engineering.pngIntroduction to Test Engineering.png
The Introduction to Test Engineering course is designed for individuals looking to start or transition into a career in software testing. It provides a clear and structured foundation in the principles, practices, and techniques used by test engineers across modern software development environments, including traditional, Agile, and DevOps delivery models.

This course introduces learners to systematic testing approaches, focusing on how testing activities integrate throughout the software development lifecycle. Learners gain practical exposure to test design, execution, defect reporting, and working with user stories, enabling them to contribute effectively to testing activities within real project teams.

This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation or exam.

What’s Included
Instructor-led Introduction to Test Engineering training
Accompanying course materials
Practical exercises focused on test design, execution, and defect reporting
Hands-on examples aligned to real-world testing scenarios.

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of structured, skills-based learning. The course combines theory, discussion, and practical activities to build confidence in core test engineering skills.
Price: £700.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £58.33 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will be able to identify and report issues found in user stories.


Learners will design effective tests based on specific requirements.


Learners will record test execution results using session sheets.


Learners will verify software functionality against defined acceptance criteria.


Learners will document and raise defects with sufficient detail to support resolution.


Learners will understand how user stories support test case development.


Learners will apply structured test design techniques to improve software quality.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Introductory / Foundation
  • Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days

Who It’s For
This course is aimed at individuals looking to start a career in software testing, including apprentices, people new to testing, and professionals seeking cross-functional training. It is also suitable for those working alongside testing teams who want to better understand structured testing practices.

Exam Information
Exam : Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required for this training. No prior testing experience is necessary.

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does the Introduction to Test Engineering course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two days in a live virtual classroom format.

What are user stories in software testing?
User stories describe system functionality from an end-user perspective and are used by testers to design and validate tests against acceptance criteria.

How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training, combining explanation, discussion, and practical exercises.

What career opportunities does this course support?
This course supports entry-level and junior roles such as Software Tester, Junior Test Engineer, QA Assistant, and Testing Apprentice.

Is this course accredited or certified?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.

Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

Can this course help me move into Agile or DevOps environments?
Yes. The course introduces testing concepts applicable across traditional, Agile, and DevOps development models.

What salary can I expect after developing these skills?
In the UK, entry-level software testing roles typically offer salaries between £23,000 and £32,000 per year. With experience, test engineers commonly progress to roles earning £35,000 to £50,000 per year, depending on industry and responsibility.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Testing Test Techniques - Foundation Level.pngTesting Test Techniques - Foundation Level.png

The Test Techniques – Foundation Level course provides a structured introduction to the most widely used software test design techniques. It is designed to help learners understand how to design effective test cases that deliver meaningful coverage within the practical constraints of real-world projects.

The course focuses primarily on black-box testing techniques while introducing key white-box concepts, giving learners a balanced foundation for understanding how tests are derived from requirements, business processes, and system structure. Emphasis is placed on practical application, enabling learners to confidently select and apply appropriate test techniques based on system type, complexity, and risk.

This is a skills-based course with no formal accreditation or exam. It is commonly used as a foundation for progression into more advanced testing roles or advanced-level test techniques training.

What’s Included
  • Instructor-led Test Techniques – Foundation Level training
  • Practical group exercises and discussions
  • Model answers to reinforce correct technique application
  • Hands-on examples of test case design and coverage measurement

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Interactive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of structured, skills-based learning. The course combines explanation, discussion, and practical exercises to support the development of core test design competence.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand formal techniques used to design effective test cases.


Learners will gain experience applying commonly used black-box and introductory white-box test design techniques.


Learners will be able to select appropriate test techniques for different systems and contexts.


Learners will understand how risk influences the choice of test techniques.


Learners will learn how test techniques are used to create test cases and measure test coverage.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days

Who It’s For
This course is aimed at professionals involved in software testing who want to improve the quality and effectiveness of the tests they design. It is suitable for junior testers, testers moving into more structured testing roles, developers involved in testing, and professionals seeking a solid grounding in test design techniques.

Exam Information
Exam: Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no pre-course requirements for this training. The course is suitable for learners new to formal test design techniques as well as those seeking to strengthen their foundational knowledge.

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does the Test Techniques – Foundation Level course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two days in a live virtual classroom format.

What is test design?
Test design is the process of defining and structuring test cases to ensure that software behaviour is validated efficiently and effectively against requirements and risks.

Do I need prior experience in software testing to attend this course?
No. This course does not require prior testing experience and is suitable for beginners.

What topics are covered in this course?
Topics include the test process, core test design techniques, process and state-based testing, structural testing, and selecting appropriate test techniques.

How is this course delivered?
The course is delivered as live, instructor-led virtual classroom training with interactive exercises and discussions.

What career paths are available after completing this course?
This course supports progression into roles such as Software Tester, Test Analyst, QA Engineer, and provides a foundation for advanced test techniques or specialist testing training.

Is this course accredited or certified?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.

Does this course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

Can this course help me progress to advanced testing courses?
Yes. This course is commonly used as preparation for advanced-level test techniques training.

What salary range is typical for professionals using these skills?
In the UK, entry-level and junior testing roles typically earn between £25,000 and £35,000 per year, while testers with strong test design skills often progress to roles earning £40,000 to £55,000 per year, depending on experience and industry.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Test Techniques - Advanced Level.pngTest Techniques - Advanced Level.png

The Test Techniques – Advanced Level course is a specialist, skills-based programme designed for experienced software testing professionals who want to deepen their expertise in advanced test design and analysis techniques. The course focuses on both black-box and white-box testing approaches as they are applied to code, decision logic, and business processes, enabling learners to design more effective, risk-aware, and standards-aligned test cases.

This advanced training aligns with recognised software testing standards, including ISO/IEC/IEEE 29119 and the BCS Software Component Testing Standard, ensuring that techniques are applied in a structured and industry-accepted manner. Through intensive practical examples and guided analysis, learners develop the judgement required to select the most appropriate test techniques for different systems, levels of risk, and delivery contexts.

The course does not lead to formal certification; instead, it strengthens professional capability and supports progression into senior testing, quality assurance, and test leadership roles where advanced analytical skills are essential.

What’s Included
  • Instructor-led Test Techniques – Advanced Level training
  • Practical exercises supported by model answers
  • Advanced test design and analysis examples
  • Application of standards-aligned testing techniques

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by an experienced industry trainer
Immersive instructor-led training delivered in an online virtual environment over 2 days, providing approximately 14 hours of advanced skills-based instruction. The course includes applied exercises, structured analysis, and expert guidance on selecting and applying test techniques effectively.
Price: £675.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £56.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will be able to apply static analysis techniques to identify test objectives and testing risks.


Learners will develop the ability to apply structure-based and white-box test design techniques to code and logic flows.


Learners will be able to apply black-box testing techniques to business processes using use-cases and scenarios.


Learners will understand how to select appropriate test techniques based on system type, complexity, and risk exposure.


Learners will gain the ability to design test cases that support effective coverage measurement and quality assurance decision-making.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Advanced
  • Duration: 2 days (approximately 14 hours)
  • Exam Duration: Not applicable
  • Pass Mark: Not applicable
  • Prerequisites: Test Techniques – Foundation Level or equivalent knowledge
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 2 days

Who It’s For
This course is intended for software testers, test analysts, test engineers, and QA professionals who are actively involved in designing and reviewing test cases and want to improve the quality, depth, and effectiveness of their testing. It is particularly suitable for practitioners moving into senior testing, specialist, or test leadership roles where advanced analytical techniques are required.

Exam Information
Exam : Not applicable

Pre-Course Requirements
Learners should have completed the Test Techniques – Foundation Level course or possess equivalent practical knowledge and experience in software testing concepts and test design techniques.

Frequently Asked Questions

How long does the Test Techniques – Advanced Level course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two consecutive days in a live virtual classroom format.

Do I need prior experience in software testing to enrol on this course?
Yes. This is an advanced course and is intended for professionals with prior testing experience or equivalent foundational knowledge.

What topics are covered in this course?
Topics include static and dynamic testing fundamentals, flow and call graph analysis, advanced white-box techniques, black-box testing using use-cases, and selecting appropriate test techniques based on risk and context.

How will this course benefit my career?
The course strengthens advanced analytical and test design skills that are commonly required in senior testing, QA specialist, and test leadership roles.

Can this course help me move into a senior or lead testing role?
Yes. The advanced techniques covered support progression into roles with greater responsibility for test strategy, coverage, and quality assurance decisions.

Is this an accredited or certified course?
No. This is a skills and knowledge-based course with no formal accreditation.

Does the course include an exam?
No. There is no exam associated with this course.

What kind of salary can I expect with advanced test techniques skills?
In the UK, experienced software testers and QA professionals typically earn between £40,000 and £55,000 per year. Senior Test Analysts, QA Specialists, and Test Leads with advanced test design and analysis skills often earn between £55,000 and £70,000 per year, with higher salaries possible in London, large enterprises, or specialist consulting roles.

Does advanced test techniques knowledge add value beyond automation skills?
Yes. Advanced test techniques improve test effectiveness and decision-making regardless of whether testing is manual or automated, and are highly valued in complex or high-risk systems.

Is this course suitable for managers or non-technical roles?
The course is primarily aimed at hands-on testing professionals, but managers with strong technical involvement may also benefit.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: No
Timeالوقت: 14 Hrs
Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT).pngCertified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT).png

The ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT) course equips software testers, quality assurance professionals, business analysts, and product owners with the practical expertise required to validate that software meets documented business requirements and stakeholder expectations. Acceptance testing is a critical phase of the software development lifecycle where the focus shifts from defect-based test design to collaboration with business units, product owners, and analysts to define and execute acceptance criteria that reflect real business scenarios. This course blends theoretical frameworks with practical techniques such as acceptance criteria creation, experience-based testing methods, business process modelling, and handling non-functional requirements including usability, performance, and security. By completing this course and successfully passing the ISTQB CT-AcT exam, delegates enhance their ability to ensure software outcomes align with strategic business goals, improve cross-functional team collaboration, and demonstrate internationally recognised competence in acceptance testing. 


What’s Included

  • Accredited TSG CT-AcT training materials
  • Official ISTQB acceptance testing syllabus alignment
  • Exam voucher for the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing certification
  • Interactive scenario-based exercises
  • Tutor support throughout the course
  • Practice exam questions and revision resources
  • Post-course reference materials and guides


Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG

Immersive 2-day accredited course delivered online, approximately 7 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: From £924 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Delegates will understand the foundational principles and business value of acceptance testing within the software lifecycle.


Participants will be able to collaborate effectively with product owners, business analysts, and stakeholders to define clear and testable acceptance criteria.


Learners will develop the ability to write robust acceptance tests that align with business objectives and quality requirements.


Participants will apply experience-based testing techniques to uncover defects that may not be visible through traditional test design methods.


Learners will gain competence in modelling business processes and deriving acceptance tests from those models.


Participants will incorporate non-functional aspects such as usability, performance, and security into acceptance test planning and execution.


Learners will improve their ability to communicate test outcomes and quality insights to both technical and business audiences.


Delegates will integrate acceptance testing practices into Agile, iterative, or traditional delivery models with confidence.


Participants will approach acceptance testing with a risk-aware mindset that balances business priorities with quality assurance needs.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation / Specialist
  • Duration: eLearning 16–20 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 2 days.
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers) 
  • Pass Mark: 65% 
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation certificate required
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom 2 days,.
Who It’s For

This course is ideal for software testers, acceptance testers, QA professionals, test analysts, business analysts, product owners, and anyone involved in validating that software meets stakeholder or contractual requirements. It is particularly relevant for professionals who engage in user acceptance testing (UAT), contractual and regulatory acceptance testing, alpha and beta testing, or those responsible for aligning test activities with business outcomes.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers) 
  • Number of Questions: 40 
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book 
  • Pass Mark: 65% 
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT)]
  • Delivery Method: Online (eLearning), Live Virtual Classroom, or Classroom with Pearson VUE exam booking


Pre-Course Requirements

Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate prior to attending. It is recommended that participants have some practical experience with software testing principles and involvement with acceptance criteria or test execution in business contexts. No mandatory pre-course work is required, though familiarisation with the ISTQB acceptance testing syllabus enhances learning efficiency.


FAQ

What is the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing (CT-AcT) certification?
The CT-AcT certification validates that a professional can design, execute, and evaluate acceptance testing to ensure software meets business requirements and stakeholder expectations.

Who should take the ISTQB Acceptance Testing course?
This course is designed for testers, QA professionals, test analysts, business analysts, and product owners seeking to enhance their acceptance testing skills and ensure business alignment in testing. 

What prerequisites are required for the CT-AcT course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate. Prior practical testing experience is advantageous but not mandatory.

How long is the ISTQB Acceptance Testing course?
The Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats are 2 days, approximately 7 hours per day. eLearning is flexible, typically 16–20 hours of self-paced study. 

Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, all delivery options include the ISTQB Certified Tester Acceptance Testing exam voucher. 

How is the CT-AcT exam structured?
The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions, takes 60 minutes (with extra time for non-native English speakers), and requires a 65% pass mark. 

Can I take the course without sitting the exam?
Yes, delegates may attend for professional development, although formal certification requires passing the exam. 

What practical skills will I gain?
Delegates will learn acceptance test design, stakeholder collaboration, process modelling, experience-based testing, and quality evaluation techniques. 

Does the CT-AcT course cover non-functional testing?
Yes, topics such as usability, performance, and security acceptance tests are included. 

Will this certification help my career?
Yes, the certification demonstrates competency in acceptance testing and improves credibility with employers in quality assurance and cross-functional delivery roles. 

How do I book the exam?
Delegates receive a Pearson VUE voucher and can schedule their exam at a convenient time and location before the voucher expiry. 

Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes, scenario-based exercises and practical examples are integrated into the training to reinforce real-world application.

Is prior business analysis experience useful?
Yes, familiarity with requirements definition, business rules, or stakeholder engagement enhances understanding.

How does acceptance testing fit into Agile processes?
Acceptance testing is essential in Agile for validating user stories against acceptance criteria and ensuring incremental delivery aligns with stakeholder expectations.

What are follow-on certifications after CT-AcT?
Holders may progress to ISTQB Advanced Level qualifications such as Test Analyst, Test Manager, Technical Test Analyst, or specialist streams like Security or Test Automation.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 18 Hrs
ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0.pngISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0.png

The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0 course is a strategic and practical leadership programme designed for experienced software testing professionals aspiring to senior test management roles. This course builds on the foundational principles of the ISTQB Certified Tester scheme to provide advanced competencies in planning, monitoring, controlling, and improving testing activities across the software development lifecycle. Delegates gain deep insight into how to define test strategies that align with organisational objectives, how to lead and motivate test teams, and how to make informed decisions using meaningful quality metrics. Through a blend of expert instruction, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation support, participants will develop the capability to manage complex testing projects, communicate effectively with stakeholders, and embed risk-based decision-making into test management processes. CTAL-TM certification is recognised globally as evidence of leadership in software testing, providing career enhancing value for professionals targeting roles such as Test Manager, QA Manager, Project Manager, or Test Consultant.


What’s Included

  • Accredited ISTQB CTAL-TM training
  • Official course manuals and supporting learning materials
  • Exam voucher included for the ISTQB CTAL-TM exam
  • Scenario-based exercises and practical workshops
  • Tutor guidance throughout the course
  • Practice exam questions and revision resources
  • Post-course support and reference materials


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by TSG 
Self-paced, approximately 30–35 hours, 12-month licence period, with exam included. Price: £1210 + VAT 

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive learning experience, 4-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, approximately 7 hours per day, interactive workshops, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT 

Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person, instructor-led training with classroom exercises, structured discussions, and exam preparation. 4 days, approximately 7 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £2340 + VAT 

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Managers and test leaders will learn to define and implement test strategies that align with organisational goals and project contexts.


Participants will develop the ability to plan, monitor, and control testing activities through the application of established test management processes.


Delegates will be able to analyse stakeholder needs and communicate test status and quality risks clearly and effectively to project sponsors.


Learners will assess risk and incorporate risk-based testing methods into test planning and execution for better resource optimisation.


Participants will acquire skills to build and lead effective test teams, including role definition, skills assessment, and performance improvement.


Delegates will be equipped to prepare detailed test plans, estimate effort and resources, and structure testing tasks to meet deadlines and quality goals.


Learners will gain expertise in reporting test progress using meaningful metrics, dashboards, and status indicators.


Participants will understand defect lifecycle management techniques and how to integrate defect insights into continuous quality improvement processes.


Delegates will contribute to organisational improvement activities by applying process evaluation and optimisation techniques.


Learners will become familiar with test tools that support planning, tracking, reporting, and automation where applicable.


Participants will apply leadership skills to manage test objectives within Agile, DevOps, and hybrid project delivery environments.

Key facts:

Facts

Course Level: Advanced
Duration: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days
Exam Duration: 120 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native English speakers as standard ISTQB policy)
Pass Mark: 65% 
Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certificate required; six months testing or development experience recommended 
Delivery Methods: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days


Who It’s For

This course is designed for experienced testing professionals who are preparing for leadership roles in software testing. It is suitable for Test Managers, Test Leads, Quality Assurance Managers, Project Managers, Product Owners, Scrum Masters, and Senior Test Consultants. The course is also beneficial for professionals who collaborate closely with testing teams and need a strategic understanding of test governance, resource management, and quality risk communication.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 50
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, scenario-based, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) v3.0
  • Delivery Method: Remote proctored or in-centre Pearson VUE exam (voucher included)


Pre-Course Requirements

Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. It is recommended that participants have practical experience in software development or testing, typically at least six months, to maximize understanding and engagement with test management concepts. No mandatory pre-course work is required. ilxgroup.com


FAQ

What is the ISTQB Advanced Level Test Management (CTAL-TM) certification?
The CTAL-TM certification validates advanced competencies in planning, monitoring, controlling, and improving test activities across the software development lifecycle, aligning testing with business goals. istqb.org

Who should take the ISTQB CTAL-TM course?
This course is designed for professionals involved in managing test activities, including Test Managers, Test Leads, QA Managers, Project Managers, and Product Owners, as well as individuals aiming for strategic roles in software quality.

What prerequisites are required for the CTAL-TM course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. A minimum of six months’ testing or software development experience is recommended to fully benefit from the course content. 

How long is the ISTQB CTAL-TM course?
The Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats are 4 days. eLearning is self-paced and typically requires about 30–35 hours of study. 

Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, all delivery options include the ISTQB CTAL-TM exam voucher. 

How is the CTAL-TM exam structured?
The exam includes 50 multiple-choice questions, is 120 minutes long, and requires a 65% pass mark

Can I attend the course without taking the exam?
Yes, you may attend for professional development, though formal certification requires passing the exam.  

What practical skills will I gain?
Delegates will learn strategic test planning, resource management, risk-based testing, metrics reporting, team leadership, and defect lifecycle management. 

Does the course cover Agile and DevOps environments?
Yes, strategic test management in modern delivery environments such as Agile and DevOps is integrated into the syllabus.

Will this certification help my career?
Yes, it provides recognised advanced test management credentials that are valuable for senior QA, test leadership, and project management roles. 

What tools and techniques are discussed?
The course includes methods for planning, tracking, reporting, test process improvement, and defect management, and introduces test tools as appropriate.

Are practical exercises included?
Yes, scenario-based workshops and exercises help reinforce real-world application of test management principles. 

Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the certification is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB and recognised globally.

How do I book the exam?
Delegates receive a Pearson VUE exam voucher and can schedule their exam at a convenient local test centre.

What is the value of a Test Management certification?
It demonstrates strategic leadership in test governance and enhances credibility in senior testing and quality assurance roles.

What support is available if I need help?
Tutor support, revision resources, and practice questions are provided as part of the course materials.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 35Hrs
ISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT-SEC).pngISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT-SEC).png

The ISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT‑SEC) course is an advanced certification designed for software testing professionals seeking specialist expertise in security testing. This course equips delegates with the knowledge and skills required to identify vulnerabilities, manage security risks, and enhance software resilience in both traditional and Agile development environments.

Through structured instruction, hands-on exercises, and practical examples, participants will gain a deep understanding of how to integrate security testing into the software development lifecycle. Delegates will explore human error mitigation, external threat management, and secure development practices to ensure software systems are robust and compliant with industry security standards.

By the end of the course, participants will be prepared to take the ISTQB Security Tester certification exam, demonstrating their ability to apply advanced security testing techniques, lead security testing initiatives, and contribute to organisational software security strategies. The CT‑SEC certification is internationally recognised, providing career advancement opportunities in high-demand security roles.

What’s Included

  • Accredited Security Tester training
  • Exam fee included
  • Comprehensive course materials and manuals
  • Practical exercises and scenario-based learning
  • Tutor support throughout the course
  • Access to practice exams and simulations

Delivery Options & Pricing

Virtual – Delivered by TSG
Interactive online learning with expert tutors, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: 4 days. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £2100 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Duration: 4 days. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £2340 + VAT

eLearning – Delivered by TSG
Self-paced online learning with full access to course materials and the certification exam. Duration: variable. Exam included. Course materials included. Price: From £995 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Participants will be able to evaluate system vulnerabilities and design test strategies that mitigate potential risks.


Delegates will apply security testing techniques across the software development lifecycle, including integration with Agile and DevOps practices.


Learners will assess human errors and lapses in testing procedures and implement corrective strategies.


Participants will identify and prioritise security risks, ensuring secure software development.


Delegates will analyse security testing results and communicate findings effectively to stakeholders.


Learners will implement secure practices in software development processes, reducing reliance on technology alone.


Participants will gain practical experience in managing security test infrastructure and tools.


Delegates will integrate security testing into continuous testing and continuous integration pipelines.


Learners will develop skills to lead security testing initiatives within project teams.


Participants will understand regulatory, compliance, and organisational requirements for security testing.


Delegates will monitor and optimise automated and manual security testing activities.


Learners will improve overall software quality by embedding security considerations into test planning and execution.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Security Tester (CT‑SEC)
  • Duration: 3 days (Live Virtual Classroom / Classroom), 20 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certificate; minimum three years of software testing experience recommended
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning 20 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days

Who It’s For

This course is suitable for experienced testers, security testers, test managers, IT security professionals, developers with security responsibilities, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and IT directors. It is ideal for professionals who aim to incorporate advanced security testing practices into their software development and testing processes.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 45 multiple-choice
  • Question Type: Multiple-choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 60%
  • Delivery Method: Online (eLearning), remote proctoring (Live Virtual), in-class (Classroom)

Pre-Course Requirements

Participants must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. It is recommended that delegates have a minimum of three years of practical experience in software testing to fully benefit from the course content.

FAQ

What prerequisites are required for the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate and have a minimum of three years of software testing experience to maximise the benefit of this advanced training.

Who should take the ISTQB Security Tester course?
The course is designed for software testers, security testers, test managers, IT security professionals, developers with security responsibilities, project managers, and QA leads aiming to strengthen security testing expertise.

What is the duration of the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Live Virtual Classroom and Classroom formats run for 3 full days, 7 hours per day. The eLearning option is self-paced and comprises approximately 20 hours of interactive learning.

Is the exam fee included in the course price?
Yes, the ISTQB Security Tester exam fee is included in all delivery formats.

How is the ISTQB Security Tester exam structured?
The exam consists of 45 multiple-choice questions with a pass mark of 60%. The duration is 120 minutes. Non-native English speakers may receive additional time as per ISTQB guidelines.

What will I learn in this course?
Participants will develop advanced skills in identifying system vulnerabilities, designing security test strategies, mitigating human and technical risks, integrating security practices into software development lifecycles, and communicating findings effectively.

Does this course include practical exercises?
Yes, delegates engage in scenario-based exercises, real-world simulations, and practice exams to apply security testing principles.

What are the benefits of obtaining ISTQB Security Tester certification?
It validates advanced security testing competence, enhances career opportunities, and equips professionals to implement secure software development practices.

Can I attend the course without taking the exam?
Yes, the course may be taken for learning purposes, but certification requires passing the ISTQB Security Tester exam.

What tools and techniques are taught?
Delegates will use industry-standard security testing tools, risk assessment frameworks, and methods for evaluating vulnerabilities and optimising testing strategies.

Does this course cover regulatory and compliance requirements?
Yes, participants learn to align security testing practices with organisational policies, legal obligations, and industry standards.

Is prior security experience required?
While a foundation in software testing is required, the course introduces advanced security testing concepts suitable for delegates with limited prior exposure to security-specific practices.

Can this course support career progression?
Yes, it prepares professionals for roles such as Security Tester, Security Analyst, Test Manager, and other security-focused positions.

How do I register for the ISTQB Security Tester course?
Participants can register online or by contacting the ILX or DrTutor team, who will provide guidance on course options and scheduling.

Are there follow-on certifications after CT‑SEC?
Yes, participants may pursue ISTQB Advanced Level Test Manager, Technical Test Analyst, or Specialist certifications, including Security Testing or Agile streams.

Is this course internationally recognised?
Yes, the ISTQB Security Tester certification is accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB and recognised worldwide.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 40Hrs
ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA) v4.0.pngISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA) v4.0.png

The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA) course provides experienced testers with the specialist analytical capabilities required to design, implement, and optimise high-value testing activities across complex software environments. This advanced-level programme strengthens your ability to evaluate quality risks, engineer effective test conditions, and apply structured, evidence-based testing techniques aligned with industry best practice.

The course integrates the depth of the TSG programme with the proven ILX training methodology, ensuring complete alignment with the official ISTQB Advanced Level Test Analyst syllabus. Delegates develop mastery in defect classification, risk-based testing, requirements evaluation, behavioural testing approaches, and test design techniques that improve coverage and reduce rework. Throughout the training, learners work through realistic scenarios, structured exercises, and exam-style questions to reinforce application in real-world contexts.

By completing this course, professionals elevate their capability to support complex test strategies, contribute effectively to Agile, DevOps, and traditional project environments, and influence software quality decisions across teams. The certification is internationally recognised and forms a key milestone in the ISTQB Advanced career pathway. Delegates finish fully prepared to sit the ISTQB CTAL-TA exam and demonstrate advanced analytical testing expertise to employers worldwide.


What’s Included

  • Accredited training manual
  • Official ISTQB CTAL-TA syllabus reference
  • TSG and ILX combined course materials
  • Exam simulator with sample questions
  • Scenario-based test design exercises
  • Expert tutor support during training
  • Full revision and exam preparation sessions
  • ISTQB CTAL-TA exam voucher
  • Accredited certificate upon passing the exam
  • Course completion confirmation for CPD records


Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by ILX-TSG with DrTutor support
Self-paced, approximately 30–35 hours of study, with 12-month access period, exam included. Price: £1210 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by ILX
Immersive learning experience, 3-day accredited course delivered online, 7 hours per day, including interactive workshops, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT

(Classroom delivery not available for this qualification under ILX or TSG at this time.)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Delegates will be able to analyse software quality risks and design targeted test conditions using advanced risk-based testing methods.


Delegates will apply behavioural test design techniques such as decision tables, state transition testing, and boundary value analysis to improve coverage and defect detection.


Delegates will conduct structured requirements reviews using analytical techniques to identify ambiguities, gaps, inconsistencies, and defects prior to testing.


Delegates will classify, prioritise, and track defects effectively using industry-standard classification models and reporting practices.


Delegates will contribute to integration, system, acceptance, and usability testing through well-engineered test scenarios and end-to-end coverage design.


Delegates will support Agile and iterative delivery models by analysing user stories, evaluating acceptance criteria, and contributing to collaborative test activities.


Delegates will measure, monitor, and communicate test progress, quality indicators, and risk exposure to stakeholders using structured reporting approaches.


Delegates will contribute to process improvement by evaluating test efficiency, analysing defect trends, and recommending optimisation strategies.


Delegates will design comprehensive test documentation that aligns with organisational policies, quality standards, and ISTQB best practice.


Delegates will apply advanced analytical reasoning to determine the most effective test design technique for given project constraints and risk profiles.

Key facts:

Key Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced Level
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Analyst (CTAL-TA)
  • Duration: eLearning 30–35 hours, Virtual Classroom 3 days
  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes (150 minutes for non-native English speakers)
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL)
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning 30–35 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days


Who It’s For

This course is designed for experienced software testers, test analysts, test engineers, quality assurance professionals, and test consultants who are responsible for designing and executing complex test scenarios, analysing software behaviour, and contributing to structured test strategies. It is also suitable for professionals preparing for advanced roles in test analysis, Agile testing, and quality risk assessment. Individuals seeking internationally recognised ISTQB Advanced certification will find this course an essential progression in their testing career.


Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes (150 minutes for non-native English speakers)
  • Number of Questions: 40
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, scenario-based, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Delivery Method: Online remote-proctored exam


Pre-Course Requirements

Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level Certificate (CTFL) before enrolling. It is strongly recommended that participants have a minimum of two to three years of practical software testing experience, including exposure to test design and defect reporting. Learners should be familiar with basic testing principles and comfortable analysing functional specifications prior to attending the course.


FAQ

What is the ISTQB Advanced Level Test Analyst certification?
It is an advanced-level qualification that validates a tester’s ability to design, implement, and analyse test conditions using structured, risk-based and behavioural techniques aligned with international best practice.

Is the course accredited?
Yes, the course is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB.

What are the prerequisites for the CTAL-TA course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level Certificate (CTFL) and ideally have two to three years of practical testing experience.

How long is the course?
The virtual classroom course runs for 3 days at 7 hours per day. The eLearning course requires approximately 30–35 hours of self-paced study.

Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes, the exam voucher is included with both eLearning and Virtual delivery options.

What is the format of the exam?
The exam contains 40 multiple-choice questions, lasts 120 minutes, and requires a 65% pass mark.

Can I take the course without taking the exam?
Yes, you may take the course for learning only, although certification requires passing the formal exam.

What practical skills will I develop?
You will learn to analyse requirements, classify defects, design advanced test conditions, apply behavioural test techniques, and support risk-based testing approaches.

Does the course cover Agile environments?
Yes, the programme includes coverage of Agile testing practices, including user story analysis and iterative test design.

What industries recognise this certification?
The certification is widely recognised across technology, finance, government, telecommunications, healthcare, engineering, and consultancy sectors.

Will this certification help my career progression?
Yes, it provides advanced analytical testing capabilities that support progression to Test Lead, Senior Test Analyst, Test Consultant, or further ISTQB Advanced certifications.

What materials are provided?
Delegates receive accredited course manuals, practice questions, test design exercises, revision materials, and exam preparation support.

What is the difficulty level of the exam?
It is an advanced-level exam requiring strong analytical reasoning, structured test design, and deep understanding of testing techniques.

Is prior automation knowledge required?
No, CTAL-TA focuses on analysis and test design, not automation engineering.

Can I study using eLearning only?
Yes, the ILX eLearning package provides full coverage with tutor support and exam access.

What support is available if I struggle with certain topics?
Both ILX and DrTutor provide tutor assistance, revision guidance, and exam preparation resources.

Does the certificate expire?
No, ISTQB certificates do not expire once achieved.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30Hrs
Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI).pngCertified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI).png

The ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI) course is an advanced certification program designed to equip software testing professionals with the skills required to effectively test AI systems. As AI technologies increasingly permeate enterprise applications, testers need specialized knowledge to understand AI models, validate AI outcomes, and assess potential risks related to algorithmic decision-making. This course provides delegates with a structured approach to AI testing, covering theoretical foundations, practical methodologies, and real-world applications. By the end of the program, participants will be able to confidently evaluate AI systems, design AI-specific test strategies, and contribute to higher-quality AI-driven products, ensuring alignment with organizational goals and regulatory standards. The course also prepares learners for the internationally recognized ISTQB CT-AI certification, demonstrating their expertise in AI testing practices.

What’s Included

  • Instructor-led training in virtual or classroom formats
  • Comprehensive course manuals and supporting materials
  • Practical exercises and scenario-based workshops
  • Access to practice exams and assessment simulators
  • Tutor support and guidance throughout the course
  • Official ISTQB CT-AI certification exam included
  • Additional resources for AI testing methodologies and tools

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive learning experience, 4-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 7 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Participants will be able to describe the purpose of AI testing within the software development lifecycle.


Delegates will understand AI system components, data pipelines, and model types, and how these affect testing strategies.


Learners will identify risks and biases in AI models and define test strategies to mitigate them.


Participants will design and execute test cases specifically for AI functionality, including validation of algorithms, training data, and outputs.


Delegates will integrate AI testing techniques into existing software testing frameworks and CI/CD pipelines.


Learners will analyze AI system outputs, evaluate model performance, and report findings effectively to stakeholders.


Participants will apply best practices for ensuring explainability, fairness, and compliance in AI systems.


Delegates will utilize tools and frameworks suitable for AI testing, including simulation, synthetic data generation, and automation.


Learners will assess the limitations of AI systems and communicate test results clearly to both technical and non-technical teams.


Participants will be equipped to plan continuous improvement opportunities for AI testing within an organization.

Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI)
  • Duration: 4 days for Live Virtual Classroom or Classroom; Self-paced eLearning [insert hours]
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Certificate (CTFL) or equivalent; basic understanding of software testing
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning [insert hours], Live Virtual Classroom 4 days, Classroom 4 days

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for software testers, test analysts, quality assurance engineers, test managers, and developers working with AI systems. It is also suitable for project managers, business analysts, and IT professionals seeking to understand AI testing practices and ensure the quality of AI-driven applications.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice questions
  • Question Type: Multiple-choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Delivery Method: Online, in-class, or remote proctored
  • Accreditation: fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB

Pre-Course Requirements

Participants should hold the ISTQB Foundation Certificate (CTFL) or equivalent. A basic understanding of software testing principles and familiarity with AI concepts is recommended. Delegates are expected to complete any pre-course materials or reading assigned by TSG prior to attending the live sessions.

FAQs

What is the ISTQB AI Testing certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester AI Testing (CT-AI) certification validates knowledge and skills in testing artificial intelligence systems. It ensures delegates understand AI fundamentals, machine learning principles, testing strategies for AI-driven software, and risk assessment approaches specific to AI applications. The certification demonstrates internationally recognized competence in AI testing, enhancing credibility in high-demand technology roles.

Who should take this course?
This course is suitable for software testers, QA engineers, developers, test managers, data scientists, and IT professionals working with AI systems. It is also relevant for professionals responsible for validating AI software quality, designing AI-based solutions, or integrating AI into existing testing processes.

What are the prerequisites for the AI Testing course?
Candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Certificate in Software Testing (CTFL). A basic understanding of software testing principles, practices, and lifecycle processes is recommended to fully benefit from the AI-specific content.

How long is the course?
The Virtual and Classroom versions run for 4 days, typically 7 hours per day. Self-paced eLearning is flexible and varies depending on the learner’s pace, with full coverage of the CT-AI syllabus.

Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes, the ISTQB CT-AI certification exam is included in all delivery options. Delegates receive exam registration, structured preparation, and practice exercises as part of the course package.

How is the exam structured?
The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions. Delegates have 60 minutes to complete the exam (75 minutes for non-native English speakers), and a pass mark of 65% is required to achieve certification.

Can I take the course without sitting the exam?
Yes, delegates may attend the course for professional development and learning purposes. However, the official ISTQB CT-AI certification is only awarded after successfully passing the exam.

What practical skills will I gain from this course?
Delegates will gain skills to assess AI systems, validate machine learning algorithms, identify and mitigate bias, design AI-specific testing strategies, evaluate data quality, and communicate AI testing findings effectively within development and QA teams.

Which tools and techniques are used in the course?
The course introduces practical AI testing frameworks, simulation tools, and synthetic data generation techniques. Delegates also learn to use automation and monitoring tools relevant for validating AI system behavior and performance.

Is prior AI experience required?
No prior experience with AI is required. The course provides foundational knowledge of AI and machine learning, explained in the context of software testing, making it accessible to professionals with general testing experience.

How does this course support career progression?
The course equips delegates with specialized AI testing skills, recognized internationally. This enables career advancement into roles such as AI software tester, test automation engineer with AI focus, QA lead for AI projects, and technical consultant in AI testing practices.

What follow-on certifications are available after CT-AI?
After completing CT-AI, participants can pursue further ISTQB certifications, including advanced technical modules in AI, specialist modules such as Security Testing or Test Automation, or Agile/Advanced Core testing streams. These provide a pathway to deepening expertise in AI testing or branching into related quality assurance areas.

How are AI-specific risks addressed in the course?
Delegates learn to identify unique risks in AI systems, including algorithmic bias, unpredictability of outputs, model transparency, and ethical considerations. The course teaches strategies to evaluate and mitigate these risks through targeted testing approaches and robust quality assurance practices.

Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes, delegates participate in scenario-based exercises and practical workshops designed to apply AI testing principles. These include designing test cases for AI models, evaluating AI system behavior, and working with datasets to simulate real-world testing conditions.

Is the CT-AI certification globally recognized?
Yes, the ISTQB CT-AI certification is fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB. It is internationally recognized and aligns with the ISTQB Certified Tester Scheme, which provides a global benchmark for software testing professionals.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 40Hrs
Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Automation Engineering (CTAL-TAE) v2.0.pngCertified Tester Advanced Level Test Automation Engineering (CTAL-TAE) v2.0.png

The ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level – Test Automation Engineer (CTAL-TAE) v2.0 course is designed for experienced software testing professionals seeking to specialise in test automation. As part of the ISTQB Advanced Level certification track, this course equips delegates with the practical knowledge and methodologies required to design, implement, and maintain robust automated testing solutions within structured testing processes.

Through expert-led instruction and immersive practical exercises, participants will explore how test automation integrates into Agile, DevOps, and CI/CD practices. The course emphasises the selection of appropriate tools, frameworks, and methodologies to maximise test coverage, improve efficiency, and enhance overall software quality.

Aligned with the official ISTQB CTAL-TAE v2.0 syllabus, this training ensures comprehensive coverage of international certification standards. Delegates will gain the skills to assess automation feasibility, develop automation strategies, implement test automation frameworks, and manage automated test reporting effectively. By completing the course, participants will be fully prepared to sit the ISTQB Test Automation Engineer exam, validating their ability to lead and contribute to automation initiatives across diverse technologies and project domains.

What’s Included

Training materials, course manuals, instructor-led exercises, scenario-based workshops, practice exams, tutor support, eLearning resources, exam simulators, certification exam, access to post-course support resources.

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG / ILX
3-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 9 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £2100 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by TSG / ILX
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. 3 days, 9 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £2280+ VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and practices of Agile software development.

  • Adapt existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.

  • Support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.

  • Apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.

  • Assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.

  • Understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.

  • Differentiate between various Agile approaches.

  • Comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.

  • Plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.

  • Understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.

  • Apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.

  • Assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.

  • Estimate testing effort based on iteration content and quality risks.

  • Use tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting effectively.

  • Assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria.

  • Communicate and share information effectively with other team members.

  • Describe the purpose of test automation within the software development lifecycle.

  • Understand the configuration of an infrastructure to enable test automation.

  • Learn the evaluation process for selecting appropriate tools and strategies.

  • Understand design concepts for building modular and scalable test automation solutions.

  • Select an approach, including a pilot, to plan test automation deployment within the software development lifecycle.

  • Design and develop (new or modified) test automation solutions that meet technical needs.

  • Consider scope, approach, and maintenance of testware.

  • Understand how automated tests integrate within CI/CD pipelines.

  • Collect, analyse, and report on test automation data to inform stakeholders.

  • Verify the test automation infrastructure.

  • Define continuous improvement opportunities for test automation.


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Advanced / Practitioner
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Advanced Level – Test Automation Engineer (CTAL-TAE) v2.0
  • Duration: 3 days (Live Virtual Classroom / Classroom), 18 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers)
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certification, recommended minimum 3 years of testing experience
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning 18 hours, Live Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days

Who It’s For

This course is suitable for software testers, test automation engineers, test architects, test consultants, test managers, developers with automation responsibilities, project managers, quality managers, business analysts, and IT directors seeking to gain specialist skills in test automation.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers)
  • Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice
  • Question Type: Multiple-choice, scenario-based, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Accreditation: fully accredited by UKITB on behalf of ISTQB
  • Delivery Method: Online or in-class as per chosen training delivery

Pre-Course Requirements

Delegates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level certification. A minimum of three years of software testing experience is recommended. Familiarity with test automation concepts and Agile/DevOps practices is beneficial.

FAQs

What prerequisites are required for the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The entry requirement for the Certified Tester Advanced Level Test Automation Engineer qualification is that the candidate must hold the ISTQB Foundation certificate. It is also recommended that candidates have a minimum of three years of testing experience.

What is the duration of the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The course runs for three full days and includes exercises, practice exams, and comprehensive coverage of the syllabus designed to prepare participants for the certification exam.

What will I learn in the Advanced Test Automation Engineer course?
The course teaches delegates how to contribute to automation strategy development, evaluate automation tools, design and develop test automation solutions, manage automated test reporting, and maintain automated testing assets.

Is the exam fee included in the course fee, and what is the format of the exam?
Yes, the exam fee is included. The exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions to be completed in 90 minutes (113 minutes for non-native English speakers) with a pass mark of 65%.

What kind of accreditation will I receive upon completing the course?
Upon passing the exam, delegates will receive the ISTQB Advanced Test Automation Engineer Certification, which is internationally recognised.

Can I progress further after achieving CTAL-TAE?
Yes. Holders can progress to Advanced Level Test Manager, Advanced Technical Test Analyst, Agile Technical Tester, or Specialist certifications such as Security Testing.

Is practical training included?
Yes. Both virtual and classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops to apply test automation techniques.

Who is the course suitable for?
Testers, Test Automation Engineers, Test Architects, Test Managers, Developers with automation responsibilities, Project Managers, Quality Managers, Business Analysts, and IT Directors.

How is the ISTQB Test Automation Engineer course delivered?
The course is available as self-paced eLearning, live virtual classroom, and in-person classroom sessions.

Is tutor support provided?
Yes. Tutors provide guidance, answer questions, and support exercises and practice exams.

What materials are provided?
Manuals, handouts, exercises, practice questions, eLearning resources, and exam simulators.

How does this course support real-world projects?
Scenario-based exercises and workshops allow delegates to apply automation techniques and principles to workplace testing environments.

Is the course internationally recognised?
Yes. ISTQB certification is globally recognised and aligns with international testing standards.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 18 Hrs
Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT).pngCertified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT).png

In today’s fast-paced Agile software development environment, the demand for high-quality, reliable software has never been greater. The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL‑AT) course from TSG is strategically designed to equip software testing professionals with the knowledge, methodologies, and practical skills required to excel within Agile teams. This course enables participants to understand the Agile lifecycle, including iterative planning, continuous integration, and collaborative testing practices. Through scenario-based exercises and real-world examples, learners gain the capability to implement effective testing strategies, align with Agile roles, and contribute meaningfully to project success. Completion of this course provides a recognised ISTQB certification, enhancing professional credibility, opening career advancement opportunities, and ensuring participants can apply Agile testing principles immediately in their workplace.

What’s Included

Course materials and manuals
Official ISTQB exam fee
Scenario-based exercises and workshops
Practical group exercises and tutor guidance
Access to eLearning resources (where applicable)
Certification upon successful completion

Delivery Options & Pricing – Delivered by TSG

Virtual Classroom
2-day instructor-led training, 9:00–17:00, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: From £1,105 + VAT

Classroom
2-day in-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. Exam included. Price: From £1,225 + VAT

E-Learning
Self-paced, flexible access to course materials, practical exercises, and exam preparation resources. Exam included. Price: From £790 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Participants will be able to collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and basic practices of Agile software development.

  • Delegates will adapt their existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.

  • Learners will support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.

  • Participants will apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.

  • Delegates will assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.

  • Learners will understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.

  • Participants will be able to differentiate between various Agile approaches.

  • Delegates will comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.

  • Learners will plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.

  • Participants will understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.

  • Delegates will be able to apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.

  • Learners will assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.

  • Participants will estimate testing effort based on iteration content and identified quality risks.

  • Delegates will be familiar with tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting.

  • Learners will assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria as appropriate.

  • Participants will work and share information with other team members using effective communication styles and channels.


Key facts:

Facts

  • Course Level: Foundation (Agile Tester Extension)
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL‑AT)
  • Duration: Virtual 2 days, Classroom 2 days, E-Learning self-paced
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level certification
  • Delivery Methods: Virtual 2 days, Classroom 2 days, E-Learning self-paced

Who It’s For

This course is ideal for testers holding the ISTQB Foundation Certificate, test professionals transitioning into Agile projects, Scrum masters and product owners seeking to understand testing practices, developers and business analysts collaborating with testing teams, and anyone involved in Agile software delivery looking to formalise and certify their knowledge.

Exam Information

  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Delivery Method: Online or in-class, depending on chosen course

Pre-Course Requirements

Participants must hold a valid ISTQB Foundation Level certificate. Basic experience in software testing is recommended. Familiarity with Agile principles is beneficial but not mandatory. Pre-course materials will be provided.


Key outcomes include:

  • Mastery of Agile software development fundamentals and principles
  • Ability to apply Agile testing techniques, methods, and tools in real projects
  • Competence in planning and executing testing within iterative cycles
  • Effective collaboration with Agile teams and stakeholders
  • Skills to assess product quality risks and estimate testing effort accurately
  • Practical application of TDD, BDD, and exploratory testing methods
  • Understanding strategic benefits of Agile testing for business outcomes
  • Capability to contribute to continuous improvement and team efficiency

FAQ

1-What is the ISTQB Agile Tester certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification provides a solid grounding in Agile testing principles, practices, and roles. It equips professionals with the skills to effectively test within Agile teams and projects.

2-How does Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) relate to Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
The Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) is a foundation-level certification, while the Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) is an advanced-level qualification. CTAL-ATT builds on the knowledge gained at Foundation level and focuses on more technical testing skills such as test automation, continuous integration, and service virtualisation.

3-Who should take the Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
This course is designed for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, and anyone working in Agile teams who needs to understand how testing fits into Agile delivery.

4-What are the entry requirements for Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
To sit the exam, candidates must hold the ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) certificate. Agile project experience is recommended but not mandatory.

5-What skills will I gain from Agile Tester training?
You will learn how to apply Agile testing methods, work effectively within Agile teams, collaborate with developers and business stakeholders, and use risk-based testing and automation to support rapid delivery.

6-How is the Agile Tester exam structured?
The exam consists of multiple-choice questions, lasts 60 minutes (+25% extra time for non-native speakers), requires a passing score of 65%, and is a closed-book exam.

7-Can I progress further after Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Yes. After achieving CTFL-AT, you can advance to higher-level certifications such as ISTQB Advanced Level Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) or explore other Agile, Core, or Specialist modules.

8-How long is the Agile Tester course?
The course duration depends on the delivery mode: Virtual Classroom and Classroom sessions are 2 days each, while eLearning is self-paced.

9-Is practical training included in the course?
Yes. Both Virtual Classroom and Classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops that allow participants to apply Agile testing techniques in realistic situations.

10-Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes. All delivery methods include the ISTQB Agile Tester exam as part of the course fee.

11-Do I need prior Agile experience to attend?
Familiarity with Agile concepts is helpful but not mandatory. The course covers all essential Agile principles and testing practices required for the certification.

12-What materials are provided during the course?
Participants receive manuals, handouts, access to practical exercises, and, where applicable, eLearning resources and simulators for exam preparation.

13-Will I receive tutor support?
Yes. Tutors are available throughout the course to guide participants, answer questions, and provide feedback on practical exercises.

14-What is the global recognition of this certification?
The ISTQB Agile Tester certification is recognized internationally and demonstrates that holders have the knowledge and skills to work effectively in Agile testing environments.

15-What are the benefits of obtaining this certification?
Benefits include improved competence in Agile testing, career advancement opportunities, ability to work effectively in Agile teams, and official ISTQB recognition of skills.

16-Can the exam be taken remotely?
Yes, depending on the delivery mode, the exam can be taken online or in-class.

17-How does this course support real-world Agile projects?
The course emphasizes practical application through scenario-based exercises, enabling participants to immediately apply learned techniques in their workplace and contribute to team success.

18-Is this course suitable for non-testers?
Yes. Developers, business analysts, Scrum masters, and other Agile team members who want to understand testing principles can benefit from this course.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 18 Hrs
Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) v4.0.pngCertified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) v4.0.png
The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course provides participants with a comprehensive understanding of fundamental software testing principles and practices. Delivered by TSG, this internationally recognised training equips professionals with the knowledge and skills needed to apply consistent, high-quality testing across Agile and traditional software development environments. Delegates gain practical, real-world expertise in planning, designing, and executing tests, assessing risks, and reporting defects. The course also prepares participants for the official ISTQB CTFL exam, ensuring that learners can demonstrate competency in testing fundamentals and add immediate value to their organisations’ software development and quality assurance processes.

What’s Included
Course materials, exam, tutor support, practical exercises, scenario-based workshops, online access for course resources, test simulators

Delivery Options & Pricing
Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG
Immersive learning experience, 3-day accredited course in an online virtual environment, 9 hours per day, interactive exercises, scenario discussions, and exam preparation guidance. Exam included. Price: £895.50 + VAT

E‑Learning – Delivered by TSG
Self-paced, flexible online study, access to all course materials and exam simulator, with exam included. Price: £905.00 + VAT. //Offer: £510

Classroom – Delivered by TSG
In-person instructor-led training with workshops, scenario-based exercises, and exam preparation. 3 days, 9 hours per day. Exam included. Price: £1,057.50 + VAT

Note: Exact prices may vary depending on location, schedule and VAT. Please request a quote when booking.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

  • Participants will be able to collaborate in a cross-functional Agile team while being familiar with principles and basic practices of Agile software development.

  • Delegates will adapt their existing testing experience and knowledge to align with Agile values and principles.

  • Learners will support the Agile team in planning and coordinating test-related activities effectively.

  • Participants will apply relevant methods and techniques for testing within an Agile project environment.

  • Delegates will assist the Agile team in test automation activities as required by project needs.

  • Learners will understand the fundamentals of Agile software development.

  • Participants will be able to differentiate between various Agile approaches.

  • Delegates will comprehend the differences between testing in traditional and Agile approaches.

  • Learners will plan and perform testing activities specifically for Agile projects.

  • Participants will understand the roles and required skills of a tester in Agile projects.

  • Delegates will be able to apply Agile testing techniques and methods proficiently.

  • Learners will assess product quality risks within an Agile project and plan accordingly.

  • Participants will estimate testing effort based on iteration content and identified quality risks.

  • Delegates will be familiar with tools commonly used in Agile projects for testing and reporting.

  • Learners will assist business stakeholders in defining understandable and testable user stories, scenarios, requirements, and acceptance criteria as appropriate.

  • Participants will work and share information with other team members using effective communication styles and channels.


Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Certification: ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL)
  • Duration: 3 days (Virtual & Classroom), Self-paced (E-Learning)
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) recommended; basic IT understanding helpful
  • Delivery Methods: Virtual Classroom 3 days, Classroom 3 days, E-Learning self-paced

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, Scrum Masters, and other professionals working in Agile or traditional software development teams who wish to gain recognised testing certification and practical skills in software quality assurance.

Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 40 multiple-choice
  • Question Type: Multiple choice, closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Official ISTQB Agile Tester certification
  • Delivery Method: Online (E-Learning), Remote Proctor (Virtual Classroom), In-class (Classroom)

Pre-Course Requirements
No formal prerequisites are required. A basic understanding of IT and software development concepts is recommended to fully benefit from the course.

FAQ

1-What is the ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course?
The Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course is a foundational certification program designed for individuals seeking to advance their knowledge and skills in software testing. It covers the fundamentals of software testing, including test design, management, and understanding the software lifecycle.

2-Who should consider enrolling in the Certified Tester Foundation Level course?
The course is ideal for professionals who are new to the software testing field, including test analysts, test engineers, test consultants, test managers, user acceptance testers, and software developers. It is also beneficial for individuals seeking a career change into software testing.

3-What are the prerequisites for the Certified Tester Foundation Level course?
There are no formal prerequisites for the CTFL course. However, a basic understanding of IT and software development concepts is recommended to grasp the course content effectively.

4-Is there any pre-course work required?
Yes. There is mandatory online pre-course work that must be undertaken prior to attending this course. It is expected to take approximately four to five hours to complete. Full instructions and a link to the online pre-course are provided three weeks before the course start date.

5-How long does the course take to complete?
The duration of the Certified Tester Foundation Level course typically involves approximately 3 days of instructor-led training, which can be conducted in-person or online depending on the delivery mode.

6-What topics are covered in the Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course?
The course covers a wide range of topics, including fundamentals of testing, testing throughout the software development lifecycle, static testing, test design techniques, test management, and tool support for testing.

7-How is the Certified Tester Foundation Level certification exam structured?
The certification exam consists of 40 multiple-choice questions. Candidates have 60 minutes to complete the exam (or 75 minutes for non-native English speakers in some countries). A score of 65% or higher is required to pass.

8-What are the benefits of obtaining the Certified Tester Foundation Level certification?
Obtaining the certification demonstrates a foundational understanding of software testing principles and practices. It enhances an individual’s credibility and marketability in the software testing job market and can lead to career advancement opportunities.

9-Can I take the Certified Tester Foundation Level course without taking the exam?
Yes. Individuals can attend the course for personal or professional development without taking the certification exam. However, taking and passing the exam results in obtaining the CTFL certification, which can be valuable for career progression.

10-How can I register for the Certified Tester Foundation Level course and exam?
To register:

  • Decide on the delivery method: choose between virtual (online) courses or traditional in-person classroom courses.

  • Select the exam format: the CTFL exam is typically available in both online and paper-based formats.

  • Complete payment: pay for the course and exam using credit card, bank transfer, or purchase order. Ensure all necessary information and authorisation are provided.

11-What is the cost of the Certified Tester Foundation Level (CTFL) course and exam?
The cost for the ISTQB Foundation Level Certification (CTFL) is from £895.50 + VAT for the Virtual Classroom, which is the cheapest option including exams and course materials.

12-What follow-on courses are available after passing the CTFL exam?
The CTFL certification is a prerequisite for other modules within the Certified Tester Scheme:

Core stream modules: Advanced Test Manager, Advanced Test Analyst, Advanced Technical Test Analyst

Agile stream modules: Advanced Agile Technical Tester

Specialist stream modules: Acceptance Testing, AI Testing, Mobile Application Testing, Model-Based Tester, Security Tester, Test Automation Engineer

13-What is the ISTQB Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
The ISTQB Certified Tester Foundation Level Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification provides a solid grounding in Agile testing principles, practices, and roles. It equips professionals with the skills to effectively test within Agile and traditional teams.

14-How does Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) relate to Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
The Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) is a foundation-level certification, while the Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) is an advanced-level qualification focusing on technical testing skills such as test automation, continuous integration, and service virtualisation.

15-Who should take the Agile Tester (CTFL-AT) certification?
This course is designed for software testers, test analysts, developers, business analysts, and anyone working in Agile or traditional teams who needs to understand how testing fits into project delivery.

16-What are the entry requirements for Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Candidates should ideally hold the ISTQB Foundation Level (CTFL) certificate. Agile project experience is recommended but not mandatory.

17-What skills will I gain from Agile Tester training?
You will learn to apply Agile and traditional testing methods, work effectively within teams, collaborate with stakeholders, and use risk-based testing and automation to support rapid delivery.

18-How is the Agile Tester exam structured?
Format: Multiple choice questions
Duration: 60 minutes
Passing Score: 65%
Closed book exam

19-Can I progress further after Agile Tester (CTFL-AT)?
Yes. You can advance to higher-level certifications such as ISTQB Advanced Level Agile Technical Tester (CTAL-ATT) or explore other Agile, Core, or Specialist modules.

20-How long is the course?
Virtual and Classroom: 3 days; E-Learning: self-paced.

21-Is practical training included?
Yes. Both Virtual and Classroom courses include scenario-based exercises and workshops to apply Agile testing techniques.

22-Is the exam included in the course fee?
Yes. All delivery options include the ISTQB exam.

23-Do I need prior Agile experience?
Familiarity is helpful but not mandatory. The course covers essential Agile principles and testing practices.

24-What materials are provided?
Manuals, handouts, exercises, eLearning resources, and exam simulators.

25-Will I receive tutor support?
Yes. Tutors provide guidance, answer questions, and support exercises.

26-What is the global recognition of this certification?
It is recognised internationally as a benchmark for software testing skills.

27-What are the benefits of obtaining this certification?
Improved testing competence, career advancement, ability to work effectively in Agile teams, and official ISTQB recognition.

28-Can the exam be taken remotely?
Yes, depending on delivery mode.

29-How does this course support real-world projects?
Scenario-based exercises allow immediate application in workplace Agile or traditional projects.

30-Is this course suitable for non-testers?
Yes. Developers, business analysts, and Agile team members benefit from understanding testing principles.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30Hrs
Business Analysis Foundation.pngBusiness Analysis Foundation.png

The BCS Business Analysis Foundation course provides a structured and comprehensive introduction to the principles, practices, and responsibilities of business analysis within modern organisations. It is designed to equip learners with a clear understanding of how business analysis supports organisational change, improves business processes, and ensures that solutions deliver measurable value.

Through this accredited course, learners develop a strong foundation in identifying business needs, analysing requirements, engaging stakeholders, and supporting the delivery of effective business solutions. The course explains the role of the Business Analyst within change initiatives and introduces proven frameworks and techniques used across industries.

Successful completion of this course leads to the BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification, a widely recognised qualification that supports entry into business analysis roles and progression into more advanced business analysis or change management pathways.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS Business Analysis Foundation eLearning
  • BCS Business Analysis Foundation exam
  • Approximately 18 hours of online study
  • 12-month eLearning licence
  • Tutor support
  • Digital course materials

Delivery Options & Pricing

eLearning – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Self-paced accredited online training with a 12-month licence and approximately 18 hours of study time. The course includes the official BCS Foundation Certificate in Business Analysis exam, digital course materials, and learner support throughout the study period from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £785.00 + VAT

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom environment. The course includes structured tuition, interactive discussions, practical exercises, and exam preparation guidance, with ongoing learner support.
Price: From £945.00 + VAT

Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
In-person accredited classroom training delivered by experienced instructors. The course includes workshops, group discussion, and full exam preparation support, with learner assistance from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: From £1,326.00 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the definition and scope of business analysis within organisations.


Learners will recognise the role, responsibilities, and competencies of a Business Analyst.


Learners will apply the business analysis service framework to real organisational change.


Learners will document, model, validate, and manage business requirements effectively.


Learners will analyse and manage stakeholders using structured techniques.


Learners will identify opportunities to improve business services and processes.


Learners will understand how to develop and justify a business case.


Learners will support the delivery of requirements and business solutions aligned to organisational goals.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Duration: Approximately 18 hours (eLearning)
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: eLearning – 12-month licence

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for aspiring Business Analysts, Business Managers, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in business improvement or change initiatives. It is also ideal for individuals seeking to transition into a business analysis role or gain a formal understanding of business analysis best practice.

Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: Multiple choice
  • Question Type: Closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: BCS Business Analysis Foundation
  • Delivery Method: Online exam

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior business analysis experience is required.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the BCS Business Analysis Foundation course?
It is an accredited foundation-level qualification that introduces the principles, techniques, and responsibilities of business analysis.

Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification.

How difficult is the BCS Business Analysis Foundation exam?
The exam is designed for foundation-level learners and tests understanding of key concepts rather than advanced practical application.

How long does the exam take?
The exam duration is 60 minutes.

What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.

Is the exam closed book?
Yes. The exam is closed book.

How is the course delivered?
The course is delivered via self-paced eLearning with a 12-month licence.

How long does the course take to complete?
The course takes approximately 18 hours to complete, depending on prior experience.

Are there any prerequisites?
No. There are no formal prerequisites.

Who should take this course?
Anyone involved in business change, process improvement, requirements gathering, or stakeholder engagement will benefit from this course.

Can this course help me change careers into business analysis?
Yes. It provides a recognised foundation qualification that supports entry into junior and associate business analysis roles.

What salary can a Business Analyst earn in the UK?
In the UK, entry-level Business Analysts typically earn £30,000 to £40,000 per year, while experienced Business Analysts earn £45,000 to £65,000 per year. Senior and lead Business Analysts can earn £70,000 or more, particularly in financial services, technology, and consultancy sectors.

Is this course suitable for project managers?
Yes. Project Managers benefit from understanding requirements management and stakeholder analysis.

Does the course include tutor support?
Yes. Tutor support is included with the eLearning package.

Are there optional extras available?
Optional extras such as Pass Protect and the Business Analysis textbook may be available at checkout.

Will this certification expire?
The BCS Business Analysis Foundation certification does not expire.

What career paths can this course support?
The course supports progression into Business Analyst, Junior Business Analyst, Business Change Analyst, and related roles.


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP).pngBCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP).png

The BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP) provides a structured introduction to the concepts, frameworks, and practices required to manage information security effectively within modern organisations. As reliance on digital systems, cloud services, and connected devices continues to grow, information security has become a critical business capability rather than a purely technical concern.

This BCS-accredited course equips learners with a clear understanding of how information security supports organisational objectives, protects information assets, and ensures compliance with legislation and recognised standards. The course combines theory, practical examples, and workshops to develop awareness of risk management, governance, security controls, and incident response across a range of business environments.

Successful completion of the course leads to the BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles, a well-established qualification for professionals seeking a recognised entry point into information security and cyber security management roles.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS CISMP training
  • BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles exam
  • Instructor-led lectures and practical workshops
  • Course materials aligned to the CISMP syllabus
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom over four days. The course provides an immersive learning experience, combining structured teaching, practical exercises, and exam preparation. Learners receive full support throughout the course from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,150.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £95.83 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand core information security management concepts and terminology.


Learners will recognise relevant UK legislation and regulatory requirements related to information security.


Learners will understand key standards, frameworks, and organisations supporting information security management.


Learners will identify the environments in which information security management operates.


Learners will understand different types of security controls and how their effectiveness is measured.


Learners will gain awareness of information security governance and risk management.


Learners will understand secure software lifecycle principles.


Learners will develop foundational knowledge of security operations and incident

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Duration: 4 days
  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: None (IT and security awareness recommended)
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 4 days
Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Security Consultants, Cyber Security Managers, Security Engineers, Project Managers, Security Technicians, Software Testers, Business Analysts, Software Developers, Business Continuity Practitioners, and professionals who require a structured overview of information security management principles.

Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 120 minutes
  • Number of Questions: Multiple choice
  • Question Type: Closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles (CISMP)
  • Delivery Method: Online exam
Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. However, a working knowledge of IT systems, basic security principles, and awareness of security controls is recommended.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the CISMP qualification?
CISMP is a foundation-level BCS qualification that introduces the principles and practices of information security management.

Is the CISMP course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Foundation Certificate in Information Security Management Principles.

How long does the CISMP course take?
The course is delivered over four days in a live virtual classroom.

Is there an exam included?
Yes. The CISMP exam is included with the course.

What is the format of the CISMP exam?
The exam is multiple choice, closed book, and lasts 120 minutes.

What is the pass mark for the CISMP exam?
The pass mark is 65%.

Are there any prerequisites for this course?
There are no formal prerequisites, but basic IT and security knowledge is recommended.

Who should take the CISMP course?
Anyone responsible for managing, supporting, or understanding information security within an organisation will benefit.

Is CISMP suitable for non-technical professionals?
Yes. The course is designed to be accessible to both technical and non-technical roles.

How does CISMP help with career progression?
CISMP provides a recognised foundation qualification that supports progression into security management, governance, and compliance roles.

What salary can information security professionals earn in the UK?
In the UK, entry-level information security roles typically earn £30,000 to £40,000 per year, while experienced security professionals earn £45,000 to £65,000 per year. Senior information security managers and specialists can earn £70,000 to £90,000 or more, depending on sector and responsibility.

Does this course focus on cyber security or management?
The course focuses on information security management principles rather than hands-on technical cyber security skills.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra at checkout.

Does the CISMP certification expire?
The CISMP certification does not expire.

Can CISMP lead to more advanced security certifications?
Yes. CISMP is commonly used as a foundation before progressing to more advanced information security or cyber security qualifications.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 40Hrs
Requirements Engineering.pngRequirements Engineering.png

The BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering course equips professionals with the advanced knowledge and practical skills required to identify, analyse, document, validate, and manage business and system requirements effectively. This accredited qualification focuses on ensuring that requirements are clearly aligned with business objectives and stakeholder expectations, reducing project risk and improving delivery outcomes.

The course explores structured requirements engineering frameworks, stakeholder engagement techniques, modelling approaches, and validation methods. It enables learners to take a disciplined and rigorous approach to requirements definition, supporting successful change initiatives and complex project environments.

Successful completion awards the BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering certification, a respected qualification within the business analysis and project delivery professions.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering training
  • BCS Requirements Engineering exam
  • Official Business Analysis handbook
  • Instructor-led virtual classroom delivery
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This instructor-led course is delivered virtually and focuses on advanced requirements engineering concepts, practical application, and examination preparation. Learners benefit from expert instruction, interactive discussion, and ongoing support from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,195.00 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the requirements engineering framework and its application in change initiatives.


Learners will identify the hierarchy of requirements and how different requirement levels interact.


Learners will understand the roles and responsibilities of stakeholders within requirements engineering.


Learners will apply structured requirements elicitation techniques.


Learners will use modelling techniques to analyse and communicate requirements.


Learners will document requirements clearly and consistently.


Learners will analyse requirements for completeness, consistency, and feasibility.


Learners will validate requirements against business objectives and stakeholder needs.


Learners will manage requirements throughout the project lifecycle.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Advanced
  • Duration: Live Virtual Classroom
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites, practical business analysis experience recommended
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers and their teams, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in defining, managing, or validating requirements within projects or transformation programmes.

Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Exam Format: Closed book
  • Delivery: Online exam via remote proctor
  • Certification Awarded: BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering
Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required. While there are no formal prerequisites, some practical experience in business analysis or project environments is recommended.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering course?
It is an accredited qualification that develops advanced skills in capturing, analysing, validating, and managing requirements.

Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Is the exam included in the course price?
Yes. The exam is included in the course fee.

How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered as an instructor-led live virtual classroom programme.

Do I need prior business analysis experience?
Formal prerequisites are not required, but practical experience is recommended.

What type of exam is included?
The exam is multiple choice and closed book.

What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.

Can I take the exam online?
Yes. The exam is delivered online using remote proctoring.

How does this course differ from Business Analysis Practice?
Requirements Engineering focuses specifically on requirements lifecycle activities, while Business Analysis Practice covers broader strategic and organisational analysis techniques.

Who should take this qualification?
Professionals responsible for defining or managing requirements within projects or change initiatives.

How will this certification benefit my career?
It demonstrates advanced capability in requirements engineering and supports progression into senior business analysis and project roles.

What salary can professionals with requirements engineering skills expect?
In the UK, experienced Business Analysts and Requirements Engineers typically earn between £50,000 and £75,000 per year, with senior or specialist roles exceeding £80,000, depending on experience and sector.

Does the certification expire?
No. The BCS Advanced Requirements Engineering certification does not expire.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.

Is this course suitable for project managers?
Yes. Project managers benefit from improved requirements control and stakeholder alignment.

Will this course help reduce project risk?
Yes. Effective requirements engineering significantly reduces scope creep, rework, and delivery risk.

Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
BCS Business Analysis Practice.pngBCS Business Analysis Practice.png

The BCS Business Analysis Practice course is a recognised professional qualification designed to develop the practical skills required to deliver effective business change. It builds on foundational business analysis knowledge and focuses on applying structured techniques to identify business problems, evaluate improvement opportunities, and recommend solutions aligned with organisational objectives.

This course develops a deeper understanding of business dynamics, stakeholder perspectives, and strategic analysis. Learners gain the ability to investigate business systems, model business activities, and contribute meaningfully to change initiatives. The qualification strengthens professional credibility and is widely recognised across industries where structured business analysis plays a key role in driving performance improvement and successful transformation.

Successful completion of this course leads to the BCS Business Analysis Practice certification.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS Business Analysis Practice training
  • BCS Business Analysis Practice exam
  • Official BCS Business Analysis manual
  • Instructor-led training with practical exercises
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom environment. The course combines structured teaching, group discussion, and practical activities to develop real-world business analysis capability. Full learner support is provided throughout by ILX and DrTutor.
Price: From £1,195.00 + VAT.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the role and responsibilities of a Business Analyst within change initiatives.


Learners will apply skills required to support and deliver business change.


Learners will use strategic analysis processes and techniques to assess organisational context.


Learners will investigate business systems to identify problems and improvement opportunities.


Learners will apply stakeholder analysis and management techniques effectively.


Learners will develop conceptual models using business activity modelling.


Learners will identify and recommend viable business improvements.


Learners will understand the role of the business case within the change lifecycle.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Practitioner / Intermediate
  • Duration: Typically delivered over several days (live virtual classroom)
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: Practical business analysis experience recommended
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals involved in analysing business problems, defining requirements, or supporting organisational change initiatives.


Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Number of Questions: Multiple choice
  • Question Type: Closed book
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: BCS Business Analysis Practice
  • Delivery Method: Online exam via remote proctor

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course or the exam. However, some practical experience in business analysis or change-related work is strongly recommended.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is the BCS Business Analysis Practice qualification?
It is a practitioner-level BCS qualification focused on applying business analysis techniques to real organisational challenges.

Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Business Analysis Practice certification.

How is the course delivered?
The course is delivered as instructor-led live virtual classroom training.

Is the exam included?
Yes. The Business Analysis Practice exam is included.

What is the format of the exam?
The exam is multiple choice, closed book, and delivered online via remote proctor.

How long does the exam take?
The exam duration is 60 minutes.

What is the pass mark?
The pass mark is 65%.

Are there any prerequisites?
There are no formal prerequisites, but prior business analysis experience is recommended.

Who should take this course?
Professionals involved in business change, requirements analysis, stakeholder engagement, or solution evaluation will benefit most.

How does this course differ from Business Analysis Foundation?
This course focuses on practical application of techniques rather than introductory concepts.

Does this course help with career progression?
Yes. It supports progression into senior Business Analyst, Lead Analyst, and change-focused roles.

Can this course be taken by project managers?
Yes. Project Managers benefit from the strategic and analytical techniques covered.

What salary can a Business Analyst earn in the UK?
In the UK, Business Analysts typically earn £35,000 to £50,000 per year, while experienced or senior Business Analysts earn £55,000 to £70,000 per year. Lead Business Analysts and specialists in finance or consultancy may earn £75,000 or more.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.

Does the certification expire?
The BCS Business Analysis Practice certification does not expire.

Can this qualification lead to further BCS certifications?
Yes. It is commonly followed by advanced BCS business analysis or change management qualifications.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
Modelling Business Processes.pngModelling Business Processes.png

The BCS Modelling Business Processes course provides professionals with the practical skills and knowledge to identify, map, and optimise organisational workflows. The course focuses on structured approaches to analyse business processes, detect inefficiencies, and design improvements that align with strategic objectives.

Participants will explore key principles in process mapping, hierarchical process models, gap analysis, and business process improvement frameworks. Practical exercises and real-world examples ensure that learners can immediately apply their skills to enhance operational efficiency and support organisational change initiatives.

Successful completion awards the BCS Modelling Business Processes certification, a recognised qualification for professionals in business analysis, operations, and project management.

What’s Included

  • Accredited BCS Modelling Business Processes training
  • BCS Modelling Business Processes exam
  • Official Business Analysis handbook
  • Instructor-led virtual classroom delivery
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This two-day course is delivered virtually, combining interactive theory sessions and practical exercises. Learners benefit from instructor guidance, hands-on workshops, and ongoing support from ILX and DrTutor. Price: £945.00 + VAT

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will understand the role and purpose of business process modelling.


Learners will analyse organisational internal processes and workflows.


Learners will explore the hierarchy of process models and techniques to describe them.


Learners will model core business processes at both organisational and process levels.


Learners will document and analyse tasks effectively.


Learners will use gap analysis to identify inefficiencies and opportunities for improvement.


Learners will apply structured approaches to enhance operational efficiency.


Learners will evaluate and implement solutions to optimise business processes.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Intermediate
  • Duration: 2 Days
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: No formal prerequisites; practical business analysis experience recommended
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for Business Analysts, Business Managers and their teams, Business Change Managers, Project Managers, and professionals responsible for process analysis, improvement, or operational optimisation.


Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Exam Format: Closed book
  • Delivery: Online exam via remote proctor
  • Certification Awarded: BCS Modelling Business Processes

Pre-Course Requirements
There is no pre-course work required. Some practical experience in business analysis or operational management is recommended to maximise learning outcomes.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is BCS Modelling Business Processes?
It is an accredited course that teaches how to analyse, model, and optimise business processes using structured techniques and best practices.

Is there an exam included?
Yes. The course includes a 60-minute multiple-choice exam delivered online via remote proctoring.

Are there prerequisites for this course?
No formal prerequisites are required. Practical business analysis experience is recommended.

How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered over two full days in a live virtual classroom format.

Who should attend this course?
Professionals responsible for process improvement, workflow analysis, or operational optimisation, including Business Analysts, Project Managers, and Business Change Managers.

How will this certification benefit my career?
It demonstrates professional capability in business process modelling and improvement, supporting career progression in business analysis and operational roles.

What is business process modelling?
It is the structured representation of an organisation’s processes to analyse workflows, identify inefficiencies, and design improvements.

What will I learn in the course?
Participants learn to map processes, document tasks, analyse workflows, and apply gap analysis techniques for optimisation.

Does this course help reduce operational risk?
Yes. Understanding and improving business processes reduces inefficiencies, errors, and process-related risks.

Can project managers benefit from this course?
Yes. Project managers gain skills in mapping and aligning processes to project objectives, improving delivery outcomes.

Is this course suitable for team leads or managers?
Yes. Managers and team leads will gain insight into process efficiency, workflow alignment, and strategic optimisation techniques.

Does the course include hands-on exercises?
Yes. Interactive exercises and case studies are integral to the learning experience.

Can I take the exam online?
Yes. The exam is delivered online using remote proctoring technology.

What salary can I expect after completing this course?
In the UK, professionals with business process modelling skills typically earn between £45,000 and £65,000 per year, with senior roles exceeding £70,000, depending on experience and sector.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.

Does the certification expire?
No. The BCS Modelling Business Processes certification does not expire.


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 16 Hrs
BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI).pngBCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI).png

The BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence provides a comprehensive introduction to the principles, technologies, and applications that underpin modern artificial intelligence. This accredited qualification is designed for professionals at the early stages of their AI journey who require a structured and practical understanding of how AI systems are developed, deployed, and governed.

The course explores key AI concepts including machine learning, intelligent agents, natural language processing, and robotics, while also addressing the ethical, trustworthy, and sustainable use of AI in organisational and societal contexts. Learners gain insight into how AI is transforming industries, reshaping job roles, and influencing decision-making across both public and private sectors.

Successful completion leads to the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence, a widely recognised qualification that supports career development and informed participation in AI-enabled initiatives.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence training
  • BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence exam
  • Instructor-led delivery with interactive discussion
  • Course materials aligned to the official BCS syllabus
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
This option provides instructor-led accredited training delivered over three days in a live online virtual classroom. Learners benefit from an immersive learning experience covering AI foundations, machine learning concepts, robotics, and ethical considerations, supported throughout by ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £1,555.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £129.58 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will define human intelligence, artificial intelligence, and intelligent agents.


Learners will explain the principles of ethical, trustworthy, and sustainable AI.


Learners will understand AI’s role in Universal Design and the Fourth Industrial Revolution.


Learners will identify machine learning as a core component of AI development.


Learners will summarise different types of AI agents and their functions.


Learners will define intelligent robotics and its relationship with AI systems.


Learners will outline the benefits, risks, and ethical challenges associated with AI adoption.


Learners will understand foundational machine learning concepts and toolsets.


Learners will recognise the collaborative role of humans and AI in the workplace.


Learners will identify key team roles required to manage AI projects effectively.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Foundation
  • Duration: 3 days
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 3 days

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for engineers, scientists, professional research managers, chief technical officers, chief information officers, organisational and business change managers, service architects, programme and planning managers, and professionals who need a structured understanding of AI fundamentals. It is also appropriate for individuals preparing to work with AI-enabled systems or projects across any sector.


Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 60 minutes
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Exam Format: Closed book
  • Certification Awarded: BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior AI, programming, or data science knowledge is required.

Frequently Asked Questions

What is the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence?
It is an accredited foundation-level qualification that provides in-depth knowledge of AI principles, technologies, and ethical considerations.

Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Do I receive a certificate after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence.

How long does the course take to complete?
The course is delivered over three days in a live virtual classroom.

Is the exam included in the price?
Yes. The exam is included with the course.

What format is the exam?
The exam is multiple choice and closed book.

What is the pass mark for the exam?
The pass mark is 65%.

Do I need prior AI or technical experience?
No. The course is designed for learners with no prior AI background.

How does this differ from the BCS Essentials AI course?
The Foundation course goes deeper into AI concepts, machine learning, robotics, ethics, and organisational impact, while the Essentials course provides a high-level introduction.

Who should take this qualification?
Professionals involved in technology, transformation, data, innovation, or leadership roles who need a solid grounding in AI concepts.

How will this certification help my career?
It demonstrates recognised foundational AI knowledge and supports progression into AI-related, digital transformation, and data-driven roles.

What salary can AI-qualified professionals earn?
In the UK, professionals with AI foundation-level knowledge typically earn between £45,000 and £65,000 per year, while roles with hands-on AI or data responsibilities often exceed £70,000, depending on experience and industry.

Does the course include coding or programming?
No. The course focuses on concepts, governance, and application rather than hands-on coding.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.

Does the certification expire?
The BCS Foundation Certificate in Artificial Intelligence does not expire.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 22 Hrs
BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI).pngBCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI).png

The BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence (AI) provides a clear and accessible introduction to artificial intelligence, explaining its origins, key concepts, and growing impact across modern organisations. This accredited course explores how AI technologies such as machine learning, data analytics, and robotics are shaping business operations, decision-making, and innovation across industries.

The course also addresses the ethical, legal, and societal considerations surrounding AI adoption, enabling learners to understand not only how AI works, but how it should be implemented responsibly. Designed for both technical and non-technical audiences, this qualification supports informed engagement with AI initiatives and helps professionals recognise opportunities and risks associated with AI-driven solutions.

Successful completion of the course leads to the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence, a recognised entry-level qualification for professionals seeking foundational AI knowledge.

What’s Included
  • Accredited BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence training
  • BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence exam
  • Instructor-led teaching with practical discussion
  • Course materials aligned to the BCS syllabus
  • Optional Pass Protect available at checkout

Delivery Options & Pricing

Live Virtual Classroom – Delivered by TSG with ILX and DrTutor support
Instructor-led accredited training delivered in a live online virtual classroom over one day. The course provides an immersive learning experience covering AI fundamentals, ethics, and real-world business applications, with full learner support from ILX and DrTutor.
Price: £555.00 + VAT
Monthly option: £46.25 + VAT per month (subject to finance availability)

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learners will define key artificial intelligence terminology and historical milestones.


Learners will identify different types and applications of AI.


Learners will understand ethical and legal considerations associated with AI use.


Learners will recognise key AI enablers including machine learning and robotics.


Learners will understand the importance of data quality in AI systems.


Learners will identify risks related to AI-generated and managed data.


Learners will explore AI opportunities within business and governance contexts.


Learners will understand project management approaches for AI implementation.


Learners will recognise AI career opportunities and real-world use cases.


Learners will understand AI’s broader societal impact and future development.

Key facts:

Facts
  • Course Level: Essentials / Foundation
  • Duration: 1 day
  • Exam Duration: 30 minutes
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Prerequisites: None
  • Delivery Methods: Live Virtual Classroom – 1 day

Who It’s For
This course is suitable for individuals seeking an introduction to artificial intelligence, business professionals, managers, IT staff, and anyone who wants to understand how AI is used within modern organisations and its implications for business, governance, and society.


Exam Information
  • Exam Duration: 30 minutes
  • Number of Questions: 20
  • Question Type: Multiple choice
  • Pass Mark: 65%
  • Certification: BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence
  • Delivery Method: Online exam

Pre-Course Requirements
There are no formal prerequisites for this course. No prior AI or technical knowledge is required.


Frequently Asked Questions

What is the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence?
It is an accredited entry-level qualification that introduces key AI concepts, applications, and ethical considerations.

Is this course accredited?
Yes. The course is accredited by BCS, The Chartered Institute for IT.

Do I receive a certification after completing the course?
Yes. Successful candidates receive the BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence.

Do I need prior knowledge of AI?
No. The course is designed for beginners with no prior AI experience.

How long does the course take?
The course is delivered over one day in a live virtual classroom.

Is the exam included?
Yes. The AI Essentials exam is included with the course.

What is the exam format?
The exam consists of 20 multiple-choice questions.

How long is the exam?
The exam duration is 30 minutes.

What is the pass mark?
The pass mark is 65%.

Is the exam closed book?
Yes. The exam is closed book.

Who should take this course?
Anyone seeking a foundational understanding of AI for business or professional development will benefit.

How will this course help my career?
It provides recognised foundational AI knowledge, supporting roles that interact with data, technology, and digital transformation initiatives.

What salary impact can AI knowledge have?
In the UK, professionals with AI-related knowledge typically earn £40,000 to £60,000 per year, while roles directly involving AI or data analysis may exceed £70,000, depending on experience and sector.

Does this course focus on technical coding?
No. The course focuses on concepts, applications, and governance rather than programming.

Is Pass Protect available?
Yes. Pass Protect exam insurance is available as an optional extra.

Does the certification expire?
The BCS Essentials Certificate in Artificial Intelligence does not expire.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Official Examالامتحان الرسمي: Yes
Timeالوقت: 7 Hrs
security.jpgsecurity.jpg

In this course , learn about the security risks of the internet of things.

Introduction 

The internet security is a term which describes security for transactions and all activities you make online. It is actual factor of computer security and cybersecurity, including browser security, online security and network security.

The following definitions will help during this course:

·       Hacking – the gaining of unauthorised access to data in a computer system
·       Phishing – a form of social engineering attack used to steal personal data by an attacker disguised as a trusted organisation
·       Legacy technology –  an old technology no longer supported by development
·       DDoS – Distributed Denial of Service
·       Endpoint – a remote device that communicates with a network it is connected to (such as a desktop or laptop)

·       Honeypot – a system intended to mimic likely targets of cyberattacks

You will learn 

  1. Discuss the security risks of the Internet of Things
  2. Investigate ways of securing the Internet of Things

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 5-15 min
internet .pnginternet .png

In this course , learn about the internet of things and its purpose.

Introduction 

These definitions will help during this course:
·       RFID – Radio Frequency Identification
·       IP – Internet Protocol, a set of rules defining the format of data transferred over the internet or network
·       Broadband Internet – an internet connection with a high data transfer rate
·       Cellular Network – a radio network distributed over cells each served by a base station
·       Wireless Network – a network that uses wireless data connections between nodes

The Internet of Things (IoT) is the term applied to everything connected to the internet. It is increasingly being used to define objects that talk to each other. These devices range from sensors to smartphones and wearable technology (e.g. FitBit or Apple Watch).
The IoT enables devices on private networks to communicate with others. This in turn, creates a more connected world across multiple different network types.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!): Look at the fundamentals of the Internet of Things

Investigate how the Internet of Things can be enabled for all users
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
5G.png5G.png

In this course, introduction to 5G technologies.

Introduction 

5G is the fifth generation of mobile/cellular networks. It is a new global wireless standard after 1G, 2G, 3G, and 4G networks and its Uup to 100 times faster than 4G. 5G is creating never-before-seen opportunities for people and businesses.  5G wireless technology delivers higher multi-Gbps peak data speeds, ultra low latency, more reliability, massive network capacity, increased availability, and a more uniform user experience to more users.

In this course we will first look at some definitions associated with radio networks:
·       Electromagnetic spectrum
·       Base stations

·       Cells

The electromagnetic spectrum
Electromagnetic radiation covers a range of frequencies (spectrum) and associated wavelengths, commonly referred to as the electromagnetic spectrum. Radio waves have lower frequencies and longer wavelengths than visible light.

You will learn

  1. Introduce 5G technologies
  2. Explore 5G use cases and their benefit

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Electronic Communication.jpgElectronic Communication.jpg

in this course, learn about the the fundamentals of electronic communication.

Introduction 
Sine waves are used in math and physics to represent waves. See below for some key definitions that will be used throughout the session:
Frequency (f)
·       This is the number of cycles per second measured in hertz (Hz)
·       1 Hz = 1 cycle per second
Amplitude (A)
·       The height of a cycle
Phase (Φ)
·       The relative value of a variable at a point in a cycle
Wavelength (λ)

·       The physical distance over which a cycle repeats

Relationships

The wave speed (c) of electromagnetic (EM) radiation is 300,000 km/s (the ‘speed of light’).
So, as the wave speed (c) is constant:
·       Lower frequencies always have longer wavelengths
·       Higher frequencies always have shorter wavelengths

Wave speed (c), frequency (f) and wavelength (λ) are related and can be represented by a formula triangle.
\( f= \frac{c}{ \lambda } \)
Where: c = wave speed, f = frequency and λ = wavelength
\( c \equiv f \times \lambda \)
Where: c = wave speed, f = frequency and λ = wavelength
\( \lambda \equiv \frac{c}{f} \)

Where: c = wave speed, f = frequency and λ = wavelength


Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Introduce the basic concept of wave theory


Explore the electromagnetic spectrum

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
company-3115721_1280.jpgcompany-3115721_1280.jpg

In this course, learn about Industry 4.0 and Digital Transformation.

Intoduction 

The digital transformation has become very important, it is now responsible for changing industry and adapting it to a connected industry.

The following definitions will help during this session:
·       Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) – an industrial solid-state computer that makes logic-based decisions for automated processes based on monitored inputs and outputs
·       Cloud Computing – the delivery of computing services over the Internet
·       Artificial Intelligence – the ability of machines or computer systems to learn and adapt similarly to humans
  • RDA – Remote Database
  • Radio Frequency Identification
Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Explore Industry 4.0


Discuss how the Internet of Things (IoT) and 5G enable Industry 4.0


Explore 5G

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
social-media-gf4425a5ff_640.pngsocial-media-gf4425a5ff_640.png

Learn about the different types of social media, such as twitter, facebook and tiktok. Understand the positives and negative to using these as well as the risks you might face

  1. Identify the different types of social media
  2. Explain a variety of ways social media is used
  3. Explain the good and bad aspects of social media
  4. Understand how your data is used by media companies
  5. Know how to report online content

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
climbing-g6525af61b_640.pngclimbing-g6525af61b_640.png

Learn why extremists use the internet, where you might encounter online extremism, how to spot the signs of online extremist ideology and what to do if you encounter extrmist content online

Skills 

  1. Understand why online extremists use the internet
  2. Know where you might encounter online extremism
  3. Know how to spot the signs of online extremist ideology
  4. Know what to do if you encounter extremist content online
Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
smartphone-g438afed5d_640.pngsmartphone-g438afed5d_640.png

Learn about the risks when using your mobile phone such as scams and fraud and how to protect yourself against these

  1. Identify the risks presented while using your mobile phone
  2. Understand how to protect yourself against these risks

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Health and Technology.jpgHealth and Technology.jpg

In this courses you will learn about the physical and mental effects that technology can have on your health. As well as this you will look into ways to help maintain your physical and mental health while using this technology


Skills 

  1. Understand the physical effects technology can have on our health
  2. Understand the mental effects technology can have on our health
  3. Explain how different technologies affect us
  4. Understand some ways to help maintain your physical and mental health while using technology


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Builds a Relationship.jpgBuilds a Relationship.jpg

Learn what online grooming (Builds a Relationship) is and how predators use the internet to target people into doing something they don't want to do. This session looks at how to identify potential predators and the best ways of protecting yourself online

Skills

  1. Understand what grooming is
  2. Know how to identify potential predators
  3. Know how to protect yourself against online predators
  4. Identify the signs of someone experiencing grooming

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
binary-g4c6a735cb_640.jpgbinary-g4c6a735cb_640.jpg
You will learn what is meant by the term digital citizenship, the important aspects of being a digital citizen, what the digital gap is and why it is important and how to be safe and well online

Introduction 

Digital citizenship refers to the responsible use of technology and the Internet to interact with others online. A digital citizen is someone who uses IT extensively, and citizens range in age from small children to the elderly.

Being a digital citizen is about understanding digital literacy, online etiquette, online safety, and understanding the difference between private and public information. It requires users of technology to be accountable for the way they present themselves and interact with others online and encourages the participation of all online users in an effort to promote equal opportunities and make the online space one which is kind and approachable.

A good digital citizen knows how to connect with others online, how to be empathetic towards people with different backgrounds to theirs, and forms friendships online based on mutual respect.

A bad digital citizen is one who has a lack of knowledge about how to use the Internet safely, doesn’t understand the impact social media can have on themselves and others, or may even use the anonymity of the Internet to cyberbully or harass someone, or even to commit crimes.

 You will learn:

  1. Understand what is meant by the term digital citizenship
  2. Understand the important aspects of being a digital citizen
  3. Understand what the digital gap is and why it is important
  4. Understand how to keep yourself safe and well online

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
computer-g9ee81d638_640.pngcomputer-g9ee81d638_640.png

In this course : 

you will discover what is meant by the term cyberbullying and the different types of cyberbullying that can take place. As well as this you'll be able to explain why people cyberbully and what to do if you or someone you know has become a target of cyberbullying.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Explain what cyberbullying is.


Describe some of the different types of cyberbullying


Explain why people cyberbully


Explain some of the consequences that result from cyberbullying


Understand what to do if you or someone you know become a target of cyberbullying

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
blockchain-gf453ce6a5_640.pngblockchain-gf453ce6a5_640.png

In this course you will learn about the exciting world of cryptocurrency and NFTs, Delve into blockchain technology on which most cryptocurrency is based and look at the concerns that surround this developing technology

Introduction 

Digital currency, or digital money, refers to a method of payment that exists only in digital form and has no physical counterpart. Cryptocurrency is a form of virtual money that is secured by using a technique called cryptography. 

Cryptography is the creation of encryption codes to allow a secure encryption between individuals, meaning that data sent between you and another individual is private. So, if you were to make a purchase using a form of cryptocurrency, the authenticity of the currency you are sending is checked to make sure it is authentic, and that currency is then sent to the seller who then also knows that payment is legitimate, without having to use a third party, such as a bank or PayPal. 

Cryptocurrency is an exclusively digital asset that can be used to pay for things, however it is not based on any actual asset, or backed by government regulation. This means that cryptocurrency is only worth what a buyer will pay for it. This causes cryptocurrencies to be unpredictable as their worth can change dramatically over a short period of time.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand what a cryptocurrency is.


Understand what blockchain technology is.


Understand what NFT’s are.


Understand concerns surrounding cryptocurrency and NFTs.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
digital footprint.jpgdigital footprint.jpg

In this course you discover what is meant by the term digital footprint and how your online activities can add to it. Also learn how ensure your privacy online and how to build a positive digital footprint.

Introduction

A digital footprint is the name given to the trail of data and information you leave while using the Internet. This information is specific to you, and everyone who uses the Internet leaves a digital footprint of some kind.

There are two types of digital footprint:

Passive: This sort of footprint is generated by browsing the Internet, and users are often unaware data on them is being saved. Websites save information on you as cookies when you visit them; search engines store your search history, and most websites log your IP address when visiting a website. 

Active: This sort of footprint is generated when you share information online. For example, if you send an email, sign up to an online service, or post something on social media, this information can all be linked back to you.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand what is meant by the term digital footprint


Identify some of the activities which add to your footprint


Understand privacy issues relating to your digital footprint


Explain how to build a positive digital footprint

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
online-scam.pngonline-scam.png

A scam can appear in many different forms, but they are all ultimately designed to part you from your money. You may get a message via email, text or any social media messaging service, all with the intention of tricking you into giving over your details or giving the scammers money. 

Almost half of all victims of these scams are those aged 18 to 34, so it is important to remember to stay vigilant.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Know what a scam is

Understand the different types of online scams

Understand in detail what phishing and other types of scam are

Identify ways in which scammers try to defraud you

Understand how to protect yourself against scammers


Levelالمستوى: Advancedمتقدم
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
seo.pngseo.png

SEO - A Brief Overview

This learning activity provides an overview of Search Engine Optimization, or SEO.

SEO - Site Optimization

This learning activity explains how site structure and organization can have a positive effect on optimization and driving traffic to your website.

SEO - Site Organization and Structure

In this activity, we will explain the mechanics of site structure and the role it plays in search engine optimization.

SEO: Analytics

In this activity, you will explore what web analytics are and how to use them for site optimization.

SEO - Promoting your Website

This learning object explains new, free, and traditional ways to market your website.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn Search Engine Optimization 

Learn site structure and driving traffic to your website.

Learn the mechanics of site structure search engine.

Learn web analytics and how to use them for site optimization.

Learn traditional ways to market your website.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
firewall.svgfirewall.svg

Firewall is a network security device protects the application layer against attempted fraud or data theft; blocking suspicious activity. Inspecting every web request for cross-site scripting, SQL injection, this protective layer ensures that your data remains secure, a firewall is essentially the barrier that sits between a private internal network and the public Internet.

Firewall: Stateful Packet Inspection . In this learning activity you'll examine a stateful packet inspection firewall that keeps track of legitimate Internet service requests, also known as dynamic packet filtering.

Firewalls: Packet Filters. In this learning activity you'll create a packet filter.

Firewall: Gateway Servers. In this animated object, learners examine how a gateway server operates.

Firewall: Network Address Translation/Port Address Translation. In this learning activity you'll examine how network address translation works.

Firewalls: Relationships Among Firewall Perimeters. In this learning activity you'll examine how firewalls block viruses by discussing trusted, semi-trusted, and untrusted networks.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Firewall: Stateful Packet Inspection

Firewalls: Relationships Among Firewall Perimeters.

Firewalls: Packet Filters.

Firewall: Gateway Servers.

Firewall: Network Address Translation/Port Address Translation

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
hack.svghack.svg

Cross-site Scripting Awareness: In this learning course you'll explore what a denial of service attack is and learn how a single hacker can take down an entire system, you'll explore the topic of cross-site scripting, (or XSS)

Cross-Site Scripting (XSS) attacks are a kind of injection, in which malicious scripts are injected into trusted websites. XSS attacks occur when an attacker uses a web application to send malicious code.

The attacker uses XSS to send a malicious script to unwary clients. The end user’s browser will execute the script, the malicious script can access any cookies, session tokens, or other sensitive information retained by the browser and used with that site. 

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand what is Cross-site Scripting XSS

Learn and explore what a denial of service attack

Understand hacker strategies 


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: No
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Malware.jpgMalware.jpg

The Malware is a term for any type of malicious software designed to damage, harm or exploit any programmable device, service or network. Cybercriminals typically use it to extract data that they can control over victims for financial gain. That data can range from financial data, to healthcare records, to personal emails and passwords, the possibilities of what sort of information can be compromised have become endless.

In this learning course, you'll explore what malware is, what the different types of malware are, and how you can protect your computer from these threats.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn and explore what malware is.

Learn how you can protect your computer from malware.

Understand what different types of malware are.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 5-15 min
encrypted.svgencrypted.svg

Public-key cryptography, or asymmetric cryptography, is the field of cryptographic systems that use pairs of related keys. Each key pair consists of a public key and a corresponding private key. Key pairs are generated with cryptographic algorithms based on mathematical problems termed one-way functions.

Encryption is the process of translating plain text data (plaintext) into something that appears to be random and meaningless (ciphertext). Decryption is the process of converting ciphertext back to plaintext. To encrypt more than a small amount of data, symmetric encryption is used

In this learning course you'll explore public key encryption and conclude with a short quiz.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn and explore public key encryption 

Understand encryption and decryption

Explore public and private key encryption

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Networks.svgNetworks.svg

Virtual Private Networks (VPN): In this learning activity you'll explore how VPN is used to create a secure connection between two networks.

Setting Up Your Virtual Private Network (VPN): The learner will understand how to set up a Virtual Private Network (VPN) using a home computer network.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn and understand what is a Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Learn how to create a secure connection

Learn how to sett up Virtual Private Network (VPN)

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Authorization.svgAuthorization.svg

Idintifcation, Authentication versus Authorization

Identification is the action of identifying a specific user, often through a username. Authentication is the proof of this user's identity, which is commonly managed by entering a password.

Authentication and authorization are two vital information security processes that manage use to protect systems and information. However, authentication and authorization are often used interchangeably, they are separate processes used to protect an organization from cyber-attacks. Authentication is the process of verifying who a user is, while authorization is the process of verifying what they have access to. 

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn what Idintifcation is.

Learn what Authentication is.

Learn what Authorization is.

Learn the processes used to protect an organization from cyber-attacks.



Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: No
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 5-15 min
Social Engineering Attacks.jpgSocial Engineering Attacks.jpg

Social engineering is a term that encompasses a wide range of malicious activity, most common attack types that social engineers use to target victims, phishing, pretexting, baiting, quid pro quo, and tailgating. 

In this learning course, you’ll identify information hackers use to gain access to a company, explain different types of social engineering attacks, and recognize different solutions to avoid these attacks.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Learn and identify information hackers use to gain access to your company.

Learn different types of social engineering attacks.

Learn different solutions to avoid social engineering attacks.

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
attack.svgattack.svg

DDoS - Distributed Denial of Service Attacks: Explore what DDoS attacks are, the methods used to carry them out, and how to prevent them.

Man in the Middle Attacks with ARP Poisoning: In this learning activity you'll identify Man-in-the-middle attacks and discuss how they affect network security.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

DDoS - Service Attacks

Attacks with ARP Poisoning

Methods used to carry and prevent Attacks


Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 30-45 min
Network Protocols.jpgNetwork Protocols.jpg

Port States: In this learning activity you'll identify TCP and UDP port states and how they behave during interaction.

Port Scanning: In this learning activity you'll explore how port scanning is commonly used by hackers to infiltrate a network and how IT security professionals can detect it.

Port Scanning - Common Network Protocols: In this learning activity you'll explore three common network protocols that computers use to communicate in a network.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

TCP and UDP port states

Port Scanning

Common Network Protocols

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: No
Assessmentالتقييم: No
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Multi
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: No
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Working Safely In Engineering.jpgWorking Safely In Engineering.jpg

In this course you will learn to recognise the hazard symbols and warning signs found in the workplace, as well as understand what PAT testing is.

Introduction

Whether you are a student or a seasoned professional, whatever sector you work in or job you do, working safely is the most important consideration for every engineer. The work of an engineer frequently uses hazardous materials, complicated equipment, or takes place in potentially dangerous places, so it is important that everyone understands the ways that they and everyone around them can stay safe.

Safety precautions are taken in many ways, from legislation, policies and procedures to signage and labelling. In this session we will look at some of the key things you need to be aware of to ensure the safety of you and everyone around you whilst you work, including manual handling, COSHH requirements and labelling, safety signs and PAT testing.

You will learn 
  1. Learn the seven types of hazard symbols and the four types of warning signs found in the workplace
  2. Understand the importance of working safely
  3. Recognise the seven types of COSHH hazard symbols
  4. Recognise the four types of warning signs found in the workplace
  5. Know what portable appliance testing is and what it entails



Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: -
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
Working Safely In Engineering .jpgWorking Safely In Engineering .jpg

In this course, we look at leglislation surrounding workplace safety, how to stay safe at work, and learn how to document accidents or injuries in the workplace.

You will learn about the legislation involved in health and safety in the workplace, what PPE is, and what to do when an accident or incident occurs.

Introduction

Whether you are a student or a seasoned professional, whatever sector you work in or job you do, working safely is the most important consideration for every engineer. The work of an engineer frequently uses hazardous materials, complicated equipment, or takes place in potentially dangerous places, so it is important that everyone understands the ways that they and everyone around them can stay safe.

Safety precautions are taken in many ways, from legislation, policies and procedures, to signage and labelling. In this session we will look at some of the key things you need to be aware of to ensure the safety of yourself and everyone around you whilst you work, including understanding and identifying hazards and risks, writing risk assessments, PPE, accidents and incidents and first aid.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Understand the importance of working safely.

Know how to recognise and react to hazards and risks,

Know what accidents and incidents are and how to react to them

Understand what PPE is and give some examples

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min
smartphone-Products .jpgsmartphone-Products .jpg

In this course you will learn about the environmental impact of manufacturing smartphones. You will also look at the stages of life cycle assessment and the processes used to recycle smartphones.

Introduction

Sustainable engineering is the process of designing and operating systems or processes in such a way that they use energy and resources sustainably, considering their wider impact on the natural environment and the needs of future generations.

This includes the need to consider the type of materials used as well as the rate at which they are being used. If no consideration is made towards being sustainable then there are negative consequences in the short and long term; habitats may be destroyed, animals or plants may become extinct, raw materials could run out and future generations could be left without the things they need to live long, happy, healthy lives.

Skills & Outcomes (What you'll learn !!):

Explain the environmental impact of manufacturing smartphones

Identify the stages of life cycle assessment

Understand the processes used to recycle smartphones

Levelالمستوى: Intermediateمتوسط
Languageاللغة: English
Competency Frameworksأطر الكفاءات: Yes
Assessmentالتقييم: Yes
Learning Planخطة التعليم: Yes
Performance Measurement: Digital
Videoفيديو: Yes
Certificateشهادة: Yes
Timeالوقت: 15-30 min